EUB 5500 Instruction Q1E EA0612 14

Ultrasound Diagnostic Scanner
EUB-5500
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Special Notes to Operators and Maintenance Managers

Before using this system, be sure to thoroughly read this manual and make yourself
familiar with this system.
After reading this manual, keep it in an easily accessible place close to the system.
Tokyo, Japan
Q1E-EA0612-14
Copyright Hitachi Medical Corporation. 2003 - 2008, 2010.
All rights reserved.
Trademarks
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
MainConcept Motion-JPEG Codec 1999/2000-2003 MainConcept AG. All rights

reserved.
Other product and company names mentioned in this document may be the
trademarks of their respective owners.
Abbreviations
In this document, the Windows XP operating system is called Windows XP.
EC - CONFORMITY DECLARATION
Manufacturer
Hitachi Medical Corporation
4-14-1,Soto-Kanda,Chiyoda-Ku,
Tokyo,101-0021,Japan
European
Representative
Hitachi Medical
Systems
GmbH
Kreuzberger Ring 66
D-65205 Wiesbaden,
Germany
Medical Device
Modality: Diagnostic Ultrasound System
UMDNS Code: 14-278
MDD Classification: IIa
Model Name: Ultrasound Diagnostic Scanner
Model Type: EUB-5500
The undersigned hereby declares that the medical device
as specified above and related options comply with the
essential requirements of Annex I of the EC-Directive 93/42
EEC.
The declaration of conformity is based on an assessment
procedure in compliance with the EC Directive 93/42 EEC,
Annex II for a
Full Quality Assurance System

Notified Body :
TV Rheinland LGA Products GmbH

Tillystrae 2, 90431 Nrnberg
Germany
CE Ident No. :
0197
(1)
Q1E-EA0612
Manufacturer
: HITACHI MEDICAL CORPORATION

4-14-1, Soto-Kanda,
Chiyoda-Ku,
Tokyo, Japan
European Representative : Hitachi Medical Systems GmbH

Kreuzberger Ring 66
D-65205 Wiesbaden,
Germany
Tel. : +49-(0)611-973220
Fax. : +49-(0)611-9732210
Local Distributor :
(2)
Q1E-EA0612
CAUTION
The EUB-5500 Ultrasound Scanner and Probes have been designed to comply
with the -Standard for Real-Time Display of Thermal and Mechanical
Acoustic Output Indices on Diagnostic Equipment- .
This equipment provides the operator a much greater degree of real-time
information than previously available regarding ultrasound exposure to
the patient during an exam.
To properly monitor and control the Real-Time Acoustic Indices displayed
on the EUB-5500, before use of this system the operator should read the
following sections of the Instruction Manual.
Safety Consideration on Operation
7.5
Precautions against ultrasound output power
4.8.2
5.2.12
5.3.11
5.4.15
5.5.8
5.6.7
Acoustic output indices

Using ALARA in B-mode
Using ALARA in B/M-mode
Using ALARA in B/PW-mode
Using ALARA in CW-mode
5.7.13
5.7.14
Using ALARA in CFM mode

Using ALARA in CFM mode with/M and/PW modes
(3)
Q1E-EA0612
To safely and correctly use this equipment and to maintain its

performance for a long time, the operator must fully understand safe
operation procedure of the equipment, its performance, function and
maintenance service. Before using the equipment, carefully read
"Precautions in safe operation" and this "Instruction Manual" to
fully understand the described contents.
NOTICE: The contents of this instruction manual are subject to
change without prior notice for improvement of the
equipment performance.
(4)
Q1E-EA0612
Safety Consideration on Operation

Observe the following for safe operation of the equipment
1.
Authorized personnel for operation of this equipment

This equipment must be used by the authorized personnel such as doctor
and sonographer.
2.
Definition of words and symbols

2.1
Types and definition of precautionary notices
Type of precautionary
notice
Meaning (Definition)
DANGER
This note indicates any condition or action

which, if not strictly observed, could result
in direct danger such as serious personal
injury or possible death, or serious property
damage such as total loss of equipment or fire.
WARNING

in indirect danger such as possible death,
serious personal injury or light or
medium-degree personal injury, or serious
property damage such as total loss of
equipment or fire.
CAUTION

in possible danger such as partial equipment
damage or data loss of computer.
NOTICE
This note indicates important precautions

which are not related to danger but are to
be taken against operation, installation and
maintenance.
(5)
Q1E-EA0612
2.2
Type and definition of symbol

Protective earth (ground)
Equipotentiality
Caution
Off (Power disconnection from the mains)
On (Power connection to the mains)
Dangerous voltage
Operating instructions
Refer to instruction manual/ booklet
NOTE On ME EQUIPMENT Follow instructions for use
TYPE B APPLIED PART
Probe
connector
TYPE BF APPLIED PART
ECG
connector
Defibrillator-roof TYPE BF APPLIED PART
Some graphical symbols that are used in labeling of Hitachi

Ultrasound Diagnostic Scanner are compliant with EN 980:2008
standard. Refer to the following about the meanings of them.
Manufacturer Company Name and Address
Authorized Representative in The European
Community
KEEP AWAY FROM SUNLIGHT
KEEP DRY
(6)
Q1E-EA0612
3.
User's responsibility on equipment management

It is the responsibility of the user (hospital or clinic) to manage
use and maintenance of the equipment.
4.
Prohibition of remodeling
Do not remodel the equipment without the consent of Hitachi.
If the equipment would be remodeled without the consent, the guarantee
service will not be applied to the equipment.
If any modification is required on the equipment, consult with Hitachi
or our authorized dealer.
5.
Liability limitation
5.1
Hitachi shall not be liable for any failure or damage on the

equipment cased due to the installation, transfer, modification,
maintenance or repair that has been carried out by the party
other than Hitachi or our authorized dealer.
5.2

equipment caused due to trouble of other maker's equipment.
5.3

equipment caused due to modification, maintenance or repair
carried out by using repair parts other than the genuine part
specified by Hitachi.
5.4

equipment caused as the result that precaution or operation
procedure described in this instruction manual was not observed
by the user.
5.5
Hitachi shall not be liable for any consequential damage or

loss caused due to the diagnostic result or data obtained with
this equipment by any person other than the personnel authorized
to use this equipment.
5.6

equipment caused due to use of the equipment in the environmental
conditions such as power requirements or siting requirements
which are not in compliance with the conditions specified in
this instruction manual.
(7)
Q1E-EA0612
5.7
6.

equipment caused due to force majeure such as fire, earthquake,
flood, lightning or acts of God.
Necessity of periodical maintenance service

6.1
From a viewpoint of the purpose and importance of medical

equipment, it is essential to maintain safety and reliability
of the equipment always in the best condition.
Hitachi has been doing our best to assure the persistent product
quality of the equipment during manufacturing and installation
works so that the equipment can be used by users with the best
conditions for safety and reliability of the equipment.
However, safety and reliability of the equipment after delivered
shall be maintained by the user on his own responsibility.
6.2
Carry on the daily checkup and periodical maintenance service

for the equipment according to the procedures described in
"Maintenance serve" of this Instruction Manual.
6.3
Maintenance service for the equipment of which warranty period

has expired can be carried out by Hitachi or our authorized
dealer under maintenance service contract.
Contact Hitachi or our authorized dealer for this maintenance
service contract.
6.4
When daily checkup and periodical maintenance service were

carried out, keep and retain records of executed date, person
and serviced contents.
(8)
Q1E-EA0612
7.
Precautions in Operation of Ultrasound Scanner System

Observe the following to protect safety of the patient and operator.
7.1
Precautions in operation
1. Should any abnormality occur on the equipment, immediately

turn off the power switch, disconnect the power cable and
contact Hitachi's Service Division or our authorized dealer.
2. Do not operate the power switch with hand contaminated with
jelly. If the power switch is contaminated with jelly,
immediately wipe it off.
3. Do not use and connect any recording device other than the
ones specified by Hitachi.
4. Contents in the memory such as hospital name, set parameters
and various measurement data may be erased by expiration
of the built-in battery or temporary power failure. Keep
and retain records of hospital name, set parameters and
various measurement data in the printer or VCR.
5. Carry out the periodical checkup of the dust filter located
on the air inlet window of the power supply unit once a week,
and clean it if dust is found in it.
6. Clean dirt on the covers and panel of the equipment by using
cloth soaked with neutral detergent and wipe it off with
dry, soft cloth. Never use organic solvent such as thinner.
(9)
Q1E-EA0612
7.2
Precaution on installation environmental conditions
1. This equipment is not CATEGORY AP/APG EQUIPMENT.

This equipment is not explosion-proof type. Never use it
in the atmosphere where explosive gas, toxic gas, flammable
gas and oil vapor is present.
1. This equipment is not drip-proof or water-proof type. Never

use it at the following place:
The equipment is exposed to water or other liquid.
Humidity is excessively high.
The equipment is exposed to steam.
The equipment is exposed to saline air.
NOTICE:Probe head ,probe cable and footswitch is dripproof and water-proof type by the IP protection.
2. Be sure to install the equipment on the horizontal floor.
If the equipment is placed on the floor inclining more than
10, it may fall down. Securely lock the stoppers of the
casters at the place where the equipment is operated.
3. In addition to the above places, do not use the equipment
at the following places
There is much dust or sand dust.
The equipment is applied with excessive vibration or
shock.
The power line voltage fluctuates abnormally.
The power line voltage excessively drops while the
equipment being operated under a load.
The equipment is exposed to a direct sunlight.
4. Do not block the opening for air ventilation located on the
rear, top and side covers of the equipment, or the equipment
failure may be caused.
5. Neither incline the equipment more than 10 nor give an
abnormal shock when moving it. When moving the equipment
weighing more than 200kg, be sure to move it by two persons.
(10)
Q1E-EA0612
7.3
Precautions for Electrical Safety
1. This ultrasound scanner has been designed as a class 1

equipment classified according to the type of protection
against electric shock, and Type B/BF equipment classified
according to the degree of protection against electric shock
in accordance with the IEC60601-1 (General Requirements for
safety of Medical Electrical Equipment by International
Electro technical Commission).
To prevent electric shock, be sure to directly connect the
power cable of the equipment to the 3-wire power outlet which
has a protective earth terminal (with less than 10 grounding
resistance) of the grounding facility.
2. Do not detach the covers fixed with screws. Detaching the
cover and contacting with electrical component inside may
cause electric shock. For repair and checkup of the inside
of the equipment, be sure to call service from Hitachi or
our authorized dealer.
3. All ECG leads must be removed from patient to use with
high-frequency (HF) surgical equipment.
4. Do not use the ECG function to patient which uses cardiac
pacemaker or other electrical stimulators.
7.4
Precautions in use of probe
1. Do not use the probe of which the head surface is scratched

or the cable cover is damaged. If the probe is used as damaged,
it may cause electric shock.
2. The needle guide line to be displayed on the screen when
biopsy is performed with the probe connected to this
equipment is just a guide for direction of needle puncture.
When operating the biopsy needle, do it as checking the actual
position of the needle on the ultrasound image.
(11)
Q1E-EA0612
1. Handle the probes with great care. Be careful neither to

hit the probe to any hard object nor drop it, otherwise trouble
may be caused.
2. As the probe connector is not water-proof type (IP40), do
not apply any liquid or dip it in liquid. If this precaution
is not observed, it may be damaged.
3. Be sure to connect or disconnect the probe under the following
conditions. If it is done under the conditions other than
the specified below, the equipment may malfunction or be
failed.
Therefore, strictly observe the procedures
described below.
Turn off the power switch.
If the equipment is provided with more than two probe
connectors, using the probe selection key select the other
probe connector than the one to which the probe is connected
or disconnected and set FREEZE ON.
4. The probes to which pressurized or depressurized gas
sterilization can be applied are described in the Instruction
Manual of each probe. Sterilize probe according to the
method described in the Instruction Manual.
5. In case of the probes to which pressurized or depressurized
gas sterilization cannot be applied, never put them in the
following atmosphere. If this is not observed, the probe
may be damaged.
At temperature higher than 40C
In the pressurized gas
In the depressurized gas
Disinfection or sterilization other than the specified
(12)
Q1E-EA0612
7.5
Precautions against ultrasound output power
When the equipment is used for the patient with high susceptibility
such as fetus, pay attention to the following:
Set the ultrasound output power to the level as low as possible
and adjust sensitivity with the gain control.
To prevent unnecessary ultrasound output power, try to set
FREEZE to ON whenever depiction of ultrasound image is not
necessary.
Because effect by ultrasound power on the imaging area in the
M, PW, CW and CFM-modes is greater than in the B-mode, try
to use it at the level as minimum as possible.
8.
Electromagnetic Compatibility
8.1
Cautions in Handling
(1) EMC: Electro Magnetic Compatibility
Importance of the electromagnetic environment issue on
medical sites has been pointed out especially in recent years,
and the international standards (IEC60601-1-2:2001,EN
60601-1-2:2001+A1: 2006) claims the following two items of
electromagnetic compatibility:
(a) Electromagnetic emission (EMI: Electro Magnetic
Interference)
Preventing the Ultrasound system from causing
electromagnetic interference
(b) Electromagnetic immunity (EMS: Electro Magnetic
Susceptibility)
Susceptibility to electromagnetic interference the
Ultrasound system receives
EUB-5500 is compatible with the Euro Standards (EN) based
on these international standards. When using the Ultrasound
system, it is necessary to install and use it following EMC
information described in this Appendix.
(2) Mobile and portable RF communication devices
Ultrasound frequency used in the Ultrasound system agrees
accidentally with radio frequency; therefore, noise can be
mixed in the image due to electromagnetic interference of
radio frequency to the ultrasound transducer circuit. Mobile
and portable RF communication devices should not be used in
the place where the Ultrasound system is used.
(13)
Q1E-EA0612
Also, other causes of electromagnetic interference are the

radio and TV antennas and so on. It is uneasy to identify
the cause of electromagnetic interference. When the cause
of electromagnetic interference is to be identified, check
the following points:
Electromagnetic interference is intermittent or
continuous?
Only single or multiple probes receive electromagnetic
interference?
Electromagnetic interference is not resolved even if the
system is moved to any isolated area in the facility?
There is any antenna of communication, broadcasting and
so on near the facility?
Checking the above points may provide a means of judging
whether the cause of electromagnetic interference is in the
system or operating environment. When the cause of
electromagnetic interference cannot be identified even if
checking all of the above, please contact our liaison.
(3) Handling of probe connectors
A statement explaining the ESD precautionary procedures and
that the operating staff receives an explanation of ESD warning
symbol and training.
In the probe connector, some pins are exposed. Do not touch
pins. If touching any of exposed pins, this product can fail
due to electrostatic discharge.
Symbol used in this product:
(4) Handling of peripheral devices

Any digital recording device connected with our ultrasound
system (not only a DICOM server but also a computer, printer
and so on) may not carry out data transfer normally in an
environment where there is electromagnetic interference and
may cause data elimination and loss. After data transfer,
therefore, refer to the destination to check that transfer
operation has been carried out certainly. It is recommended
to save images also in the hard disk drive mounted on the
system for security purposes.
(5) Statement for the Essential Performance
The following depend on essential performance.
(14)
Q1E-EA0612
8.2
1.
Accuracy of display (Essential performance

requirement):
No distortion in display.
2.
Artefact of display (Essential performance

requirement):
No problematic artefact for qualified person.
3.
MI/TI and distance display (Essential performance

requirement):
No error in numerals.
4.
Ultrasound output power (Essential performance

requirement):
Equal to FDA regulation and Japanese MHLW requirements,
or less.
5.
Probe surface temperature (Essential performance

requirement):
50C or less in still air, and 43C or less in normal
use. (Uncertainty: Air:3.1C, TMM:0.7C
Technical Information in EMC Standards

(1) Cable list
Probes other than those listed in Table 1, and cables other
than those listed in Table 2 should not be used for EUB-5500.
If using any cable of which combination is not found in these
tables, increased electromagnetic emission or decreased
electromagnetic immunity can result.
Table 1 Probes Connectable with EUB-5500
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Probe name
EUP-S50
EUP-S50A
EUP-S52
EUP-C511
EUP-C514
EUP-C314G
EUP-C314T
EUP-C715
EUP-C516
EUP-C318T
EUP-C524
EUP-CV524
EUP-C321T
EUP-C324T
EUP-C532
EUP-L52
EUP-L53
EUP-L33
EUP-L53S
EUP-L73S
EUP-L34T
Features of probe
Sector probe
Sector probe
Sector probe
Convex probe 10R
Convex probe 40R
Convex probe 40R
Convex probe 40R
Convex probe 50R
Convex probe 60R
Convex probe 76R
Convex probe 40R
Convex probe 40R
Convex probe 10R
Convex probe 10R
Convex probe 20R
Linear probe
Linear probe
Linear probe
Linear probe
Linear probe
Linear probe
(15)
Cable length
(m)
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.3
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
Q1E-EA0612
No.
Probe name
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
EUP-L33ST
EUP-L54MA
EUP-L74M
EUP-L53L
EUP-L65
EUP-V53W
EUP-V33W
EUP-VV531
EUP-CC331
EUP-CC531
EUP-R54A-19
EUP-R54A-33
EUP-R54AW-19
EUP-R54AW-33
EUP-R53W
EUP-U533
EUP-U531
EUP-B314
EUP-B512
EUP-B514
EUP-B31
EUP-O53T
EUP-O54J
EUP-TC3
EUP-F334
EUP-F531
EUP-ES52M
EUP-ES52E
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
EUP-OL334
EUP-OL531
FG-34UX
FG-36UX
FG-38UX
EG-3630U
EG-3830UT
EG-3630UR
EG-3670URK
EG-3870UTK
EB-1970UK
Features of probe
Linear probe
Linear probe
Linear probe
Linear probe, Wide view type
Linear probe
Transvaginal probe, Convex 10R
Intracavital probe, Convex 10R/Convex 10R
Intracavital probe, Convex/Convex
Intracavital probe, Electronic radial type 6R, 19cm
Intracavital probe, Electronic radial type 6R, 33cm
Intracavital probe, Electronic radial type 360, 19cm
Intracavital probe, Electronic radial type 360, 33cm
Transrectal probe, Convex 10R
Transrectal probe, Linear/Convex
Transrectal probe, Convex 10R
Puncture probe, Convex 40R
Puncture probe, Linear
Intra-operative probe, Linear
Intra-operative probe, Linear
Continuous wave Doppler probe
Finger top probe, Convex 40R
Finger top probe, Convex 10R
Trans-esophageal probe, Electronic sector multi-plane
Trans esophageal probe (Electronic phased array multi
plane type)
Laparoscopic probe, Convex 40R
Laparoscopic probe, Convex 10R
Ultrasound endoscopic probe, Convex 10R
Ultrasound endoscopic probe, Electronic radial type
Ultrasound endoscopic probe, Electronic radial type 360
Ultrasound video bronchoscope, Convex 6R
Cable length
(m)
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.3
2.8
2.8
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.0
2.2
2.2
1.8
2.2
2.2
3.0
3.0
3.0
4.2
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.4
3.4
3.7
3.7
3.2
Table 2 Cables Connectable with EUB-5500

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Name
CP103US (ECG cable)
FOOT SWITCH
FOOT SWITCH (Twin)
LINE OUT
LAN
RS-232C
Parallel
RCA
BNC
Shielding
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
(16)
Maximum cable length (m)

3.3
2.0
2.0
1.0
3.0
1.7
1.5
1.5
1.5
Q1E-EA0612
No.
10
11
12
13
Name
S-VHS
VCR Remote
Print Remote
Mini-Probe interface
Shielding
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Maximum cable length (m)

1.9
1.7
1.5
1.0
(2) Table of electromagnetic emission compatibility standards

EUB-5500 is compatible with the standards of electromagnetic
emission shown in Table 3.
Table 3 Electro Magnetic Emission Compatibility Standards of
EUB-5500
Guidance and manufacturers declaration - electromagnetic emissions
EUB-5500 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the
user of the EUB-5500 should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Emission test
Compliance
Electromagnetic environment - guidance
RF emissions
EUB-5500 uses RF energy only for its internal function.
Group 1
Therefore, its RF emissions are very low and are not likely
CISPR 11/EN 55011
to cause any interference in nearby electronic equipment.
EUB-5500 is suitable for use in all establishments,
RF emissions
including domestic establishments and those directly
Class A
connected to the public low-voltage power supply network
CISPR 11/EN 55011
that supplies buildings used for domestic purposes.
Harmonic emissions
IEC/EN 61000-3-2
Voltage fluctuations /
flicker emissions
Class A
Complies
IEC/EN 61000-3-3
Do not use EUB-5500 being extremely close to any other device.

If it needs to be used being close to any other device, ensure
that the ultrasound system works normally in the positional
relationship in advance.
(17)
Q1E-EA0612
(3) Table of electro magnetic immunity compatibility standards

EUB-5500 is compatible with the electro magnetic immunity
standards shown in Table 4 and 5.
Table 4 Electro Magnetic Immunity Compatibility Standards of
EUB-5500 -1
Guidance and manufacturers declaration - electromagnetic immunity
EUB-5500 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below.
The customers or the user of EUB-5500 should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Electromagnetic environment IEC/EN 60601 Test
Compliance level
Immunity test
guidance
level
Floors should be wood, concrete
(2, 4, 6) kV contact
(2, 4, 6) kV contact
Electrostatic
or ceramic tile. If floors are
(2, 4, 8) kV air
(2, 4, 8) kV air
discharge (ESD)
covered with synthetic material,
the relative humidity should be at
IEC/EN 61000-4-2
least 30%.
Mains power quality should be
2 kV for power
2 kV for power
Electrical fast
that of a typical commercial or
supply lines
supply lines
transient/burst
hospital environment.
1 kV for signal lines
1 kV for signal line
IEC/EN 61000-4-4
Surge
2 kV common mode
< 5 % UT
(>95 % dip in UT)
for 0.5 cycle
1 kV differential
mode
2 kV common
mode
< 5 % UT
(>95 % dip in UT)
for 0.5 cycle
40 % UT
(60 % dip in UT
for 5 cycles
40 % UT
(60 % dip in UT
for 5 cycles
70 % UT
(30 % dip in UT
for 25 cycles
70 % UT
(30 % dip in UT
for 25 cycles
< 5 % UT
(>95 % dip in UT
for 5 sec
< 5 % UT
(>95 % dip in UT
for 5 sec
1 kV differential
mode
IEC/EN 61000-4-5
Voltage dips, short
interruptions and
voltage variations
on power supply
input lines
IEC/EN 61000-4-11
Power frequency
(50/60 Hz)
magnetic field
3 A/m
3 A/m

hospital environment.
hospital environment. If the
user of EUB-5500 requires
continued operation during power
mains interruptions, it is
recommended that the
EUB-5500 be powered from an
uninterruptible power supply.
Power frequency magnetic fields

should be at levels characteristic
of a typical location in a typical
commercial or hospital
environment.
IEC/EN 61000-4-8
NOTE: UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
(18)
Q1E-EA0612
Table 5 Electro Magnetic Immunity Compatibility Standards of

EUB-5500 -2
Guidance and manufacturers declaration - electromagnetic immunity
EUB-5500 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below.
The customer or the user of EUB-5500 should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Immunity test
IEC/EN60601 test
Compliance
Electromagnetic environment level
level
guidance
Portable and mobile RF communications
equipment should be used no closer to any
part of EUB-5500, including cables, than
the recommended separation distance
calculated from the equation applicable to
the frequency of the transmitter.
Recommended separation distance
Conducted RF
3 Vrms
IEC/EN 61000-4-6 150 kHz to 80 MHz
3 Vrms
d = 1 .2 P
Radiated RF
3 V/m
IEC/EN 61000-4-3 80 MHz to 2.5 GHz
3 V/m
d = 1 .2 P
80 MHz to 800 MHz
d = 2 .3 P
800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
where, P is the maximum output power

rating of the transmitter in watts (W)
according to the transmitter manufacturer
and d is the recommended separation
distance in meters (m)
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters,
as determined by an electromagnetic site
survey a, should be less than the
compliance level in each frequency range
b
.
Interference may occur in the vicinity of
equipment marked with the following
symbol:
NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by
absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
a
Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones
and land mobile radios, armature radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be
predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF
transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in
the location in which EUB-5500 is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above, EUB-5500
should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional
measures may be necessary such as reorienting or relocating EUB-5500.
Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than 3 V/m.
(19)
Q1E-EA0612
(4) Recommendable separation distance

Table 6 shows the recommendable separation distance between
EUB-5500 and portable/mobile RF communication devices.
Table 6 Recommendable Separation Distance between
Portable/Mobile RF Communication Devices and EUB-5500
Recommendable Separation Distance between Portable/Mobile RF Communication
Devices and EUB-5500
EUB-5500 is intended to be used in electromagnetic environment where RF
interference is controlled. The customers or users of EUB-5500 can promote
prevention of electromagnetic interference by controlling the minimum distance
between the portable/mobile RF communication devices (transmitter) and
EUB-5500, which are recommended below based on the maximum output of the
communication device.
Separation distance based on frequency of the transmitter
Maximum output
(m)
power rating of
80MHz~800MHz
800MHz~2.5GHz
150kHz~80MHz
transmitter
(W)
d = 1.2 P
d = 1 .2 P
d = 2 .3 P
0.01
0.1
1
10
100
0.12
0.38
1.2
3.8
12
0.12
0.38
1.2
3.8
12
0.23
0.73
2.3
7.3
23
As for transmitters of which maximum output power rating is not listed above, the
recommendable separation distance d expressed in meters (m) can be determined by using
the equation corresponding to the frequency of the transmitter. P in the equation
is a rating of the maximum output power expressed in watts (W) provided by the transmitter
manufacturer.
NOTE 1 In 80MHz and 800MHz, separation distance of the higher frequency band is applied.
NOTE 2 These guide lines do not apply to all circumstances. Electromagnetic diffusion
can be affected by reflection and absorption from and by buildings, objects
and human beings.
(20)
Q1E-EA0612
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Outline of EUB-5500 1-1
1.1
General 1-1
1.2
Features 1-1
1.3
Intended Use 1-5
1.4
Environmental conditions 1-6
1.5
Service Life 1-6
1.6
Power Requirements 1-7
1.7
Installation 1-8
1.8
Precautions in handling 1-10
1.9
1.8.1
Handling probes 1-10
1.8.2
Precautions in operation and use 1-10
1.8.3
Monitor handling 1-13
Precautions regarding ultrasound output 1-14
1.10 Label location 1-15

Chapter 2 Equipment Composition 2-1
2.1
Standard Components 2-1
2.2
Optional Components 2-1
Chapter 3 Components and Functions 3-1

3.1
Component Description 3-1
3.2
Keyboard Panel 3-2
Chapter 4 Operation Procedures 4-1

4.1
4.2
Preparation before Use 4-1

4.1.1
Connecting the probe 4-1
4.1.2
Positioning the viewing monitor 4-2
4.1.3
Check before power ON 4-3
Starting the Equipment 4-4

4.2.1
Power ON 4-4
4.2.2
Releasing Freeze 4-5
4.2.3
Adjusting brightness of the monitor 4-5
4.2.4
Selecting a probe and application 4-6
4.3
Setting Auto Freeze Function 4-8
4.4
Patient 4-9
4.5
ID Input 4-10
4.6
Entering Hospital Name 4-21
(21)
Q1E-EA0612
4.7
Changing Time 4-21
4.8
Controls Affecting the Acoustic Output 4-22
4.9
4.8.1
Acoustic output level 4-22
4.8.2
Acoustic output indices 4-23
4.8.3
ULTRASOUND POWER Control 4-29
Ending Use 4-31
4.10 The caution of connecting with Multiplane

Transesophageal Probe EUP-ES52M and EUP-ES52E 4-32
4.11 The caution of connecting with Intracavital probe
EUP-R54AW-19/33, Linear type probe (Wide view type)
EUP-L53L and endoscopic probe EG-3670URK 4-33
Chapter 5 Operation Modes 5-1
5.1
5.2
Overview 5-1
5.1.1
Keyboard operation 5-1
5.1.2
TRACKBALL PRIORITY 5-2
5.1.3
Function menu operation 5-2
5.1.4
MAIN MENU operation 5-6
B mode 5-8
5.2.1
Display of B mode 5-8
5.2.2
Gain adjustment 5-8
5.2.3
Switching over electronic focus 5-9
5.2.4
Switching over electronic focus steps 5-10
5.2.5
Switching over transmit frequency 5-10
5.2.6
Moving display position 5-11
5.2.7
Twin screen display of B mode images 5-13
5.2.8
Advanced dTHI (dynamic Tissue Harmonic Image) 5-13
5.2.9
MODE DEPENDED menu 5-15
5.2.10 IMAGE PROCESS menu 5-21

5.2.11 B MENU of MAIN MENU 5-26
5.2.12 Using ALARA in B-mode 5-33
5.3
M-mode 5-35
5.3.1
Displaying B/M-mode image 5-35
5.3.2
Adjusting gain (brightness) 5-35
5.3.3
Single screen display of M-mode Image 5-36
5.3.4
Moving display position 5-36
5.3.5
Switching electronic focus 5-37
5.3.6
Freeze of M-mode image 5-37
(22)
Q1E-EA0612
5.3.7
Switching over sweep speed 5-38
5.3.8
5.3.9
IMAGE PROCESS menu 5-40
5.3.10 M MENU of MAIN MENU 5-42

5.3.11 Using ALARA in B/M-mode 5-44
5.4
PW Mode 5-46
5.4.1
Display of B/PW-mode 5-46
5.4.2
Display of Doppler mode from single B mode 5-47
5.4.3
5.4.4
Adjusting Doppler angle 5-48
5.4.5
Various adjustment functions 5-49
5.4.6
Switching over reference frequencies (REF FREQ)

5-49
5.4.7
Moving base line 5-49
5.4.8
Switching over velocity range (PRF) 5-50
5.4.9
Adjusting Doppler sound volume 5-50
5.4.10 Oblique function <Exclusive for linear probe> 5-50

5.4.11 Switching over sample gate width 5-51
5.4.12 MODE DEPENDED menu 5-52
5.4.14 DOP. MENU of MAIN MENU 5-57
5.4.15 Using ALARA in B/PW-mode 5-60
5.5
5.6
Steerable CW Mode 5-62

5.5.1
Display of steerable CW-mode image 5-62
5.5.2
Gain adjustment 5-63
5.5.3
Selection of reference frequency (REF FREQ) 5-63
5.5.4
Adjustment functions 5-63
5.5.5
5.5.6
5.5.7
Dop. Menu of Main Menu 5-66
5.5.8
Using ALARA in CW-mode 5-67
Single Element CW-Mode 5-69

5.6.1
Displaying single element CW-mode image 5-69
5.6.2
5.6.3
5.6.4
5.6.5
(23)
Q1E-EA0612
5.7
5.6.6
Dop. MENU of MAIN MENU 5-73
5.6.7
Using ALARA in CW-Mode 5-73
CFM Mode 5-74

5.7.1
Displaying CFM-mode image 5-74
5.7.2
Setting COLOR BOX range 5-76
5.7.3
Sampling gate moves depending on the color ROI 5-78
5.7.4
Adjusting gain (Brightness) 5-78
5.7.5
5.7.6
Reference frequency (REF FREQ) 5-79
5.7.7
Velocity Range (PRF) 5-79
5.7.8
Baseline 5-80
5.7.9
Oblique <Exclusive for linear probes> 5-81
5.7.10 MODE DEPENDED menu 5-82

5.7.12 CFM MENU of MAIN MENU 5-94
5.7.13 Using ALARA in CFM mode 5-98
5.7.14 Using ALARA in CFM mode with/M and/PW modes 5-100
5.8
5.9
ECG Function 5-102

5.8.1
Connecting cords 5-102
5.8.2
Displaying physiological signal waveform 5-103
5.8.3
ECG synchronization (ECG SYNC) 5-106
5.8.4
ECG MENU of MAIN MENU 5-110
Needle Guide Line 5-111
5.10 Omni-Directional M mode 5-116

5.10.1 General 5-116
5.10.2 Features 5-116
5.10.3 Operating requirements of ODM function 5-117
5.10.4 Real-time ODM mode 5-118
5.10.5 ODM beam line operation 5-120
5.10.6 Single /Dual ODM modes 5-122
5.10.7 Beam line center control in dual ODM mode 5-123
5.10.8 Image quality adjustment function (IMAGE PROCESS
menu) 5-124
5.10.9 Cine memory ODM mode 5-125
5.10.10 Application parameter setup 5-126
5.11 TDI Mode 5-128
5.11.1 General 5-128
(24)
Q1E-EA0612
5.11.2 Basic function of TDI 5-128

5.11.3 Operating requirements of TDI function 5-128
5.11.4 TDI-B mode 5-130
5.11.5 TDI-M mode 5-131
5.11.6 TDI-PW mode 5-133
5.11.7 Blend function 5-134
5.11.8 Application parameter setup 5-135
5.12 360 Radial display mode 5-139
5.12.1 360 Radial display 5-139
5.12.2 Special operating method in the 360 Radial display
mode 5-140
5.13 Usage methods of Probe Extension unit EZU-AB7 5-145
5.13.1 Connecting the probe 5-145
5.13.2 Switching the probe 5-147
5.14 Zoom Function 5-148
5.14.1 Zoom function(usual) 5-148
5.14.2 HI Zoom function 5-150
Chapter 6 Character, Annotation and Body Mark 6-1
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
Entering Characters 6-1

6.1.1
Character input menu 6-1
6.1.2
Deleting characters 6-3
6.1.3
Ending entry 6-3
Entering Characters with Annotation 6-3

6.2.1
Calling ANNOTATION menu 6-3
6.2.2
ANNOTATION function menu 6-4
6.2.3
Display setting of ANNOTATION menu 6-6
6.2.4
Ending ANNOTATION menu 6-6
6.2.5
List of ANNOTATION 6-7
6.2.6
Registration of user defined annotation 6-14
Entering Body Mark 6-15

6.3.1
Displaying body mark 6-15
6.3.2
Moving position of probe mark 6-16
6.3.3
Adjusting angle of probe mark 6-16
6.3.4
Displaying upright position mark 6-16
6.3.5
Operating probe mark supporting radial scan 6-16
6.3.6
Body Mark function menu 6-17
Preset Operation function 6-19
(25)
Q1E-EA0612
6.4.1
The usage of a Preset Operation function 6-19
6.4.2
Set up Preset Operation 6-20
6.4.3
Details of Preset Operation Setup Menu 6-23
Chapter 7 Main Menu 7-1

7.1
Starting Main Menu 7-1
7.2
Main Menu of each Ultrasound Mode 7-1
7.3
Display Menu 7-2
7.4
Meas.Menu 7-3
7.5
Image Mem. Menu 7-3
7.6
Image Data Transfer Menu 7-4
7.7
Recorder Menu 7-5
7.8
Physiology Menu 7-7
7.9
Setup Menu 7-7
7.10 Disk Menu 7-27

Chapter 8 APPLICATION Function 8-1
8.1
Switching over APPLICATION 8-1
8.2
Editing APPLICATION Function 8-2
8.3
8.2.1
Current Condition 8-3
8.2.2
Edit Data 8-3
8.2.3
Copy & Paste 8-3
8.2.4
Delete 8-4
8.2.5
Edit Name 8-4
8.2.6
Default application setting 8-4
8.2.7
Export/Import 8-4
8.2.8
Replacing APPLICATION order 8-5
8.2.9
Ending edit 8-6
Edit Data <APPLICATION parameter setting menu> 8-7

8.3.1
APPLICATION parameter setting menu 8-7
8.3.2
B-Mode Menu 8-8
8.3.3
M-Mode Menu 8-11
8.3.4
D-Mode Menu 8-12
8.3.5
CFM-Mode Menu 8-16
8.3.6
dTHI Menu 8-21
8.3.7
Display 8-22
8.3.8
Annotation Menu 8-24
8.3.9
Measurement menu 8-25
(26)
Q1E-EA0612
8.3.10 Body Mark 8-31

8.3.11 Others Menu 8-34
8.4
Export/Import Menu 8-40

8.4.1
Opening Export/Import Menu 8-40
8.4.2
Details of Menu 8-40
8.4.3
Export Application 8-41
8.4.4
Import Application 8-42
Chapter 9 Image memory unit 9-1

9.1
Image memory 9-1
9.2
Image filing function 9-3

9.2.1
Store to Hard Disk function 9-3
9.2.2
Set up Filing 9-7
9.2.3
Transfer of Image 9-17
9.2.4
Filing dialog 9-19
9.2.5
Copy and Move 9-29
9.2.6
Retrieve of Images 9-34
9.2.7
Edit of image file: Merged Folder 9-46
9.2.8
Batch transferring / printing for every patient

9-48
9.2.9
Temporary save at the time of transferring error

9-50
9.2.10 Temporary save at the time of printing error 9-51

9.2.11 About the DB repair when the equipment terminates
abnormally last time while it was running 9-53
9.3
Cine memory mode 9-54

9.3.1
Record of image 9-54
9.3.2
Memory capacity setting 9-55
9.3.3
Continuous record mode and continuous record of

heart beat automatic detection mode 9-56
9.3.4
Image replay 9-57
Chapter 10 VCR / DVD video recorder (option) 10-1

10.1 Remote control of VCR 10-1
10.1.1 Image recording 10-1
10.1.2 Selection of VCR/EXT mode and remote control of
VCR 10-2
10.2 Remote control of DVD video recorder 10-5
10.2.1 Image recording 10-5
10.2.2 Selection of VCR/EXT mode and remote control of
(27)
Q1E-EA0612
DVD video recorder 10-7

10.3 Measurement on review image 10-15
10.3.1 Measurement procedure 10-15
10.3.2 Registration of review image mode 10-19
10.3.3 Mode adjustment function 10-26
10.3.4 Entering the comment 10-26
Chapter 11 Precaution in Combination with Peripheral Devices 11-1
11.1 Peripheral equipment 11-1
11.2 Precautions in connection of peripheral devices 11-2
11.3 Peripheral devices possible to use on outside commercial
power supply outlet 11-3
11.4 Operation of peripheral devices 11-3
11.5 Connection of Peripheral devices 11-4
11.6 Connection of PC printer and the HUB for Network function
11-7
Chapter 12 Movement 12-1
12.1 Movement of equipment 12-1
12.1.1 Preparation before movement 12-1
12.1.2 Precautions in movement 12-1
12.2 Transportation of equipment 12-3
Chapter 13 Maintenance and Checkup 13-1
13.1 Check before use 13-1
13.2 Checkup while using the scanner unit 13-2
13.3 Periodical checkup 13-2
13.4 Backup of system setting data 13-3
13.5 Periodical test of system safety 13-3
13.6 Periodical inspection of system performance 13-3
13.7 Checkup after storage for a long time 13-3
13.8 Cleaning of equipment 13-4
13.9 Functional Checkup 13-9
13.10 Waste Products 13-10
Chapter 14 Repair, readjustment and disposal 14-1
Chapter 15 Specifications 15-1
15.1 Ultrasound Transmitter/Receiver 15-1
15.1.1 Type of Probes 15-1
15.1.2 Image Examination Modes 15-1
(28)
Q1E-EA0612
15.1.3 Probe connection 15-1

15.1.4 Dynamic Range 15-1
15.1.5 Gain Adjustment 15-1
15.1.6 Focusing 15-2
15.1.7 Acoustic Power Level Control 15-2
15.1.8 Count of newly added application 15-2
15.2 Digital Scan Converter 15-2
15.2.1 B-mode Image Display 15-2
15.2.2 Field of View 15-2
15.2.3 Image Orientation/Rotation 15-2
15.2.4 M-mode Image Display 15-3
15.2.5 Image Processing 15-3
15.2.6 Measurement Functions 15-3
15.2.7 Character Display 15-4
15.2.8 Body Marks 15-5
15.2.9 Application 15-5
15.2.10 VCR Control 15-5
15.2.11 Storage Devices 15-5
15.3 Doppler 15-6
15.4 Color Flow Mapping 15-8
15.5 Image Filling Software 15-10
15.6 Cine Memory 15-11
15.7 Option 15-12
15.7.1 BIO Unit EZU-EK25 15-12
15.7.2 Omni-Directional M mode display software EZU-OD2
15-12
15.7.3 SCSI Card Interface unit EZU-Pi1 15-13
15.7.4 Network Interface EZU-Pi6 15-13
15.7.5 Digital Capture card unit EZU-Pi11 15-14
15.7.6 Steerable CW doppler unit EZU-ST5 15-14
15.7.7 CW unit EZU-CW4 (for pencil CW probe) 15-14
15.7.8 Remote Control Unit
EZU-RH4 15-15
15.7.9 Remote Control Interface Unit EZU-RiF3E 15-15

15.7.10 Disposable ECG electrode adapter EZU-DA1 15-16
15.7.11 Probe Extension unit EZU-AB7 15-16
15.7.12 USB HUB unit EZU-UH2 15-16
15.7.13 USB Memory Interface unit EZU-UM1 15-16
(29)
Q1E-EA0612
15.8 Other 15-17

15.8.1 Auxiliary AC Outlet 15-17
15.8.2 Power Requirements 15-17
15.8.3 Operating Environment 15-17
15.8.4 External Dimensions 15-17
15.8.5 Weight 15-17
Appendix A Message list A-1
Appendix B SCSI Printer B-1
Appendix C USB Printer C-1
Appendix D How to use a log file D-1
Appendix E The rate of compression of a file E-1
Appendix F Starting the Ultrasound Equipment from the System CD F-1
Appendix G Recommended/Tested DVD-RAM/DVD+RW/CD-RW G-1
Appendix H Handling of DVD-RAM/DVD+RW/CD-RW Media H-1
Appendix I Using the PC Printer I-1
Appendix J Handling of a DVD MULTI drive J-1
Appendix K Handling of a USB Memory K-1
Index Index-1
NOTICE: Please be noted that in some cases there are differences between
displays of ultrasound scanner quoted in this instruction manual
and actual displays. (ex.: "MI", "TIS", "TIB, "TIC and so on.)
(30)
Q1E-EA0612
Chapter 1 Outline of EUB-5500

1.1 General
Model EUB-5500 is a multi-functional ultrasound scanner in which
Doppler, Color Flow Mapping, etc. are provided and all circuits
related to image quality are fully digitalized.
As not only linear scan type and convex scan type probes, but also
phased array scan type probe can be operated with EUB-5500, it is
possible to use it for any field of application.
Furthermore, cine memory, cardiac measurement, patient report
functions and so on are provided. Since Windows XP is used as a basic
OS, FDD and DVD MULTI drives are incorporated, it is easily compatible
with various kinds of interface including an image filing function
and DICOM 3.0, etc.
NOTICE: The function of the network can be used after Network
Interface option is released.
1.2 Features
(1)
True digital architecture

Due to beamformer which is decisively concerned to the image
quality and all image processing are digitalized, dynamic
receiving focus and low cross-talk, high spatial resolution,
wide dynamic range and high contrast resolution are realized.
Due to Quadra beam processing and the latest image processing
technology, frame rate is improved much more faster comparing
with conventional system and high definition and high resolution
image can be observed.
(2)
Quick response
Change-over
of
modes,
imaging
conditions
setting,
switching-over of probes and applications are performed fast
so that an operator can concentrate his attention on the patient.
(3)
Usable for wide field of application

Besides the linear scan type and convex scan type probes the
phased array scan type probe is also usable. So, it is possible
to cover from abdominal and obstetric to cardiovascular fields.
1-1
Q1E-EA0612
(4)
Improved resolution
Together with the vitalization as stated above, because of
2-dimensional beam emission weighting a focusing zone of beam
emission focus is largely improved. As the result of it, even
in the single focus a homogeneous image can be obtained from
near to far field and also an image observation with high frame
rate is achieved.
Due to wide band probes, dynamic focusing in echo receiving
and low cross talk following three features, high spatial
resolution, wide dynamic range and high contrast resolution
are realized.
(5)
15-inch LCD Monitor

As a 15-inch LCD Monitor is used, it is improved in reduction
of weight and possible to observe flickerless images.
(6)
Windows XP as OS
Windows XP is adopted as a basic OS so that the scanner system
is compatible with various kinds of interface including DICOM
3.0 .
(7)
WideView function
The WideView function is to show a wide ranged panoramic image
up to 60 cm length at maximum by abstracting feature from the
image changing due to scanning probe so that it is possible
to display a very wide image information on a single image.
(8)
Adaptive Imaging (HI REZ)

Adaptive imaging is the technique to generate optimum image
with changing filter characteristic depending on input signal.
This technique, which installed this ultrasound diagnostic
scanner, reduces speckle noise on B-mode images and provides
uniformly and high contrast images.
(9)
Automatic image optimization(HI Support)

It is the function to adjust TGC and B mode gain, base line,
PRF and Doppler gain etc. so that it may become the optimal
image automatically, and leads to shortening of inspection time.
(10) Zoom function

Compared with the usual pan zoom image, scanning line density
and frame rate improve, and a high definition picture is
displayed.
1-2
Q1E-EA0612
(11) Omni-Directional M mode (ODM function)

Usually the normal M-mode image is controlled by the beam
direction.
With this function, however, it is possible to display the M-mode
image on an optional line in the tomographic image, so it enables
to perform more accurate left ventricle volume measurement.
(12) Real time Doppler measurement function
Automatic tracing function and measuring function in
Doppler-mode have been allowed to apply only to freeze-images,
but with this function it is possible to perform it to real
time images which contributes to shorten the time for
examination.
(13) Image filing function
(a) Versatile image filing functions image record
For image filing a digital image recording system which
provides recording without quality distortion is adopted.
This function can save still images and movies to hard disk.
Still images can be recorded to FDD and not only still images
but also movies can be recorded to DVD-RAM/DVD+RW/CD-RW
and USB memories.
It is also compatible with DICOM 3.0 (option).
(b) Image filing function, offering easier handling image
playback
Image retrieval display controls all the driving units.
A care for easy routine operation is duly paid, which enable
users to resort data by patient ID or name and retrieve
data by keywords.
(14) User definable measuring function
Regarding measuring function users can reduce or add items for
measurement. Also, it is possible to make a new measuring
item(s) making use of basic tool prepared in advance.
(15) Realtime archiving unit
It is the function to record a B-mode and a color mode image
on a hard disk as a digital movie file on real time. The
operationality of the recording of digital motion picture is
improved by this function.
1-3
Q1E-EA0612
(16) DICOM function

Images can be transferred to DICOM server, printed out to DICOM
printer and acquired the patient information from Worklist
server with DICOM 3.0 standard. In addition, DICOM data stored
in DICOM server can be playbacked(Query / Retrieve) on this
unit.
(17) Real-time 3D function
This is a function to swing the scanning part of transducer
mechanically in fan-like and to construct 3D image at the same
time. 3D image can be displayed in real-time.
(18) IMT Measurement function
IMT(Intima-Media Thickness) measurement is enabled by detecting
the position of intima and adventitia of carotid artery.
(19) Remote control function
Freeze, REF, mode and etc. keys of the operation panel can be
switched by remote control. This is useful function in case
of not being able to operate the panel like endoscopy, laparoscopy
and intraoperative examination.
(20) Picture in picture function
Optical image transferred from endoscope and laparoscopic and
US image can be displayed on the same screen.
(21) Speech recognition function
- System control function
The operation panel of the system can be controlled by speech
recognition. This is useful function in case of not being able
to operate the panel like endoscopic examination and so on.
(22) Easily operable keyboard
As key arrangement is taken in consideration of frequency of
use, an operation efficiency is improved. Since alphanumeric
keyboard is provided with back-light, it is possible to input
patient ID and name in a dark examination room.
(23) Excellent mobility with four swivel casters
As all the four casters are of swivel type, it is easy to move
in narrow space. Due to reduced friction force to floor it
is easy to move from ward to ward.
1-4
Q1E-EA0612
1.3 Intended Use

This equipment is a compact multifunction ultrasound scanner system
equipped with Doppler and color flow mapping functions. This
equipment can be applied to examinations in a wide clinical fields
(Abdominal, Cardiac, Intra-operative, Fetal, Pediatric, Small Organ,
Peripheral Vessel, Biopsy, Trans-rectal, Trans-vaginal, Neonatal
Cephalic, Adult Cephalic, Endoscopy, Gynecology, Urology,
Laparoscopic) in combination with various kinds of convex, linear
and phased array high definition probes from 1.0MHz to 14MHz. Every
types of convex,linear and phased array high definition probes are
developed and designed to display in B,B/M,or M-mode image.
Furthermore usable for Doppler,Color Doppler and Color Flow Angio
methods depending on the used equipment model. And pencil type probe
(EUP-TC3) is developed and designed to display in CW Doppler mode
image. The ODM, 3D, Real-time 3D, DICOM, Wide View, remote control
function, picture in picture function, speech recognition function,
and Real-time Archiving functionalities are also available as options.
Please read the clause of safety Consideration on Operation before
using it. Then,it is possible to connect several kind of peripherals
(e.g. Image printer,VCR). In details, refer to the section of
Precaution in Combination with Peripheral Devices.
1-5
Q1E-EA0612
1.4 Environmental conditions

Observe the following environmental conditions for safe and correct
operation of the equipment.
(1)
Environmental conditions in operation

Ambient temperature
: +10C ~ +35C
Relative humidity
: 30 ~ 85% (subject to no condensation)
Atmospheric pressure : 700 ~ 1060hPa
(2)
Daily storage conditions

Ambient temperature
: -10C ~ +40C
Relative humidity
: 10 ~ 90%(subject to no condensation)
(3)
Environmental conditions for transportation (in packing)

Ambient temperature
: -10C ~ +60C
Relative humidity
: 10 ~ 95%(subject to no condensation)
1.5 Service Life

The service life of this equipment or the component is as follows.
(1)
Main unit
: 7 years
(2)
Monitor
: 3 years
These lifespan can be applied when the equipment will be used under
the specified environment and when the recommended
maintenance/checkup will be performed and when the periodic
replacement parts will be appropriately exchanged.
Refer to Chapter 13 Maintenance and Checkup for the recommended
maintenance/checkup.
Please contact Hitachi service Dept. or our authorized dealer with
regard to the periodic replacement parts.
1-6
Q1E-EA0612
1.6 Power Requirements

This equipment esquires the following power supply. Never use the
equipment with the power conditions other than these specifications,
otherwise the equipment may be damaged.
(1)
Main voltage :
AC230V 10% (internally selectable to

100/110/120/220/240VAC)
Be sure to use the power supply of which fluctuation against

the rated voltage is within 10%. If the equipment is used with
the voltage other than the specified range, the performance
of the equipment may not be fully obtained.
(2)
Mains phase
: Single phase
(3)
Mains frequency
: 50/60Hz
(4)
Power supply capacity : More than 1.2kVA
(5)
Replacement of fuse
For replacement of fuse, use the supplied fuse according to
the following table. Never use any fuse other than the specified,
otherwise damage to the equipment will result.
Table 1.6-1 List of Usable Fuses
Fuse No.
Label name
Rating
F1
LINE OUTPUT
F2
LINE OUTPUT
AC100 ~ 120V
T 6.3AL/250V
AC220 ~ 240V
T3.15AL/250V
T 1.6AL/250V
Use the slow-blow type fuse. Do not use fast-blow type fuse.
Remove fuse holder as Fig. 1.6-1,and exchange a fuse when a
fuse blows.
FUSE
FUSE HOLDER
Fig. 1.6-1 replacement of fuse
1-7
Q1E-EA0612
1.7 Installation
Use the equipment in the facilities which is equipment to the hospital
or research organ.
To safeguard the patient and operator and to ensure correct
functioning of the equipment, observe the following installation
requirements.
(1)
Environmental requirements
Use the equipment within the range of the environmental
conditions specified in Specifications.
DANGER
This equipment is not explosion-proof type. Never use the

equipment in the atmosphere where explosive gas, toxic gas,
flammable gas and oil vapor is present.
This equipment is not a drip-proof or water-proof type. Avoid

use of the equipment in the following environments, or equipment
failure may be caused.
Place where the equipment is exposed to direct sunlight.
Place close to heat generating equipment such as heating
apparatus and humidifier.
Place where the equipment is exposed to water spray or
splash.
Place here much dust is present.
(2)
Power supply facility

Use the equipment within the range of the power requirements
specified in Specifications.
(3)
Floor conditions
Be sure to use the equipment on the horizontal, flat floor.
If the equipment is used on the floor inclining more the 10,
it may fall down.
Also surely lock the stoppers of the casters before operation
of the equipment.
1-8
Q1E-EA0612
(4)
Space requirements for operation

The physical dimensions of this equipment is 500(W) 800(D)
1400(H) mm. Keep a space of at least 10cm in the surrounding
area of the equipment.
(5)
Space requirements for ventilation

This equipment is equipped with a ventilation fan on the rear
side. Keep a space of more than 10cm from the rear side of the
equipment. Also a vent is located each at the lower part of
the front and rear sides. Be careful not to block the vents.
(6)
Protection against electromagnetic disturbance

Strong radiation or electromagnetic wave can cause malfunction
of the equipment or noise on image. Therefore, care should
be taken not to allow those devices to come closer to this
equipment.
(This ultrasound scanner has been designed as Group I, Class
A equipment classified according to the type of electromagnetic
compatibility in accordance with the IEC60601-1-2)
The probes for internal use might not comply with

electromagnetic compatibility requirement when misused for
external applications.
1-9
Q1E-EA0612
1.8 Precautions in handling

1.8.1Handling probes
(1)
Probes can be damaged even by a light impact. Great care

should, therefore, be exercised not to apply any shock
to them, allow them to hit or drop them.
(2)
Be sure to turn off the power switch or to select another

probe connector by the probe selection key before
connecting or disconnecting a probe. Connecting or
disconnecting a probe without turning off the power switch
or as selecting the corresponding probe connector can cause
equipment failure or malfunction.
(3)
Use all possible care not to scratch the surface of the

probe head (surface of the transducer). When any scratch
on the probe head or damage on the cable cover is found,
do not use the probe. If such probe is used, it may cause
electric shock.
(4)
After use of probe, the probe shall be cleaned with the

gauze moistened for disinfection or alcohol. Never use
organic solvent such as thinner for this purpose.
(5)
Do not use any probes other than those specified for

intra-operation for the purpose of intra-operation.
(6)
The needle guide line displayed on the screen when

performing biopsy by using the probe connected to this
equipment gives only a guide to puncture the needle. For
needle puncturing operation, perform it as assuring the
actual position of the needle on the ultrasound image.
(7)
Do not water-soak the probe connecter.
1.8.2Precautions in operation and use

(1)
When any abnormality occurs on the equipment, immediately

turn off the power switch and stop it operation. Then,
contact Hitachi Technical Service Division or our
authorized dealer.
(2)
When the equipment is not used for a long time, be sure

to turn off the power switch and put a dust cover on it.
(3)
Set the equipment to the FREEZE mode while examination

is not being performed. This will prevent the probe from
being deteriorated.
1-10
Q1E-EA0612
(4)
Turning on the power switch of the equipment must securely

be done. Quick repetition of switching on and off may
result in malfunctioning of the equipment. Do not turn
on the power switch for 30 seconds after power OFF.
(5)
Do not operate the power switch with the fingers stuck

with ultrasound jelly.
If the power switch is
contaminated with jelly, immediately wipe it off.
(6)
Never remodel the equipment or probe.
(7)
Some of the image display formats described in this

instruction manual are subject to change without prior
notice for improvement of the equipment.
(8)
When power break occur in facility, turn off the power

switch and disconnect the power cable. In the result of
it, ID, Patient information, last image and memorized image
will disappear
(9)
When you want to press an ejecting button of FD drive,

confirm without fail that an access lamp of drive is put
off. After that press the ejecting button.
If the button is pressed while the access lamp is put on
or blinking, there may be a case that the drive or the
disk or contents in the disk is destroyed.
Moreover, if the drive is selected while the access lamp
is put on or blinking, it may be unable to access.
(10) Only DVD-RAM, DVD+RW or CD-RW media can be used for writing
data on the DVD MULTI drive of the system.
To record important data more safely, please use DVD-RAM
media which is higher reliability than other media.
Other media cannot be used for writing data.
If the media can be recognized as either CD-ROM or DVD-ROM,
then it can be used for reading data.
We use B'sClip which is a packet writing software of B.H.A
Corporation for writing data except DVD-RAM.
Please do not use the media which is written by packet
writing software more than B'sClip and it is not finalized,
on the system. Please refer to Appendix H for the other
precautions to handle the drive and media.
(11) When the unit is locked up, put the power OFF by pressing
ON/STANDBY switch. If the power can not be OFF even though
ON/STANDBY is pressed, shut down the power by pressing
the breaker switch locating at left side of the unit to
OFF side. After that restart the unit.
1-11
Q1E-EA0612
(12) We shall have no liability for any loss of data saved in

the Ultrasound Diagnostic Scanner, Media (DVD+RW, etc)
and Personal Computer, caused by miss operation, accident,
system malfunction and so on. Please make backup copies
of any important data.
(13) Follow the manuals of the printer and other devices about
paper, ink, and other consumables.
(14) Don't touch rubber keys of the keyboard panel by the hand
moist with liquid containing silicon oil.
The rubber key might swell and it gets impossible to push
the key.
(15) Precautions in use of the ECG function
1. All ECG leads must be removed from patient to use with

high-frequency (HF) surgical equipment.
2. Do not use the ECG function to patient which uses cardiac
pacemaker or other electrical stimulators.
ECG connector
1-12
Q1E-EA0612
1.8.3Monitor handling
(1)
In the case that 15 inch LCD Monitor(EZU-MT26-S1) and probe

hanger unit(EZU-TH4) are used simultaneously and if the monitor
is turned to the right, the monitor can be turned no more than
about 50. Please note, if the monitor is turned to the right
more, it will be hit by the probe hanger and will be damaged.
About 50
15 inch Monitor
(EZU-MT26-S1)
Probe hanger unit
(EZU-TH4)
It will be hit by the probe hanger.
Fig.1.8.3-1
(2)
In case that LCD Monitor is turned to the below, be careful

not to be hit by the probes. Please note, if it is hit by the
probes and will be damaged.
(3)
In case that LCD Monitor position is adjusted, be careful not

to be pinched your fingers.
(4)
Do not press on the LCD panel strongly, as this may result in

damage to the screen.
(5)
Do not scratch or press on the LCD panel with any sharp objects,
as this may result in damage to the LCD panel. Do not attempt
to brush with tissues as this may scratch the LCD panel.
(6)
Please use the back and front tilt of the LCD monitor within
the range of 30 degree while energizing. If it is tilted than
that, heat generation may cause malfunction and failure.
(7)
The screen may have defective pixels. These pixels may appear
dark area on the screen. This is due to the characteristics
of the LCD panel itself. Please acknowledge it.
1-13
Q1E-EA0612
1.9 Precautions regarding ultrasound output

Although biological hazard of the ultrasound power used in this
equipment is considered almost negligible because it is small, the
fetus in the early stage of gestation specially has a sensitive
susceptibility against physical energies such as X-rays. In addition,
the skin of patients with a fever or children and the internal surface
of body cavities might be sensitive to the heat generated by the
probe.
For these reasons, observe the following precautions to minimize
the effects of ultrasound:
(1)
Set the ultrasound output power to the level as low as possible

and adjust the sensitivity by the gain control.
(2)
To avoid unnecessary ultrasound output, freeze image while

acquiring image is not needed for diagnosis.
(3)
As the effect of ultrasound power on the examination region

becomes higher in M, PW, CW and CFM-modes as compared with B-mode,
try to minimize use of the ultrasound exposure on fetus to the
least level as required.
1-14
Q1E-EA0612
1.10
Label location
DANGER/WARNING/CAUTION label is located as following figure.
Label location
Fig. 1.10-1 Label Location
DANGER
POSSIBLE EXPLOSION HAZARD DO NOT USE IN THE

PRESENCE OF FLAMMABLE GAS.
WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD.

REPLACE FUSES ONLY WITH SAME TYPE AND RATING.
CAUTION
TO BE OPENED BY AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY.
FRONT
REAR
FILTERS HAVE TO BE CLEANED FREQUENTLY.
STRONG RADIATION OR ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES

CAN CAUSE MALFUNCTION OF THE EQUIPMENT.
BE CAREFULL NOT TO CATCH YOUR FINGERS
THE CASTERS.
DO NOT PUSH THIS SYSTEM FROM THE LEFT SIDE OR
THE RIGHT SIDE, BECAUSE THE SYSTEM OVERBALANCE.
PLEASE REFER TO THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
FILTER
KB439118A
Fig. 1.10-2 DANGER/WARNING/CAUTION Label
1-15
Q1E-EA0612
Information
DANGER
POSSIBLE EXPLOSION HAZARD

IF USED IN THE PRESENCE OF FLAMMABLE ANESTHETICS :
This equipment is not explosion-proof type. Never use it in

the atmosphere where explosive gas, toxic gas, flammable gas
and oil vapor is present.
WARNING ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD

REPLACE FUSES ONLY WITH SAME TYPE AND RATING :
For replacement of fuse, use the supplied fuse. Never use any
fuse other than the specified, otherwise damage to the equipment
will result. Use the slow-blow type fuse. Do not use fast-blow
type fuse.
CAUTION TO BE OPENED BY AUTHORIZED PERSON ONLY :

Do not detach the covers fixed with screws. Detaching the cover
and contacting with electrical component inside may cause
electric shock. For repair and checkup of the inside of the
equipment, be sure to call service from Hitachi or our authorized
dealer.
CAUTION FILTER HAS TO BE CLEANED FREQUENTLY :

Carry out the periodical checkup of the dust filter located
on the air inlet window of the power supply unit once a week,
and clean it if dust is found in it.
CAUTION STRONG RADIATION OR ELECTROMAGNETIC

MALFUNCTION OF EQUIPMENT :
WAVE
CAN
CAUSE
Equipment may fail to function normally due to radio wave

generated from apparatus such as portable telephone.
Never use any apparatus such as "portable telephone"
"transceiver" "portable radio" and "radio-controlled toy"
nearby the equipment. Be sure to power down those apparatus.
1-16
Q1E-EA0612
Chapter 2 Equipment Composition

2.1 Standard Components
(1)
Main unit (integrated on a cart)
1 set
(2)
Accessories
1 set
Probe hanger
Ultrasound jelly
Dust-proof cover
System CD
Hexagonal wrench bar
Spare fuses
1 set
Cords
1 set
Instruction manual
DVD-RAM (4.7GB)
2.2 Optional Components

(1) Probes
Phased array probe
4-2MHz
EUP-S50
This probe is designed for cardiac and abdominal exams.
Phased array probe
4-2MHz
EUP-S50A
This probe is designed for cardiac and abdominal exams.
Phased array probe
7-3MHz
This probe is designed for pediatric exams.
EUP-S52
Convex type probe

4-2MHz 10R
EUP-C511
This probe is designed for abdominal and cardiac exams.
Convex type probe
5-2MHz 40R
EUP-C514
This probe is designed for abdominal and fetal exams.
Convex type probe
3.5MHz 40R
EUP-C314G
Convex type probe
3.5MHz 40R
EUP-C314T
Convex type probe
5-1MHz 50R
EUP-C715
Convex type probe
5-2MHz 60R
EUP-C516
2-1
Q1E-EA0612
Convex type probe

3.5MHz 76R
EUP-C318T
Convex type probe
6-3MHz 40R
EUP-C524
Convex type probe
5.0MHz 40R
EUP-C324T
Convex type probe
5.0MHz 10R
EUP-C321T
This probe is designed for abdominal and pedicatric exams.
Convex type probe
8-4MHz 20R
EUP-C532
This probe is designed for neonatal and pedicatric exams.
Convex type probe
6-3MHz 40R
EUP-CV524
This probe is designed for Real-time 3D image of abdominal and
fetal exams.
Linear type probe
7-3MHz
EUP-L52
This probe is designed for small organ and vascular exams.
Linear type probe
10-5MHz
EUP-L53
Linear type probe
7.5MHz
EUP-L33
Linear type probe
9-4.5MHz
EUP-L53S
Linear type probe
9-4MHz
EUP-L73S
Linear type probe
10MHz
EUP-L34T
Linear type probe
7.5MHz
EUP-L33ST
Linear type probe
13-6MHz
EUP-L54MA
Linear type probe
13-5MHz
EUP-L74M
Linear type probe (Wide view type) 10-5MHz
EUP-L53L
Linear type probe
14-6MHz
EUP-L65
Transvaginal probe (Wide view type) 8-4MHz 10R EUP-V53W
This probe is designed for transvaginal and transrectal exams.
2-2
Q1E-EA0612
Transvaginal probe (Wide view type) 6.5MHz 10R EUP-V33W

Transvaginal probe
8-4MHz 10R EUP-VV531
Intracavital probe(Convex/Convex type)
6.5MHz 10R/6.5MHz 10R EUP-CC331
This probe is designed for transrectal and transvaginal exams.
Intracavital probe(Convex/Convex type)
8-4MHz/8-4MHz EUP-CC531
This probe is designed for transrectal and transvaginal exams.
Intracavital probe (Electrical Radial type 19cm)
10-5MHz 6R EUP-R54A-19
This probe is designed for transrectal exams.
Intracavital probe (Electrical Radial type 33cm)
10-5MHz 6R EUP-R54A-33
Intracavital probe (Electrical Radial type 360 19cm)
10-5MHz 6R EUP-R54AW-19
Intracavital probe (Electrical Radial type 360 33cm)
10-5MHz 6R EUP-R54AW-33
Intracavital probe (Convex type)
8-4MHz 10R
EUP-R53W
Transrectal probe (10-5MHz Linear/8-4MHz Convex)

EUP-U533
Transrectal probe (Convex type)
8-4MHz 10R
EUP-U531
Puncture probe (Convex type)

3.5MHz 40R
This probe is designed for biopsy exams.
EUP-B314
Biopsy probe (Convex type)

5-2MHz 20R
EUP-B512
Biopsy probe (Convex type)

5-2MHz 40R
EUP-B514
Puncture probe (Linear type)

3.5MHz
EUP-B31
2-3
Q1E-EA0612
Intraoperative probe (10-5MHz Linear)

EUP-O53T
This probe is designed for intra-operative exams.
Intraoperative probe (13-7MHz Linear)
EUP-O54J
Single Element CW Doppler probe
2.5MHz
EUP-TC3
Finger top probe
7.5MHz
EUP-F334
Finger top probe

8-4MHz 10R EUP-F531
Trans esophageal probe (Phased array electric multi plane type)
8-3MHz
EUP-ES52E
Trans esophageal probe (Phased array multi plane type)
6-3.5MHz
EUP-ES52M
Laparoscopic probe
7.5MHz 40R
This probe is designed for laparoscopic exams.
EUP-OL334
Laparoscopic probe
10-5MHz 10R EUP-OL531
This probe is designed for laparoscopic exams.
(2)
Ultrasound endoscopic probe and bronchoscope

Ultrasound endoscopic probe(Convex) 7.5MHz 10R FG-34UX
Manufactured by HOYA Corporation Distributed by PENTAX
Ultrasound endoscopic probe(Convex) 7.5MHz 10R EG-3630U
Ultrasound endoscopic probe(electrical Radial type)
10-5MHz 6R EG-3630UR
Ultrasound endoscopic probe(Convex) 10-5MHz 10R EG-3830UT
Ultrasound endoscopic probe(electrical Radial type 360)
10-5MHz 6R EG-3670URK
Ultrasound endoscopic probe(Convex)
10-5MHz 10R EG-3870UTK
2-4
Q1E-EA0612
Ultrasound video bronchoscope(Convex) 10-5MHz 6R EB-1970UK

These endoscopic, laparoscopic and bronchoscope probe are not

protected against discharge of defibrillator. Do not use them
with defibrillator.
(3)
Biomedical waveform display unit
EZU-EK25
(4)
Disposable ECG electrode adapter
EZU-DA1
(5)
Omni Directional M mode unit
EZU-OD2
(6)
Steerable CW Doppler unit
EZU-ST5
(7)
Single Element CW Doppler unit
EZU-CW4
(8)
DICOM transfer software
EZU-FC7
(9)
DICOM Image Printing software
EZU-FC7P
(10) DICOM WorkList Software
EZU-FC7W
(11) DICOM Query/Retrieve Software
EZU-FC7Q
(12) IMT Measurement Software
EZU-IM1
(13) Real-time Archiving software
EZU-RA3
(14) Remote Control Unit
EZU-RH4
(15) Remote Control Interface Unit
EZU-RiF3E
(16) Picture in Picture Unit
EZU-PP3
(17) Speech Recognition Software
EZU-SR3
(18) Logon Management Software
EZU-LG1
(19) SCSI card interface unit
EZU-Pi1
(20) Network Interface
EZU-Pi6
(21) Digital capture card unit
EZU-Pi11
(22) 3D Display unit (Freehand)
EZU-3D4
(23) 3D Display unit (Magnetic Sensor)
EZU-3D2S
(24) 3D Display unit (Real-time)
EZU-4D4
(25) WideView Software
EZU-WS4
(26) 15-inch color monitor display unit
EZU-MT24-S1
(27) 15-inch LCD monitor Unit
EZU-MT26-S1
2-5
Q1E-EA0612
(28) Foot switch (For freeze)

EZU-FS1
(Degrees of protection provided by enclosures:IP31)
(29) Foot switch (For EZU-3D4,EZU-3D2(S),EZU-WS4)
EZU-FS2
(Degrees of protection provided by enclosures:IP31)
(30) VCR remote control cable
EZU-RO1
(31) Mini-Probe Interface

- Mini-Probe Interface Unit
EZU-MS6
- Ultrasonic Probe Connecting Unit (by FUJINON) SP-711UA

- Translator (by FUJINON)
TL-1A
(32) Mini Probes

- Sonoprobe System PL Series (by FUJINON)
PL2220-12,15,20
PL1726-12,15,20
PL1926-12,15,20
PL2226-12,15,20
- Front Loading Probe PL26-7.5 Series (by FUJINON)
PL1726-7.5
PL1926-7.5
PL2226-7.5
PL1726B-7.5
PL1926B-7.5
PL2226B-7.5
(33) 5MHz pencil CW probe Interface
- 5MHz pencil CW probe adapter
EZU-AC1
- 5MHz pencil CW probe

Sonde Crayon 5MHz
P050CN20W00+AD(with BNC cabling)

(by AXONCABLE S.A.S)
Because EZU-AC1 is for P050CN20W00+AD(with BNC cabling),

do not connect other type probe.
2-6
Q1E-EA0612
(34) 10MHz pencil CW probe Interface

- 10MHz pencil CW probe adapter
EZU-AC2
- 10MHz pencil CW probe

Sonde Crayon 10MHz
10D4(with BNC cabling)

(by AXONCABLE S.A.S)
Because EZU-AC2 is for 10D4(with BNC cabling), do not connect

other type probe.
(35) Probe hanger unit
EZU-TH4
(36) Probe Extention unit
EZU-AB7
(37) USB HUB unit
EZU-UH2
(38) USB Memory Interface Unit
EZU-UM1
(39) Large Tray
EZU-TY1L
(40) Mini Tray
EZU-TY1M
Do not use the ECG cable that is not specified by HITACHI.

Because the protection of the equipment against the effects
of the discharge of a cardiac defibrillator is dependent upon
the use of appropriate cables.
For accessories of equipment, please refer to Technical guide with

Hitachi Medical Corporation or its authorized agent.
For combination with optional components, consult with Hitachi
Medical Corporation or its authorized agent.
2-7
Q1E-EA0612
Chapter 3 Components and Functions

3.1 Component Description
(3)
(2)
(1)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(13)
(12)
(4) (5) (6)

(7)
(14)
(8)
(15)
(16)
Fig. 3.1-1 General View of EUB-5500

(1) Monitor
(6)
Eject button of
DVD MULTI drive
(12) Access lamp of

FDD
(3) Breaker switch
(7)
Keyboard panel
(4) DVD MULTI drive
(8)
Caster
(13) Eject button of

FDD
(5) Access lamp of

DVD MULTI drive
(9)
Steering handle
(14) Probe connector
(2) ON/STANDBY switch
(10) USB Port
(15) ECG connector
(11) FDD
(16) OPTION connector
3-1
Q1E-EA0612
3.2 Keyboard Panel

[40]
[39]
[38]
[37]
[36]
[35]
[1]
[34]
[33]
[32]
[2]
[31]
[3]
[30]
[4]
[5]
[51]
[41-48]
[28]
[29]
[27]
[26]
[52]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[50]
[25]
[56]
[55]
[54]
[53]
[24]
[23]
[49]
[11]
[12]
[57]
[58]
[22]
[21]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18] [19]
[20]
Fig. 3.2-1 Keyboard Panel

NOTICE:
The lighting color of the key shows the following states.
Orange
: The key has been selected.
Green
: The key can be selected.
Putting off light : The key cannot be selected.
3-2
Q1E-EA0612
[1] Alpha-numeric keyboard
Enters a comment
The Patient key, Annotation key, Character key and Character clear
key are not included in Alpha-numeric keys.
[2]
End
Exam
End Exam key
A function to force any images not yet printed to be printed in

the multi image printer output setting. This also functions to
send the End Exam notification in the system incorporated with
the DICOM worklist Software. This key is also used to clear the
measurement results.
[3]
GUIDE
Guide key
Displays/Cancels the biopsy guide line.

[4]
PROBE
PROBE key
Select a probe and application.
[5]
Image filing key

M-WRITE
READ
S-WRITE
Stores the image being displayed on the screen to the image memory
(Multi-image : M-WRITE key, Single image : S-WRITE key) and Reads
(displays) an image stored in the image memory.
[6]
SOUND VOL toggle

SOUND VOL
Switches over speaker volume levels in Doppler mode.
3-3
Q1E-EA0612
[7]
US POWER toggle
US POWER
Switches over ultrasound power levels.

[8]
Angle encoder toggle switch

When the toggle switch at the right of knob in pressed and angle
encoder is rotated, an incidental angle bar with an angle
registered in APPLICATION also rotated on Doppler line when the
toggle switch at the left of knob is pressed and angle encoder
is rotated, probe mark also rotated.
[9]
REPORT
REPORT key
Switches over to patient report function.

[10]
MEAS MENU
MEAS MENU key
Displays the measurement name selection menu.

[11]
CLEAR
CLEAR key
[Clears] any in functions of the measurement, Main Menu and so

on.
[12]
TRACE
TRACE key
Carries out TRACE measurement.

[13]
CALIP
CALIP key
Carries out caliper measurement.

[14]
REC
REC 2 key
Output image to storage device for setting image record function

of user definition.
3-4
Q1E-EA0612
[15-17] Trackball related keys
UNDO
ENTER
COLOR
POSI / SIZE
[15]Trackball cancel button (UNDO)

Acts as [Cancel] for functions of the Measurement, Main Menu,
Full Screen Menu and so on.
[16]Trackball
Used for various functions to operate 2-dimentionally.
[17]ENTER Key (Trackball settled button)
Acts as [Set or Enter] for functions of the Measurement, Main
Menu, Full Screen Menu so on.
[18]
REC
REC 1 key
Output image to storage device for setting image record function

of user definition.
[19]
PRINT
PRINT key
Carries out printing for the scanner selected by user.
[20]
FREEZE
FREEZE key
Freezes an image.
[21]
L(U)
R(D)
L / (U), R / (D) key (Left / Right image selection
key)
Switches over the screen selected in the memory select function.
3-5
Q1E-EA0612
[22]
MULTI
SINGLE
MULTI / SINGLE key
Switches over multi/single screen to be selected in the memory

select function.
Focus depth setting toggle switch
[23]
FOCUS
Switches over positions of focus of transmit wave.
[24]
DEPTH /MAG toggle switch

DEPTH / MAG
When running pan zoom switches over display magnification factor

(MAGNIFICATION).
Other cases Switches over display depth (moving display range
up/down)
[25]
REF FREQ toggle switch

REF FREQ
Switches over probe Frequency and REF.
[26]
V-SCALE
(PRF)
V-SCALE (PRF) toggle switch
Switches over speed range doppler or CFM image
F-STEP toggle switch
[27]
F-STEPS
Switches over step of multi-focus.

[28]
ZOOM
ZOOM key
Turn ON / OFF pan zoom function.
[29]
SAMPLE
LENGTH
SAMPLE LENGTH toggle switch
Adjustment width of sample gate.
3-6
Q1E-EA0612
[30]
BASELINE toggle switch

BASELINE
Move baseline to doppler image.
[31]
OBLIQUE toggle switch

OBLIQUE
Switches over angle of oblique scan.
[32]
SWEEP
SPEED
SWEEP SPEED toggle switch
Switches over sweep speed for doppler or M-mode image.

DEPTH GAIN
[33]
DEPTH GAIN slide volume
Switches over the gain for each depth of the B (M)-mode image.
[34]
MAIN
MENU
MAIN MENU key
Arrange functions not operable in the control panel and function

menus (except MODE DEPENDED MENU)
[35]
VCR
ORIG
VCR / ORG key
Switches over contents to be displayed on the monitor screen.

[36] Character
CHARACTER CLEAR key
Clear
It clears all the characters entered.
[37]
Character
CHARACTER key
Switches over to character input mode from the character keyboard.
3-7
Q1E-EA0612
[38]
ANNOTATION key
Annotation
Selects abbreviation related to diagnosis is from the list and

displays it on the screen.
[39]
Patient key
Patient
Input and modify patient information.

FUNCTION
[40]
Function menu selection toggle switch
PREV
NEXT
Selects any of function menus (F1 ~ F7) displayed at the bottom

of screen.
[41]
PHYSIO
PHYSIO key
Select Bio wave display function menu.

[42]
OPTION
OPTION key
Select the option menu.

[43]
3D key
The menu for 3D display function or real-time 3D function is

displayed. (Refer to the Instruction Manual of the 3D Display
unit(Freehand)/3D Display unit(Magnetic Sensor) or the 3D Display
unit(Real-time).)
[44]
[45]
(No function)
IMAGE
PROCESS
IMAGE PROCCESS key
Select the adjustment of image post process function.

[46]
MODE
DEPENDED
MODE DEPENDED key
Operates any function used especially frequently among various

functions to be operated in the main menu.
[47]
USER
USER 1 key
Select user definition menu.
3-8
Q1E-EA0612
[48]
USER
USER 2 key
Select user definition menu.
[49]
ANGLE key encoder

When the switch at the center of knob is pressed, an incidental
angle items with an angle registered in toggle selection is
displayed or not.
If outer circle part of the knob is rotated, the incidental
item also rotates.
M mode selection key and Gain encoder
[50]
Pressing the switch at the center of knob selects the M mode.

Turning the periphery of knob switches over gain correction
values of the M mode image.
[51]
Doppler mode selection key and encoder

Pressing the switch at the center of knob selects the doppler
mode.
Turning the periphery of knob switches over again correction
values of the doppler image.
[52]
Color mode selection key and GAIN encoder

CFI
CFA
Pressing the switch at the center of knob selects the color

mode.
values of the color image.
3-9
Q1E-EA0612
[53]
B mode selection key and encoder

Pressing the switch at the center of knob selects the B mode.
value of the B mode image.
The periphery of knob can also be used to review the cine
memory image by frame in freeze on.
The periphery of knob can also be used to review the live
image.
dTHI key
[54]
Select from basic wave image of B, M mode to dTHI image.

[55]
CW
CW key
Select the CW mode when doppler mode.

[56]
PW
PW key
Select the PW mode when doppler mode.

[57]
POINTER key
POINTER
Display or not the arrow mark on image.

[58]
TRACKBALL
PRIORITY
TRACK BALL PRIOLITY Toggle switch
Manually switches over trackball priority when multiple

functions using the trackball are running.
3-10
Q1E-EA0612
NOTICE:
The arrow key to figure can be lifted both ends of the cap, be removed,
and be exchanged for the panel key plate of the attachment.
Panel key plates
Panel key plates are attached to the main unit.
3-11
Q1E-EA0612
Chapter 4 Operation Procedures

4.1
Preparation before Use

4.1.1 Connecting the probe
(1) Connect the probe cable with
the probe connector at the
side panel of main unit. Be
sure to connect it to the
bottom with the cord leading
section at the right side.
Fig. 4.1.1-1 Connecting the Probe
Be sure to turn OFF the

ON/STANDBY switch or select
the other probe before
connecting/disconnecting
the probe connector.
Never connect/disconnect the
probe while selecting the
probe. Doing so will cause
trouble or malfunction of the
equipment.
Also, securely turn the
handle to the "LOCK"
position labeled on the
probe connector.
"LOCK" position
"OPEN" position
Fig. 4.1.1-2 Locking connector
4-1
Q1E-EA0612
(2) Put the probe cord on the probe

hanger.
Fig. 4.1.1-3 Cord Hanger
4.1.2 Positioning the viewing monitor

Adjust the monitor face to appropriate angle at which the screen
is easily observed.
Fig. 4.1.2-1 Positioning the Monitor
4-2
Q1E-EA0612
4.1.3 Check before power ON

Check the following before inserting the power plug into the
fixed power outlet.
(1)
Checking periodical inspection

Check if periodical inspection and cleaning described in
Chapter 13 Maintenance and Checkup are periodically
carried out.
If specified check interval has elapsed, carry out
periodical check and cleaning first.
When using the equipment again after long storage, carry
out in the same way.
(2)
Checking the equipotential terminal

When using this equipment with other equipments (for
example, in operating room), connect the equipotential
terminal of this equipment with the equipotential
terminals of other equipments.
Fig. 4.1.3-1 Equipotential terminal
(3)
Checking power capacity

Check if the power outlet and power wiring connected with
it have a capacity of 1.2kVA or more
Also, if using this equipment and the other device at the
same time with the same power outlet used together, power
wiring capacity may be exceeded. It is recommended to
connect this equipment with an independent power outlet.
4-3
Q1E-EA0612
4.2
Starting the Equipment

4.2.1 Power ON
After turning ON the breaker
switch at the side of equipment,
turn ON the ON/STANDBY switch at
the upper left of control panel.
This turns on the power lamps of
control panel and starts setup of
the equipment.
ON/STANDB
Y switch
Breaker
switch
Fig. 4.2.1-1 Location of Switches
1) ON/OFF of the ON/STANDBY switch

Do not perform ON/OFF operation while the unit is on the
way of starting/ finishing operation. If restarting the
unit, check the system shutdown. And 30 seconds later,
turn the power ON again. The equipment may be damaged.
2) When the equipment does not start
When all of the lamps of control panel does not light and
the fan does not rotate even if turning ON the ON/STANDBY
switch, check the power cord and breaker switch.
If the power cord is normally connected and the breaker
switch is ON, turn OFF the breaker switch and have a contact
with the service personnel.
3) Breaker switch
Normally use the equipment while setting the switch to
ON ( ).
Do not put it OFF except such emergent cases as the unit
makes fire or smoke, generates stink, or any abnormality
occurs in the unit.
The starting time is about 2 minutes.

(The starting time varies by system setting and
configuration.)
4-4
Q1E-EA0612
4.2.2 Releasing Freeze

If the equipment started normally, it is necessarily in the
B-mode stationary image state (Freeze ON)
When using the equipment, press the
FREEZE
key to release Freeze.
4.2.3 Adjusting brightness of the monitor

EZU-MT24-S1 equipment
Use the BRIGHT and CONTRAST knobs at the bottom of TV monitor.
Use the BRIGHT and CONTRAST button at the front of TV monitor.
The values of the BRIGHT and CONTRAST are initialized by
factory-shipments
setup
by
pushing
UP/DOWN
button
simultaneously.
BRIGHT
CONTRAST
BRIGHT
CONTRAST
Fig. 4.2.3-1 Adjusting Brightness of the Monitor
4-5
Q1E-EA0612
4.2.4 Selecting a probe and application

When a probe key is pressed, a dialogue for switching over
the probe is displayed.
Default application menu
Connected probe menu
Application menu
Fig. 4.2.4-1 Probe Selection Menu

In the dialogue three menus are shown.
(1)
Connected probe menu

Item numbers from 1 to 3 in the probe menu correspond to
the probe connector numbers from probe 1 to 3 respectively.
Item number 4 functions when a single element probe for
CW mode is connected to that connector.
The probe of which button is in the pressed status is
selected currently.
4-6
Q1E-EA0612
(2)
Default application menu

In the scanner it is possible to assign the best suited
application setting to every probe.
In this menu the application setting frequently used is
registered.
(3)
Application menu
You can register applications in this equipment for each
probe.
You can register up to 10 user-defined applications.
Font color of each application shows the meaning as
mentioned below.
Blue letters mean that application is assigned to the
default application.
Bold letters mean the application being selected now.
Other letters mean selectable applications.
There are two procedures for switching over the probe.

Procedure 1:
1)
Move the cursor to the default application switch of the

probe intended for selection, then click (Enter) key.
The application is switched over and the probe is
selected.
Procedure 2:
1)
Move the cursor to the item in the probe menu, click (Enter)
key. The display is changed to show the status of button
pressed.
2)
In the next move the cursor to intending application in

the application menu, then click (Enter) key.
The application is changed and the probe is selected.
In case only the application is to be changed, perform either

the above procedure 1) or 2) of the procedure 2 directly.
4-7
Q1E-EA0612
4.3
Setting Auto Freeze Function

The auto freeze function automatically
freezes the image when no panel
operation is performed for more than
10 minutes with freeze released.
To prevent the equipment and probe from
degradation, it is ON when started.
Use the equipment with the auto
freeze function set to ON unless
necessary. If using the equipment
for a long time with it OFF or
leaving it while doing nothing,
temperature on the surface of probe
lens increases and it may cause low
temperature burn.
Fig. 4.3-1 Setting Auto Freeze
[To set the auto freeze function to OFF]

(1)
Press the key to display the main menu.
(2)
Select the Setup item.
(3)
Set the check box of Auto Freeze item to Off.
[To set the auto freeze function to ON]

Turn the ON/STANDBY switch to OFF, wait for 10 seconds and turn
the power ON again.
Or, set the check box of Auto Freeze item above to On.
4-8
Q1E-EA0612
4.4
Patient
When operator press the
key, Patient menu dialog is
Patient
displayed .In that sitiation, if selecting the NEW PATIENT,

the scanner is going to the following state.
Initializing of patient information
Initializing of measurement report data
Automatic execution of APPLICATION
Automatic execution of measurement report recording
To perform the above states automatically, it should be set in the
Application menu. (Please refer to "8 APPLICATION Function" for the
details.)
The information of the current patient can be modified by pressing
Patient
key and selecting
button.
Using keyboard enter necessary items.
To change the entering column move the cursor using the trackball
to intending column and press "ENTER" button.
Also it is possible to move to next column using "Tab" key.
4-9
Q1E-EA0612
4.5
ID Input
There are two ways to enter Patient ID as follows:
- Standard ID Input
- Obstetric ID Input
NOTICE:
The application is automatically executed at the same

time as inputting ID by the application menu, and
the application can be executed by the set value preset
beforehand. (Refer to Chapter8 APPLICATION
Function.)
When Patient key is pressed, a dialogue for entering Patient

Menu is displayed. Following to the operating method shown
on each of below mentioned items, enter or change data. When
entering or changing all the data is finished, confirm the
button, or press Patient key.
contents, then click
In case NEW Patient is selected in the entry an automatic
execution of Application and an initialization of patient
information are performed.
When it is needed to change contents of new data or contents
of modification of existing data on the way of the entry, click
button.
Make sure that you always enter patient information before

starting an examination.
If patient information is not correctly entered, a mix-up
of patient data could occur during an examination.
Do not use the same Patient ID for different patient.
If Patient ID is not correctly managed, a mix-up of patient
data could occur during an examination.
4-10
Q1E-EA0612
(3)
(1)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(4)
(9)
(2)
(10)
(19)
(16)
(20)
(11)
(21)
(17)
(18)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
Fig.4.5-1 Patient Menu(Standard Menu)

(3)
(1)
(22)
(23)
(4)
(9)
(2)
(10)
(19)
(24)
(16)
(20)
(11)
(21)
(17)
(18)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
Fig.4.5-2 Patient Menu(Obstetric Menu)
4-11
Q1E-EA0612
(1)
Selection of New data entry or modification of existing

data
Select the entry is either for new patient information
or for modification of existing information.
(2)
Selection of Standard Menu entry or OB Menu entry

Select the entry is either for Standard Patient information
(Standard) or for Obstetric Patient information
(Obstetric).
According to this selection items for the entry after that
are to be different.
Fig.4.5-1 shows the entry of Standard Patient information.
Fig.4.5-2 shows the entry of Obstetric measurement
information.
(3)
Enter [ID]
Enter the ID of the patient from the keyboard.
The ID to enter has about 15 characters.
The number of characters you can enter may change depending
on the widths of the characters entered and the character
size. For details, see (20) below. Do not enter the
following characters:
= . \ |
(4)
Enter [Last Name],[First Name], and [MI]

Enter the name of the patient from the keyboard.
The number of input characters is total of 60 characters
of "Last Name", "First Name", and "MI".
Do not enter the following characters:
= . \ | ^
(5)
Select [Sex]
Select "M" (Male), "F" (Female) or "O" (Other).
(6)
Enter [Height]
(a) Enter numeric value

Enter body height using numeric of the keyboard.
Number of characters is 3.
(b) Select unit
Press "" to select "cm" or "in" from the list displayed.
4-12
Q1E-EA0612
(7)
Enter [Weight]
(a) Enter numeric value

Use numeric keys and "." to enter body weight value.
Number of characters is 4.
(b) Select unit
Press "" to select "kg", "g" or "lbs" (pound) from the
list displayed.
(8)
Display [BSA]
[BSA] value is automatically calculated from [Height] and
[Weight].
(9)
Enter [Birth Date]

The format of date can be chosen according to the setting
of Main Menu.
Please refer to (2-1)b)Date Format in "7.9 Setup Menu"
for setting.
Enter birth date as follows:
(a) Enter [Year](YYYY)
Enter a value (Christian Era) of four digits
using the numeric keys of keyboard.
(b) Enter [Month](MM)
Enter a value of "1" ~ "12" using the numeric keys
of keyboard.
(c) Enter [Day](dd)
Enter a value of "1" ~ "31" using the numeric keys
of keyboard.
(d) Check [Age]
(i) Check value
Age is automatically calculated and displayed in
the order of [Year], [Month] and [Day].
(ii) Correct unit
Press "" to select "yr."(year), "mo."(month),
"wk."(week) or "day" from the list displayed.
After selection, age is automatically recalculated
and displayed as (i).
(10) Enter [Clinical History]

Enter clinical history from the keyboard.
The maximum number of characters is about 30.
This item can have 10 histories. (Maximum)
4-13
Q1E-EA0612
(11) Enter [Ordering Physician]

Enter the name of physician from the keyboard.
Maximum number of characters for entry is 15 in numeric
characters. This item can have 10 histories. (Maximum)
(12) Enter [Sonographer]
Enter the name of examination technologist from the
keyboard.
(13) Enter [Purpose of U/S]
Enter purpose of clinical examination from the keyboard.
(14) Enter EXAM.TYP(examination type) from the keyboard if
necessary. This item can have 10 histories (Maximum).
Number of characters for entry is 64 as a standard.
(15) Entry of keyword
This is to enter Keyword for easy retrieval of Measuring
report or Image filing. This item can have 10 histories.
(Maximum)
(16) Enter ACCESSION# from the keyboard if necessary.
Number of characters for entry is 16 as a standard.
(17) Select [Body Part Examined] if necessary.
Press ""to select "Body Part Examined" from the list
displayed. The "defined terms" displayed on the list can
be set up with a property.
(18) Select [Image Type] if necessary.
Press "" to select "Image Type" from the list displayed.
The "defined terms" displayed on the list can be set up
with a property.
(19) Change setting of [US Power]
Turning "" (Check box) ON suppresses US power.(Refer to
4.8.3)
4-14
Q1E-EA0612
(20) Setup properties

Specify the settings for the Enter ID dialog box. You
can set (a) the initial cursor position when the dialog
box opens, (b) which comes first, the patient's ID or name,
and (c) the character size of the ID and name displayed
on top of the window.
(a)
(e)
(c)
(b)
(d)
(f)
(i)
(h)
(g)
(k)
(j)
Fig.4.5-3 Properties
(a) Select initial cursor position
Select initial cursor and focus position at the time when
a dialogue for entering Patient Menu is displayed.
(b) Select input order
Select patient's ID-Name or Name-ID inputting in turn.
4-15
Q1E-EA0612
(c) Changing the character size of the patient's ID and name

With the size of letter, the number of letters which can
be indicated as follows differs. All the same character
sizes are set to ID and name.
Item
Font Size
Standard
Large
Auto
ID
About 15
characters
About 13
characters
About 15
characters
First Name,
Last Name and
MI
About 28
characters
About 24
characters
About 28
characters
When it sets "Auto", if with it is within the number of

letters which can be indicated "Large", it indicates at
"Large" size. When with it inputs more than the number
of letters which can be indicated "Large", it indicates
at size of Standard".
NOTICE: If you change the character size, it may become
unable to display all the characters in the ID
or name. If it is unable to display all the
characters, the following dialog box appears.
In this dialog box, if you choose Yes, the
character string is truncated so that it can be
displayed in the "selected" size. If you choose
No, the character size is not changed.
Fig.4.5-4 Alert
(d) Changing the function of Enter Key
When pressing Enter key, it can be set to close patient
menu or to move to the next item.
4-16
Q1E-EA0612
(e) Selecting autostart when pressing the Patient key

Selecting "Execute New Patient automatically" performs
the same operation as when the [New Patient] button is
pressed, without displaying a selection for [New Patient]
or [Edit Data] in the Patient Menu dialog when the Patient
key is pressed.
Therefore, if "Execute New Patient automatically" is
selected, the selection between [New Patient] and [Edit
Data] will be disabled when the Patient key is pressed.
To select [Edit Data], press the Shift key, and then the
Patient key. A dialog that allows selection between [New
Patient] and [Edit Data] appears.
CAUTION
When "Execute New Patient automatically" is set, [New

Patient] is performed automatically and therefore the
types of initialization shown in "4.4 Patient" will be
performed when the Patient key is pressed.
Be sure to check the initialization details before making
these settings.
(f) Setup of defined terms(Body Part Examined)

Selects "defined terms" for displaying on a list, when
selecting "Body Part Examined" on the Enter ID dialog box.
The item checked here is displayed on a list.
Fig.4.5-5
4-17
Q1E-EA0612
(g) Setup of defined terms(Image Type)

Selects "defined terms" for displaying on a list, when
selecting "Image Type" on the Enter ID dialog box. The
item checked here is displayed on a list.
Fig.4.5-6
(h) Internal tag selection of Ordering Physician
When DICOM Worklist function (DICOM WorkList software)
is used, both [0008, 0090] Referring Physician's Name and
[0032, 1032] Requesting Physician can be acquired from
Worklist server.
Which value is displayed in "Ordering Physician" in Patient
dialog is selected.
When you change the setting, please change before acquiring
patient information.
Fig.4.5-7
(i) Setup of BSA
Please check "Display of BSA" when you display BSA.
(j) Patient Name Display (Modality WorkList)
Not used.(This item is Japanese system only.)
(k) Patient delimiter setting
Set the delimiter of patient name that is entered from
4-18
Q1E-EA0612
"Last Name", "First Name", and "MI". If it checks here,

patient name will be "LastName^FirstName^MI". If it does
not check, patient name will be "LastName, FirstName MI".
CAUTION
Delimiter setting is reflected to Exam.screen and Filing

dialog.
(21) Mobile function

When getting Patient data from a WorkList Server, regular
connection or using by off-line after saving at a hard
disk is switched.
(This can be set when the optionally available DICOM
Transfer Software and DICOM WorkList software are
incorporated.)
(22) Enter [LMP]
Entry of the last menstrual period is shown below:
(a) Enter [Year]
Enter a value of four digits (Christian Era) from the
keyboard.
(b) Enter [Month]
Enter a figure of "1" ~ "12" from the keyboard.
(c) Enter [Day]
Enter a figure of "1" ~ "31" from the keyboard.
(23) Enter [DGA]
(a) Select a method to calculate gestational age
Select a method for calculation from [LMP], [1st day of
preg], [EDC] and [FIRST DGA].
Difference of calculation methods is shown in the table
below:
Table 4.5-1 Selection of Method to Calculate Gestational Age
Today
1st day of
EDC
FIRST DGA
LMP
's DGA
preg
Date of 1st
Date of the
Date
Date of LMP day of
Date of EDC
1st or past
pregnancy
examination
Gestational
Today
Week
age at that
's DGA
date
Date of
Date of
Date of
Method to Date of
examinati examination + examination
Week
calculate examination
on - Date + Gestational
Date +
Date
DGA
14days
period Date Week
4-19
Q1E-EA0612
(b) Enter [Date]

For entry of date, refer to the method to enter [LMP].
(c) Enter [Week]
If selecting [FIRST DGA] in selecting the method for
calculation, gestational age may be entered.
(i) Enter [Week]
Enter a value of week using the numeric keys of keyboard.
Maximum number of characters for entry is 2.
(ii)Enter [Day]
Enter a figure of "0" ~ "6" using the numeric keys of
keyboard. Maximum number of characters for entry is 1.
(24) Enter [Obstetric history]
A method to input pregnant history is mentioned below.
(a) The number of pregnancies (GRAV)
(b) The number of births (PARA)
(c) The number of abortions / stillbirths (AB)
Input figures from "0" ~ "99" using numeric keys of
keyboard.
4-20
Q1E-EA0612
4.6
Entering Hospital Name

Selecting [Main Menu] [Setup]
[Hosp. Name] displays a dialog box for
entering hospital name
Enter the hospital name from the
keyboard.
Number of characters for entry is
about 29 as a standard.
Fig. 4.6-1 Entering

Hospital Name
Upon completing all entries and

changes, check contents of entry and
click the
button.
If any of entries and changes is to
be canceled, click the
button.
4.7
Changing Time
Selecting [Main Menu] [Setup]
[System] [Date/Time] then submenu
[Set Date/Time] displays a dialog for
entering time.
(Refer to 7.9(2))
Fig. 4.7-1 Changing Time
4-21
Q1E-EA0612
4.8
Controls Affecting the Acoustic Output

Generally the ultrasound scanner said to be "harmless and
non-invasive"; however, it is not "perfectly harmless" so long as
irradiating ultrasound vibration to human body.
It is strongly recommended to operate the equipment with the US power
as low as possible.
4.8.1 Acoustic output level
The ULTRASOUND POWER control allows choice among three
different levels.
The selected output level is indicated on the screen.
l) "PWR : H" : High

2) "PWR : M" : Medium
3) "PWR : L" : Low
Fig. 4.8.1-1 Where the Level Displayed
1) The derated spatial-peak temporal-average intensity

level in all settings is less than 720mW/cm2.
2) The Mechanical Index in all settings is less than l.9.
3) The Thermal Index in all settings is less than 6.0.
4-22
Q1E-EA0612
4.8.2 Acoustic output indices

This scanner complies with the "Standard for Real-Time Display of
Thermal and Mechanical Acoustic Output Indices on Diagnostic
Equipment".
When operating in any mode with the FREEZE function disabled (FREEZE
OFF)the screen displays the acoustic output indices relevant to
the probe and operating mode currently active.
As described in this Instruction Manual, minimizing the real-time
displayed index values allows the practice of the ALARA principle:
exposure of the patient to ultrasound energy at a level that is
As Low As Reasonably Achievable.
(1) General description of indices
For a detailed explanation of the clinical significance proper
use of the Real-Time Acoustic Indices displayed on this scanner,
the operator should consult relevant literature and educational
materials
available
from
industry
and
professional
organizations concerned with medical ultrasound.
To allow the operator to understand how adjustment of the controls
may affect the index displays during an exam, the following
discussion provides a brief overview of the implementation of
the index displays.
In general, each index is described in terms of the following
factors.
- Potential bioeffect of concern: "mechanical" (cavitation or
other non-thermal mechanical effects), or "thermal" (heating
of tissue through absorption of the ultrasound energy);
for all indices, an index value of less than 1.0 is indicates
relatively low risk for harm to the patient when the index
is applied properly.
- Type of operating mode: mechanical effects and thermal effects
are generally of concern for all operation modes;
thermal effects are calculated separately for "non scanned
modes" (M-and PW modes) and "scanned modes" (B- and
CFM-modes ) ;
- Type of and location of tissue of concern: "bone" or "soft
tissue", located either at the tissue "surface" nearest the
probe, or at or near the beam "focus"
- Measured acoustic parameters (ultrasound "power", time
average "intensity", or instantaneous peak "pressure") used
in calculating the index value; in all calculations an
attenuation (or "derating") rate of 0.3 dB/cm/MHz is assumed
4-23
Q1E-EA0612
MI: the Mechanical Index

The following discussion provides
information regarding the index.
general
background
- Potential bioeffect: any possible "mechanical" or non-thermal

mechanisms - although the likelihood of adverse consequences
from these causes is not well understood, such risk may be
highest in the presence of gas-saturated structures such as
lung tissue ;
-
Mode type: calculated for all modes;
Tissue type and location: "soft tissue" at "all locations"

in the scan field;
Acoustic parameter: maximum negative

(rarefactional) ultrasound, pressure" at focus.
TIS:the Soft Tissue Thermal Index

Of interest in the absence of bone either at the tissue surface
or near the beam focus, applications of clinical interest include
general abdominal examination, first-trimester scanning before
fetal bone has ossified, and cardiology.
TIS has the following characteristics.
- Potential bioeffect: "thermal" heating of soft tissue due
to absorption of ultrasound; the TIS value is the ratio of
the current probe power to reference level that would cause
a 1
C temperature rise in soft tissue;
-
Mode type: relevant for all modes.
Tissue type and locations in scanned modes "soft tissue"

at the "surface" is of concern; in non scanned modes, heating
of soft tissue along the beam axis between the surface and
"focus" is considered.
Acoustic parameters * : for each scanned mode, the associated

"intensity" at the surface is usually related to surface
tissue heating; for each unscanned mode, the maximum derated
"power" through a 1 cm2 area anywhere along the beam axis
is the basis for estimating tissue heating: unscanned beams
less than lcm2 in area at the surface are assumed to contribute
only to surface heating f and the calculated effects are
combined with those of scanned modes to estimate total
soft-tissue heating at the surface; unscanned beams larger
than 1 cm2 at the surface are assumed to heat tissue only
near the focus: total heating effects at the surface and
focus are compiled separately, and the larger value is
reported as TIS.
The discussion provided here provides a few summary rules
4-24
Q1E-EA0612
relating TIS to the measured acoustic parameters.

Explanation of the rationale and implementation of all Thermal
Index models is found in Appendix A (Summary of Thermal Index
Formulae) in the Standard for Real-Time Display of Thermal
and mechanical Acoustic Output Indices on diagnostic
Ultrasound Equipment (1998), available from the American
Institute of Ultrasound in Medicine (AIUM).
TIB: the Bone Thermal Index
The thermal index of concern when bone is near the beam focus,
applications of clinical interest include second- and
third-trimester Doppler (when the beam focus is near fetal bone),
and Neonatal Cephalic Doppler (when the beam focus is near
cranial bone). TIB has the following characteristics.
- Potential bioeffect: thermal heating of bone (and indirect
heating of adjacent soft tissue) due to absorption of
ultrasound at the bone surface; the TIB value indicates the
ratio of the current power level from the probe to the
reference power level that would cause a 1C steady-state
temperature rise in bone located at the beam focus;
- Mode type: calculated for all modes.
- Tissue type and location: in scanned modes, the model for
soft tissue at the surface is also used to calculate the
maximum possible heating of "bone" at the beam "focus"; for
non-scanned modes, possible heating of bone near the beam
focus is considered directly.
- Acoustic parameters: for scanned modes, the time-average
"intensity" at the probe surface is closely related to
estimated heating effects; for unscanned modes, the maximum
product along the beam axis of both derated power and
"intensity" is the basis for calculating possible bone
heating: total heating effects for scanned and unscanned
modes are compiled separately, and the larger value is
reported as TIB.
TIC: the Cranial (Bone) Thermal Index
The Thermal Index of concern when bone is near the tissue surface
and in close proximity to the probe aperture, clinical applications
of interest are specific to those involving transcranial scanning.
The following information is provided regarding the Cranial
Thermal Index in general:
-
Potential bioeffect: "thermal" heating of the cranial bone

(with indirect heating of adjacent brain tissue) due to
absorption of ultrasound in the cranial bone; TIC is defined
as the ratio of the current probe power level to the reference
power level that would cause a 1C steady-state temperature
rise in cranial bone located at the probe surface;
4-25
Q1E-EA0612
Mode type: calculated for all modes of the probe intended

for transcranial use.
Tissue type and location: cranial "bone", located near the

tissue "surface" and near the probe aperture.
Acoustic parameter: for each active mode, the product of

estimated "power" and "Intensity", at the probe surface, is
the basis for calculating cranial bone heating: the heating
effects of all modes are combined to calculate the TIC.
(2) Relevant acoustic output indices for probes and applications.

When operating in any mode with the FREEZE function disabled (FREEZE
OFF), the screen displays the indices relevant to the active probe
and application. The definition of relevant indices is as follows.
Table.4.8.2-1 Acoustic output indices
for probes and operating modes
Allowed Applications for Probe
Relevant Indices
Include neither Adult Cephalic

nor Neonatal Cephalic
MI, TIS, TIB
Include either Adult Cephalic

or Neonatal Cephalic
MI, TIS, TIB, TIC
(3) Format of acoustic index display (Probes Not Intended for

Transcranial Use)
When any mode is active, for probes not intended for transcranial
use, the relevant indices are MI, TIS (Soft Tissue) and TIB (Bone).
The default displayed indices are MI and TIS. Another index TIB
is selectable by setting in Main Menu.
As is the case for all conditions with this scanner in which
the maximum value of a relevant acoustic for a certain probe
is less than 1.0, the label for the Mechanical Index or Thermal
Index will be always shown in standard video, with no value is
displayed to indicate the current MI value or TI value.
MI
TIS
In case of MI are shown in standard video, operation in the intended
clinical applications is considered to be without significant
risk due to non-linear acoustic effects. And in case of both
indices, TIS and TIB, are shown in standard video, operation
in the intended clinical applications is considered without
significant risk due to heating of tissues by ultrasound energy.
No real-time TI values need be monitored and the probe may be
used without concern for minimizing the displayed value of any
TI. However, in consideration of the general principle of ALARA,
the US POWER control should generally be operated in the lowest
4-26
Q1E-EA0612
setting that yields the desired image quality.

The reverse video display indicates that the probe in use may
in some cases be set to a control state where the displayed index
may exceed 1.0.
MI 1.2
TIS: 0.8
(4) Format of acoustic index display (probes including transcranial
use)
Certain probes used with this scanner are intended for clinical
application that may include transcranial examination (such as
Neonatal Cephalic use and Adult Cephalic use).
For these probes, the relevant indices are MI, TIS, TIB and TIC
(Cranial Bone).
The default displayed indices are MI and TIS. Other indices,
TIB or TIC, are selectable by setting in Main Menu.
(5) Control of acoustic index parameters
For any probe in which one or more relevant indices are displayed
in reverse-video, then for some control settings with this probe,
an index value may exceed a value of 1.0. For these indices,
the real-time values are displayed to allow monitoring and control.
The displayed values may take on the following values (where
"x" indicates the actual calculated index value).
Table 4.8.2-2 Display Range of Calculated Value
For TI,
Range of Calculated Value
Displayed Value
x < 0.4
< 0.4
0.4
0.4 x < 0.5
0.6
0.5 x < 0.7
0.8
0.7 x < 0.9
1.0
0.9 x < 1.1
1.2
1.1 x < 1.3
1.4
1.3 x < 1.5
1.6
1.5 x < 1.7
1.8
1.7 x < 1.9
2.0
1.9 x < 2.1
2.2
2.1 x < 2.3
4-27
Q1E-EA0612
For MI,
Range of Calculated Value
x < 0.4
0.4 x < 0.5
0.5 x < 0.7
0.7 x < 0.9
0.9 x < 1.1
1.1 x < 1.3
1.3 x < 1.5
1.5 x < 1.7
1.7 x < 1.9
Displayed Value
< 0.4
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
In all operating modes with this scanner, direct control of

acoustic exposure is available by using the ULTRASOUND POWER
switch. Changing the output level between the High(H), Medium(M),
and Low(L) levels permits adjustment of the ultrasound transmit
level while leaving all other image parameters unchanged and
is the preferred method of controlling Thermal Index values.
Note that for all probe/mode combinations possible with this
scanner.
The values for all relevant acoustic indices are less than 1.0
in the Low(L) ULTRASOUND POWER level.
For description of the indirect effects that certain other control
adjustments may have on displayed index values, consult the
sections of this Instruction Manual that describe operation of
the particular operating modes.
4-28
Q1E-EA0612
4.8.3 ULTRASOUND POWER Control

(1)
Procedure to change ultrasound power by
toggle
US POWER
switch.
The procedure to change the ultrasound power by the
US POWER
toggle switch differs depending

diagnostic application.
on
the
specified
(a) In case the set diagnostic application is fetal use in

Obstetric Measurement ID input, in the case that the
higher ultrasound power setting is desired, do the
following procedure.
Operate the
toggle switch to upward and then the window

US POWER
shown in Fig. 4.8.3-1 is displayed.

Use the trackball to move the cursor to the Yes button.
Press "Trackball settled button".
Then, the ultrasound power level may be increased by one stage.
Use the trackball to move the cursor to the
No
button.
Press "Trackball settled button".

The ultrasound power level is kept current stage.
Fig. 4.8.3-1 US Power Message Window
(b) In case the set diagnostic application is not Fetal use.

Operating the US POWER toggle switch immediately changes
over the ultrasound power output level without displaying
the above screen shown in Fig. 4.8.3-1.
4-29
Q1E-EA0612
(2)
Default of ULTRASOUND POWER

The scanners to be shipped from the factory are set as
follows :
- The default ULTRASOUND POWER output level for all
applications is "High" level.
- The application of the default is not "Fetal Use".
NOTICE:
When the unit is restarted after once it was shutdown,

the ultrasound power is returned to the level set
at the time of delivery from the factory.
4-30
Q1E-EA0612
4.9
Ending Use
If pressing the ON/STANDBY Switch
at the front of equipment again,
the system shuts down after
executing the system shut down
process.
ON/STANDBY
switch
Breaker
switch
After confirming the system

Fig. 4.9-1
Position of Power Switch
shuts down, turn off the

Breaker switch.
1) Breaker Switch
Normally use the equipment with this switch ON (|).
Do not press OFF () in any case other than an emergency such
that fire, smoke or abnormal smell from the equipment or any
abnormality occurs in the equipment
2) ON/STANDBY Switch
When pressing the ON/STANDBY switch once and then restarting
the system, check if the system shut down process has been
completed and then power ON again.
If turning ON/OFF the switch while starting or shutting down
the system, the system may possibly be damaged.
3) In some cases a system ending action can not be performed as
intended even if you try to shut down the power by pressing
ON/STAND BY switch.
In that case shut off the power by operating a breaker switch.
4) If ON/STANDBY switch is pushed when the application menu is
displayed, shutdown operation may not work. Please check that
the application menu has closed before pushing ON/STANDBY
switch.
4-31
Q1E-EA0612
4.10 The caution of connecting with Multiplane Transesophageal Probe

EUP-ES52M and EUP-ES52E
(1) Connection of EUP-ES52M and EUP-ES52E for EUB-5500
In case of connecting EUP-ES52M to EUB-5500, it is possible
to connect to the probe 1 and probe 2 connector only.
In case of connecting EUP-ES52E to EUB-5500, it is possible
to connect to the probe 3 connector only.
If you connected to the other probe connector, "NO PROBE" is
indicated on the monitor of ultrasound scanner, and the equipment
does not work.
EUP-ES52M
probe 1 connector
probe 2 connector
EUP-ES52E
probe 3 connector
Fig. 4.10-1 probe connector

(2) Indication of warning under using EUP-ES52M and EUP-ES52E
Under using EUP-ES52M and EUP-ES52E, the temperature of the
tip in acoustic power does not exceed 41deg. When it exceeds
41deg, a following message is indicated on the monitor of the
ultrasound scanner,
"NEAR THERMAL LIMIT ADVISE LOWER POWER".
Take the measure of lowering ultrasound power of finishing a
diagnosis and so on when this message is indicated.
When the temperature of the tip continues to rise beyond 41deg,
following message is indicated;
"MAXIMUM THERMAL LIMIT EXCEEDED.
CHANGE TRANSDUCERS OR RESET TO CONTINUE.
FOR MORE INFORMATION, SEE USERS MANUAL..
At the same time, EUB-5500 becomes in FREEZE-ON mode and stops
transmission of ultrasound by a function of a safety device
which prevents the temperature of the tip from exceeding 43deg.
4-32
Q1E-EA0612
If the ultrasound scanner becomes in FREEZE-ON mode, change

the probe or stop diagnosis, and wait until the message disappears.
Afterward, if the message disappeared, the ultrasound scanner
can be used in FREEZE-OFF mode and diagnosing become possible.
An error message under using EUP-ES52E is found in Appendix A.
4.11 The caution of connecting with Intracavital probe EUP-R54AW-19/33,

Linear type probe (Wide view type) EUP-L53L and endoscopic probe
EG-3670URK
(1) Connection of EUP-R54AW-19/33, EUP-L53L and EG-3670URK for
EUB-5500
In case of connecting to EUB-5500, Intracavital probe
EUP-R54AW-19/33, Linear type probe (Wide view type) EUP-L53L
and endoscopic probe EG-3670URK, it is possible to connect to
the probe 1 and probe 2 connector.
It is not possible to connect to the probe 3.
If you connected to the probe 3 connector, "NO PROBE" is indicated
on the monitor of ultrasound scanner, and the equipment does
not work.
probe 1 connector
probe 2 connector
probe 3 connector
Fig. 4.11-1 probe connector
4-33
Q1E-EA0612
Chapter 5 Operation Modes

5.1
Overview
Operation of this equipment can be roughly divided into the
following four sections.
Keyboard operation Functions to be controlled with switches
on the keyboard panel. Its major
functions are operation of basic
function, and adjustment of transmitting
and receiving of ultrasound.
TRACKBALL PRIORITY Function to switch over the use of
operation
trackball.With this, the trackball is
used for various functions.
Function menu
operation
Function to select and control menus

displayed at the bottom of monitor
screen. Its major functions are
adjustment of items in each mode, and
operation of professional function.
MAIN MENU
operation
Function to select menus displayed at

the left side of monitor screen.Its
major functions are adjustment of entire
system, adjustment items of lower
frequency, selection to allow
professional functions to be displayed.
5.1.1 Keyboard operation

Operates switches on the keyboard.
However, keys and switches listed below
described in the other subsections or sections
will
be
- TRACKBALL PRIORITY toggle switch (Refer to 5.1.2)

- Function menu key group and function toggle switch
group (Refer to 5.1.3)
- MAIN MENU keys (Refer to 5.1.4)
- Measurement key group: CALIP, TRACE, MEAS MENU, REPORT
and ERASE MENU (Refer to 1.2 in the instruction manual
Measurement Edition of the ultrasound diagnostic
scanner)
- Image memory keys: READ, S-WRITE and M-WRITE (Refer to
9.2)
5-1
Q1E-EA0612
- Recording related keys: PRINT, and VCR/ORIG (Refer to

Chapter 10)
- Character input keyboard: PATIENT (Refer to Chapter 4),
ANNOTATION, CHARACTER, CHARACTER CLEAR and Cursors.
(Refer to Chapter 6)
5.1.2 TRACKBALL PRIORITY
TRACKBALL PRIORITY is a function to switch over
functions that the trackball occupies when multiple
functions are available for the trackball. Clicking the
TRACKBALL PRIORITY toggle switch displayed on the upper
right of screen to the left and right switches over the
functions that the trackball occupies.
The TRACKBALL PRIORITY switches over occupancy by the
trackball on the following functions:
B (M) image up/down
move
Measurement caliper
Image steering
VCR playback angle

sample point setting
Probe mark
Pan zoom ROI setting
Character input
M mode beam line
Image filing function

box cursor
Main menu
Measurement menu
Annotation menu etc.
Doppler mode sample

point
CFM-ROI setting
Image memory playback
by frame
No selection
VCR playback by frame

box cursor
Image filing playback

by frame
Fig. 5.1.2-1 Trackball Priority Marks

5.1.3 Function menu operation
The function menu allows functions used frequently to be
accessed as menu. Contents of menu are displayed at the
bottom of screen, and toggle switches are used to access
to respective function. Also any grayed key such as F3
Biplane key indicates that it is not accessible in the
current setting.
5-2
Q1E-EA0612
FUNCTION
PREV
NEXT
Fig. 5.1.3-1 Correspondence of Menu and Toggle Switch

PREV
NEXT
Scrolls the function menu pages.
Clicking the
bottom displays the next page, while clicking

the top displays the previous page.
At the right end of the function menu at the
bottom of screen, marks are displayed to
indicate pages available.
Indicates the previous page is available.
Indicates the next page is available.
Fig.5.1.3-2 Scrolling Symbol

(1)
Starting by exclusive key

Selecting the function menu key on the control panel
starts the menu. Also, when the menu is to be removed
from the screen, press that key again.
PHYSIO
OPTION
CONTRAST
IMAGE
PROCESS
MODE
DEPENDED
USER
USER
Fig. 5.1.3-3 Function Menu Key Menu

PHYSIO
The menu for PHYSIO functions is displayed.

(Refer to 5.8)
OPTION
Displays option functions.

Wide View :
Displays a wide view display function menu
(Refer to the Instruction Manual of Wide View
Software.)
PinP:
Display a Picture in Picture Unit function
menu.
(Refer to the Instruction Manual of Picture
in Picture Unit.)
5-3
Q1E-EA0612
The menu for 3D display function or real-time

3D function is displayed.(Refer to the Inst
ruction Manual of the 3D Display unit(Free
hand)/3D Display unit(Magnetic Sensor) or the
3D Display unit(Real-time).)
The following key display any menus corresponding to

each mode when switching over examination modes such as
B-mode, M-mode, etc.
IMAGE
PROCESS
Displays the IMAGE PROCESS menu.

Adjust image process functions.
MODE
DEPENDED
Displays the MODE DEPENDED menu.

Select any function frequently used.
The following keys are used to display an entry dialogue

when it is desired to previously enter user defined
functions.
A function can be entered by each key, so that user can
define max. 2 functions.
USER
USER
Displays
user
defined
function
menu
dialogue.
(2)
Starting by specific key

Starting any specific function displays the function
menu corresponding to the function.
- Character function
- Annotation function
- Measurement function
- VCR playback function
- Image filing continuous image recording function
- Image filing playback function
5-4
Q1E-EA0612
(3) Expanded function page for measurement

If you set the expanded function page for measurement,
you will be able to use the function key to perform
measurement operations quickly. For details about how
to set this page, see 8.3.8 Measurement menu.
The expanded function page is displayed before the

usual page 1.
The expanded function page is displayed when the

following conditions are met:
(a) The 'Use expanded page for measurement' setting
is ON.
(b) Freeze is ON.
(c) The Mode Dependent menu is ON. (However, it
need not be ON while taking a measurement.)
5-5
Q1E-EA0612
5.1.4 MAIN MENU operation

Menus related
equipment.
to
settings
and
conditions
of
the
If changing setting of these menus, keys to be activated

and function menu to be displayed may be changed.
Press the
MAIN
MENU
key to display the menu at the left side
of screen.
Use the trackball to move the cursor to any item and
press the ENTER button.
The lower level window (Subwindow) of the relevant item is newly opened.
Fig. 5.1.4-1 Sub-window

i)
Item selection 1
Items with "" at the left in the menu indicates
[currently not selected].
When it is to be selected, move the cursor to "" and
press the ENTER button.
If selected, it changes to "" with ("") entered in
it.
Also the selection is to be canceled, use the same
steps as that for selection to switch to "" with
nothing in it.
5-6
Q1E-EA0612
ii)
Item selection 2
Any item with "
"
indicates
[selecting any one of them].

To select the item, move the
cursor to "
"
and press the
ENTER key.
Also, if newly selecting any
item currently not selected,
the item previously selected
is deselected.
Fig. 5.1.4-2 Date/Time Menu
iii) Non-selectable items
For any item that cannot be selected, "" or "
iv)
"
is
not white but grayed.

symbol
Any item with "" mark at the right indicates that
it has a lower level menu.
Move the cursor to an item with "" and press the
ENTER key.
The new menu opens overlaid on the
current menu.
v)
Input
For any items to which a character string or figure
are to be entered, an input menu opens at the center
of screen to allow characters to be entered.
After entering characters, press the ENTER key to
close the menu.
vi)
End of MAIN Menu

Press the
MAIN
MENU
key again to close the menu and return
to the original menu.
All menus close.
Or, move the cursor to

the "" mark at the upper
right corner and press
the ENTER key to close
the menu screen.
If pressing "" of the
MAIN MENU, all menus are
closed.
Only Setup
closes.
Fig. 5.1.4-3 End of MAIN Menu
5-7
Q1E-EA0612
5.2
B mode
5.2.1 Display of B mode
If pressing the button at the center of
with Freeze
OFF, a M-mode image is displayed.

The CFM mode is released if pressing the knob center
button when selecting the CFM mode in this state.
Hospital name
Patient name
Mechanical Index
Ultrasound power
Patient ID
Thermal Index
Right/Left orientation(HI Com mode:
Date
Trackball priority
Time
Frame rate
Moving value of in
axial direction
Measurement menu
and Measurement
Result Frame
B-mode dynamic range

HI REZ
B-mode enhancement
B-mode Gray Map
B-mode AGC
Reception dynamic filter
B-mode persistence
Gray scale
Body mark
Display area for
Post-process
value
Image display area

marker
Function menu
B-mode gain
PROBE name
Depth/MAG
Application name
Transmission wave
frequency
Fig. 5.2.1-1 Basic Screen Layout of B-Mode

5.2.2 Gain adjustment
(1)
Adjusting brightness of whole image

Use the periphery of B gain
knob to adjust gain of Bmode image as a whole.
Turning to the right makes
the whole image brighter,
and turning to the left
makes the whole image darker.
Dark
Bright
Fig. 5.2.2-1 B GAIN
5-8
Q1E-EA0612
It becomes the optimal B gain automatically after

starting HI Support. At the time of HI Support
starting, it is indicated by reversal.
HI Support is active.
(2)
Adjusting sensitivity (brightness) at specific depth

<Common to all modes>
Use DEPTH GAIN CONTROL to
adjust gain for each depth.
Shallow area
Sliding to the right makes

an area of specific depth
brighter, and sliding to
the left makes it darker.
Dark
It
becomes
the
optimal
depth
gain
automatically
after starting HI Support.
DEPTH GAIN
Bright
Deep area
Fig. 5.2.2-2 DEPTH GAIN
A slide position may differ from the depth gain after

HI Support starting.
Depth gain differentiation can be reset by HI Support
reset function.
5.2.3 Switching over electronic focus
Focus position

The focus point can be switched
over among 8 steps. Click the
toggle switch upward to make
the
focus
shallower,
while
downward to make it deeper.
Shallow
FOCUS
Deep
Fig. 5.2.3-1 Focus Depth
5-9
Q1E-EA0612
5.2.4 Switching over electronic focus steps

Selecting
zone
the
number
of
focal
The stage of focus may

switched over from 1 to 4.
be
As the stage of focus increases,

an image focused in a wide
range may be displayed
Increasing
number of stages
F-STEPS
Decreasing
number of stages
Fig. 5.2.4-1 Selecting the number

of focal zone
5.2.5 Switching over transmit frequency
US transmit frequency can be switched in 5 steps. Select
lower
frequency
side
to
obtain
image
of
better
penetration (depth sensitivity), while higher frequency
side to obtain images of better distance resolution.
Click the toggle switch upward to select higher frequency,
and click the toggle switch downward to select lower
frequency.
High
REF FREQ
Low
Fig.5.2.5-1 Transmit Frequency

NOTICE: All probe do not have 5 step frequncy.
5-10
Q1E-EA0612
5.2.6 Moving display position

(1)
Switching display depth

Clicking the toggle switch upward makes display depth
wider, while clicking down makes it deeper.
However, the switch direction of this display depth
can be changed from Main Menu.
NOTICE: Range of display depth varies depending on
the probe. It has been set in a range of min
20mm ~ max 360mm according to use of the
probe.
Larger display depth
DEPTH / MAG
Smaller display depth
Fig. 5.2.6-1 Display Depth

(2)
Steering an image
Use
TRACKBALL
PRIORITY
to select
at the upper right of screen
and move the trackball to the left and right to move

the image displayed to the left and right in a range
of max display angle of the probe being selected or
in a range of max display width.
And press the UNDO key, the steering position is
returned to the center position.
Fig. 5.2.6-2 Steering Image
5-11
Q1E-EA0612
(3)
Moving FOV (Field Of View) in depth direction

Use
TRACKBALL
PRIORITY
to select
at the right of screen and move
the display start position of B-mode image with the

trackball.
Also, travel is displayed at the upper right of the
image.
And press the UNDO key, the travel is returned to 0mm.
Deep
Shallow
Fig. 5.2.6-3 Moving FOV in Depth Direction
5-12
Q1E-EA0612
5.2.7
Twin screen display of B mode images

Pressing
the
MULTI
SINGLE
button
switches the screen to B-mode

dual screen display one of
which
displays
real
time
image (Live) and the other
displays still image (Freeze).
At
this
time,
the
L(U)
Pressing
the
Live
Freeze
L(U)
Live
Freeze
Freeze
Live
R(D)
R(D)
L(U)
buttons select an image to be

a real time image.
MULTI
SINGLE
MULTI
SINGLE
Live
Live
Live
R(D)
button
Fig. 5.2.7-1
Dual Screen Display
again switches the screen to

single screen display, and the
L(U)
R(D)
buttons select
an image to be displayed.
5.2.8
Advanced dTHI (dynamic Tissue Harmonic Image)

Receives signals in
double frequency
against transmit
frequency to display
a high contrast
image.
Especially it is
effective for a
difficult patient.
Fig. 5.2.8-1 Advanced dTHI
High-definition dTHI image can be displayed with HdTHI

(High-definition dynamic tissue harmonic imaging).
To select dTHI mode, press dTHI button
. The type
of dTHI mode is displayed in the transmission wave
frequency display area at the lower of the screen.
(Refer to Fig.5.2.1-1)
You can select advanced dTHI in 6 steps. You can set to
select dTHI and HdTHI automatically when selecting any
probe in the application menu.
(Refer to Chapter 8 APPLICATION Function.)
5-13
Q1E-EA0612
1)This function is effective only for some sort of

probes. When selecting any probe not applicable, dTHI
button
is switched off.
2)To select the transmission wave frequency in
fundamental imaging mode, switch off dTHI button
the
.
3)Selecting dTHI-F or dTHI-R, it can be selected only 1

or 2 of focus point, and the density is fixed 1 of
high frame rate.
4)B/M(B/PW) simultaneous/interval mode cannot be
selected dTHI-F and dTHI-R.
5)Sector probe can be selected only 3 step of dTHI-R,
dTHI-G and dTHI-P. Then, the number of focus point,
density and mode do not have limit of specification.
5-14
Q1E-EA0612
5.2.9
MODE DEPENDED menu

Pressing
MODE
DEPENDED
switches over the function menu at the
bottom of screen to the MODE DEPENDED menu. Also, when

selecting B mode, this mode is automatically selected.
(1)
FREEZE OFF
1st page
2nd page
(2)
FREEZE ON
1st page
2nd page
Fig. 5.2.9-1 MODE DEPENDED Menu
[FREEZE OFF]
- 1st page F2 Biplane display
Simultaneous real time display of dual sections is
realized by using the biplane probe or two probes with the
same name.
Indication of center position

(White arrow)
Longitudinal
Transverse
(1)
Fig. 5.2.9-2 Biplane Display

Probe requirements
To make this function usable, connect either of the
following probes.
Biplane probe:
Intracavital probe EUP-CC331/EUP-CC531

(Connect this probe to the probe
connectors PROBE 1 and 3 or 2 and 3.)
Probe with the same model name:

2 probes
(Connect these probes to the probe
connectors PROBE 1 and 3 or 2 and 3.)
5-15
Q1E-EA0612
(2)
Operation
If selecting the probe listed in (1) and clicking the
F3 toggle on the 2nd page with Freeze OFF, the dual
B-mode screen appears and ready for simultaneous real
time display.
If clicking the same toggle again, the simultaneous
real time display ends and the single screen viewed
before selecting the simultaneous real time display
is restored.
Also, if pressing the probe selection menu key during
the simultaneous real time display, it ends and
single screen of the image of the probe corresponding
to the key selected is displayed.
(3)
Image display
On the screen, the identification mark
Transverse or L: Longitudinal is displayed.
of
T:
Also, as shown in Fig. 5.2.9-2, an arrow mark

indicating intersection is displayed on the tomogram.
F3 HI Support start-up
Starting-up HI Support function
HI Support is started after clicking the toggle. B and depth
gain are adjusted automatically, and the optimal quality of
image is displayed according to the image displayed at the
time of a click.
Depending on the images displayed at the time of a click
(for example, image with many noise etc.), HI Support
dose not operate or may not be optimized quality of
image.
F4 HI Support Reset
HI Support is reset.
If it is clicked running on HI Support function, HI Support
is reset and depth gain is returned before HI Support
starting.
5-16
Q1E-EA0612
F5 Image display angle

In case of the sector and convex
probes, display angle of B-mode
image is switched over in 6
steps.
For the linear probe, display
width is switched over in 6
steps.
Wider angle
Narrower
angle
Fig. 5.2.9-3
Image Display Angle
F6 Switching line density
Allows number of scan lines of
B-mode image to be switched over.
(1)
High frame rate mode: 1

Scans in high frame rate. It
is appropriate for viewing a
region that moves. Frame rate
is high, but on the other hand,
density of scan lines is kept
low.
(2)
High frame rate
High density mode : 2

Obtains high definition image
with double density of scan
lines. However, frame rate is
kept low.
Low frame rate
Fig. 5.2.9-4
Switching Density of
Scan lines
F7 HdTHI Function
HdTHI image can be displayed by clicking toggle F7.
This function is effective only for some sort of probes
and of dTHI mode. If selecting probe is not applicable
for this function, F7 is displayed in gray.
5-17
Q1E-EA0612
- 2nd page F1 Combine Display

This is the function to combine two images displayed on
the dual image display mode to produce an image combined
at the center of the screen.
Please refer to 5.2.11 (8) Combine.
F2 Horizontal reversal of image<Common to all modes>
Allows a B-mode image
revered horizontally.
to
be
Horizontal
reversal
Horizontal
reversal
Fig. 5.2.9-5
Horizontal Reversal of Image
F3 90 rotation of image <Common to all modes>

be rotated by 90.
for
to
Upward click
rotation
left
Downward click for right

rotation
Fig. 5.2.9-6
90 Rotation of Image
5-18
Q1E-EA0612
F4 Up/down reversal of image <Common to all modes>

be reversed vertically.
to
Vertical
reversal
Vertical
reversal
Fig. 5.2.9-7
Vertical Reversal of Image
F5 Body Mark function menu
Body Mark function menu is displayed.
Please refer to 6.3.6 Body Mark function menu for the
detail.
F6 B color function
By utilizing the B-color function,
delicate brightness difference may
be easily recognized.
This turns B-color On/Off.
OFF
ON
Fig. 5.2.9-8 B-Color
5-19
Q1E-EA0612
F7 B-color: Selecting colors

In the B-color, color of B/W, BColor Map 1 to 8 can be selected.
Select each color from "B-color
map selection" (2nd page) of the
function menu in a rotation manner.
Color setting can be independently

selected for each of B, M and
Doppler-modes.
Color of B-mode is changed in the
B-mode, color of M-mode in M-mode
and color of Doppler-mode in B/PWmode.
Fig. 5.2.9-9
Changing B-Color
[FREEZE ON]
- 1st page F1 REVIEW:
Cine memory playback

memory is available)
(Displayed
only
when
cine
F2 SPD:
Switches over playback speed (Displayed only when

selecting REVIEW)
(Refer to Chapter 9 Image memory unit)
F3, ODM:
ODM PLAY
F5, F6, F7: Measurement functions assigned in Setup menu.

(Refer to 8.3.8)
- 2nd page F3, F4, F5, F6, F7: Same as [FREEZE OFF]
5-20
Q1E-EA0612
5.2.10 IMAGE PROCESS menu

Pressing
IMAGE
PROCESS
bottom of screen to the IMAGE PROCESS menu.
1st page
2nd page
Fig. 5.2.10-1 IMAGE PROCESS Menu
- 1st page F1 Dynamic range
Controls a tone of image.
It may be switched over in a range of 45dB~90dB in 5dB
step.
45dB:
Tone with black/white

clearly separated.
1
90dB:
Tone with fine shades of

gray
Fig. 5.2.10-2
Dynamic Range
F2 HI REZ
ON
Controls HI REZ ON/OFF.

If F2 is clicked, HI REZ goes
to ON (OFF). If F2 is clicked
again, it goes to OFF (ON). HI
REZ can be controlled during
freezing OFF.
OFF
Fig.5.2.10-3
HI REZ
And when CFM-B/M(D), CFM

biplane mode, Real-time 3D
mode is selected, HI REZ is
OFF.
5-21
Q1E-EA0612
F3 enhancement
Selects the edge enhancement
level of images. HI REZ level
can be changed if HI REZ is ON.
Each item may be switched over
in 4 steps of 1~4. HI REZ
level can be controlled during
freezing ON and OFF.
1:
Edge enhancement Weak
4:
Edge enhancement Strong
Fig.5.2.10-4
Enhancement
1:
HI REZ level Weak

3
4:
HI REZ level Strong

Fig.5.2.10-5
HI REZ
F4 Gray Map
Set an image adjustment.
among 8 kinds of gray
select the map to obtain
image adjustment you like
From
maps
the
best.
Fig. 5.2.10-6
Gray Map
F5 AGC (Automatic gain control)
Allows an image to be
displayed with its prominent
echo level suppressed for
viewing the region that is apt
to be highly bright.
0: AGC OFF
1: AGC level low
Fig. 5.2.10-7
Switching AGC
3: AGC level high
5-22
Q1E-EA0612
F6 Receive dynamic filter

Allows image quality to be
adjusted in 3 seps.
A: High resolution mode
B: Standard mode
C: Depth viewing mode
Selected mode is displayed at

the upper center of screen.
Fig. 5.2.10-8
Receive Dynamic Filter
F7 Persist
Correlates image frames.
This allows a smooth and soft
image to be obtained.
7
0: PERSIST OFF
1: PERSIST level low
Fig. 5.2.10-9 Persist
7: PERSIST level high
5-23
Q1E-EA0612
- 2nd page F1 Control screen selection

The -CURVE menu is provided for
each of B-mode, M-mode, D-mode
and CFM-mode.
If the function
menu is not "Control:B", press
to select "B".
1
PREV
NEXT
The -CURVE currently set for Bmode is displayed at the lower

left of screen.
-curve
Fig. 5.2.10-10
Control Screen Selection
F3 -CURVE selection
Allows -CURVE to be switched
over.
Also, -coefficient (F4) and
Center position (F5) are
displayed depending on the CURVE selected.
3
Fig. 5.2.10-11
-CURVE Selection
5-24
Q1E-EA0612
F4 -coefficient
Allows -coefficient to be
switched over.
It may be changed from 1.0
to 4.0 in 0.1 step.
=small
= large
4
It is displayed depending on
the -CURVE selected.
= large
=small
=small
= large
Fig. 5.2.10-12
-coefficient
F5 Center value of S-shape curve

Displayed when the
curve is selected.
S-shape
The position of center of Sshape curve may be switched

over in a range of 0~255.
Fig. 5.2.10-13
Position of Center of Curve
Switches over in a range of

0~255.
Output signal
Adjusts shades of gray to

remove lower level echoes.
256 shades
of gray
F6 Rejection
Rejection
Input signal
Fig. 5.2.10-14 Rejection
Switches over in a range of

1~255.
Output signal
Adjusts shades of gray to

saturate high level echoes
to the maximum brightness.
255 shades
of gray
F7 Saturation
Saturation
Input signal
Fig. 5.2.10-15 Saturation

5-25
Q1E-EA0612
5.2.11 B MENU of MAIN MENU

Press the
MAIN
MENU
key to display
MAIN MENU and select B MENU

if the B-mode has started.
MAIN
MENU
Fig. 5.2.11-1
Starting B MENU
(1)
FOCUS
Position : Switches over setting
of focus layout.
Auto :
Manual :
Automatically arranges.
toggle on
Use the
FOCUS
the Keyboard to change

arrangement.
Stand-Off: When using the coupler
for
surface
probe,
this shifts the focus
point downward for the
coupler.
(Selectable
only
Position-Auto)
in
Fig. 5.2.11-2
FOCUS MENU
5-26
Q1E-EA0612
(2)
View Angle
Switches view angle and view width
of ultrasound image.
NOTICE: The same as F5 ANGLE
MODE DEPENDED menu.
of
Fig. 5.2.11-3
View Angle Menu
(3)
Scan Dens.
Switches over line density.
MODE DEPENDED menu.
of
Fig. 5.2.11-4
Scan Dens. Menu
(4)
Inv & Rot

Inverts or rotates an ultrasound
image
Invert R/L: Left/Right inversion
Invert U/D: Up/Down inversion
Rotate +90: Counterclockwise
rotation
Rotate -90: Clockwise rotation
NOTICE:The same function as F3,F4
of the MODE DEPENDED menu.
Fig. 5.2.11-5
Inv & Rot Menu
5-27
Q1E-EA0612
(5)
Dop.Cursor
Checking in displays Doppler
Cursor in the B-mode image.
MODE DEPENDED menu.
of
Fig. 5.2.11-6
Scan Dens. Menu
(6)
DEPTH GAIN
Display Curve
Fig. 5.2.11-7 Depth Gain Menu

GAIN values
: Display values of each DEPTH GAIN.
Display Curve : Displays distribution corresponding

to GAIN value in depth direction at
the right side of screen.
MODE
: Fixed)
5-28
To every selector of Depth

Gain an area of depth is
fixed. Even if a display
depth is changed, the gain
at each depth is not
changed.
Q1E-EA0612
Variable) To every selector of Depth

Gain a fixed area of depth
is allocated by dividing
equally the entire depth of
image. When the display
depth is changed,
accordingly the gain of
each depth is changed.
The display of depth gain and gain curve will be a flat

at the time of HI Support starting.
The depth gain and gain curve under HI Support starting

are displayed considering the start at the time of HI
Support starting as a flat.
(7)
Steering Mark
This is the steering mark that is displayed at the
lower right of the window and indicates the relation
between the display on the screen and scan region.
This is displayed only when a probe having a wide
view such as EUP-V53W is connected.
Steering Mark
Fig. 5.2.11-8 Steer.Mark Menu
5-29
Q1E-EA0612
(8)
Combine
This is the function to
combine two images displayed
on the dual image display
mode to produce an image
combined at the center of the
screen.
Unless scan conditions such
as probe type, focus, display
depth, up-down shifted
distance and orientation are
same, Combine function cannot
be selected. Scan two images
with the same parameters.
Dual image display
Displayed
image A
Displayed
image B
Combined image display
Fig. 5.2.11-9
Cautions in the application
1) When you want to perform measurements like a
distance and so on crossing over the border of two
images, depict and synthesize two images so that
there is no discrepancy between Right side image
and Left side image of ROI at the border line as
shown in Fig. 5.2.11-10.
In synthesizing the image in Combine mode two

images are met visually, so keep in mind that, for
this reason, an error may be caused in the result
of measurement.
L side
R side
ROI
Fig. 5.2.11-10
5-30
Q1E-EA0612
2) In order to meet lines of ROI at the border of two

images operate the system under below mentioned
conditions.
When the system is set to Combine mode, select a
depth display in which there is no gap between two
image. In the case as shown in Fig. 5.2.11-11 it
is impossible to get a correct result of
measurement.
Fig. 5.2.11-11
If any of the following probes is used, a part of
the display area becomes ineffective.
EUP-L33ST
EUP-O53T
In Combine mode, select the depth display with
which ineffective display is not produced between
the two images. In the case shown in Fig. 5.2.1112, a correct measurement result cannot be obtained.
Ineffective
display area
Fig. 5.2.11-12
(9)
Biplane
This function can be selected when biplane operation
is enabled.
Checking in displays the Biplane display screen.
(Refer to F3 of 5.2.9 MODE DEPENDED menu (1st page)).
5-31
Q1E-EA0612
(10) PDC (Patient Dependent Compensation)

Acoustic parameters of fat,
muscle, organs are different
in every examinee. With PDC
function it is possible to
change
acoustic
parameter
setting of the equipment in
order
to
obtain
optimum
images.
Fig. 5.2.11-13 PDC

(11) Thermal Index
Switch over Thermal Index
display.
TIS : Soft Tissue Thermal Index
TIB : Bone Thermal Index
TIC : Cranial-bone Thermal Index
Fig. 5.2.11-14
Thermal Index Menu
(12) BW-PRF
PRF of B/W B-Mode image and M-Mode image can be
switched by this function. It may be effective if it
switches when artifact (multiple echo) becomes
obstructive to observation.
H:
PRF High
M:
PRF Middle
L:
PRF Low
Fig.5.2.11-15 BW-PRF
5-32
Q1E-EA0612
5.2.12 Using ALARA in B-mode

When you press the B mode selection key B while the
FREEZE key is switched off, a window for B-mode image
appears. This window contains the mechanical index (MI)
and thermal index (TI) for the probe you are using. (For
details about the format of the window for B mode, see
5.2.1 Display of B mode. For details about the possible
bio-effects indicated by the MI and TI, see 4.8.2
Acoustic output indices)
For probes that are not intended for transcranial

scanning, the relevant indices are the MI, soft tissue
thermal index (TIS) and bone thermal index (TIB). The
indices displayed by default are the MI and TIS. You can
choose to display the TIB by specifying the TIB from the
Main Menu.
For probes whose intended use includes transcranial

scanning, the relevant indices are the MI, TIS, TIB, and
TIC (Cranial-bone Thermal Index). The indices displayed
by default are the MI and TIS. You can choose to display
the other indices (TIB or TIC or both) by specifying the
indices from the Main Menu.
In accordance with the ALARA principle, you should set

the ultrasound output to the minimum level required to
acquire images of the desired quality. In addition, the
length of time a patient is exposed to ultrasound energy
should be kept at a minimum by using the FREEZE key. An
exception occurs, however, when the image data needs to
be collected for specific purposes.
As with all operating modes with this scanner, the most

direct control of acoustic exposure is available by
using the US POWER knob. Changing the output level
between the High (H), Middle (M), and Low (L) levels
permits adjustment of the ultrasound transmit level
while leaving all other system settings unchanged.
5-33
Q1E-EA0612
When you specify ultrasound output, note that the

following parameters indirectly affect the MI and TI
values in B mode. Also note that the following
parameters are the main ones you need to adjust to
optimize B-mode images.
Focus
Changing the depth of focus or ultrasound

transmit aperture affects the MI, TIS,
TIB, and TIC values.
Ultrasound
output
Changing
the
ultrasound
output
level
affects the MI, TIS, TIB, and TIC values.
Frame rate
The frame rate changes when the viewing

angle, scan line density, or display depth
changes. A change in the frame rate
affects the TIS, TIB, and TIC values.
5-34
Q1E-EA0612
5.3
M-mode
5.3.1
Displaying B/M-mode image

Pressing
with Freeze OFF displays B/M-mode.
B image
M image
Thermal Index
Mechanical
Index
M-beam line
M image
M-mode gain
M-mode image
display depth
M-mode
M-mode
M-mode
M-mode
Function menu
AGC
gray map
enhance
dynamic range
Fig. 5.3.1-1 Basic Screen Layout of B/M mode

Beam line in this mode is displayed in yellow showing
that it is active. When active, the beam line can be
moved left and right with the trackball.
Also, if switching over the symbol at the upper right
corner of screen with
TRACKBALL
PRIORITY
to select any one other than
, the beam line changes to blue and inactive.

5.3.2
Adjusting gain (brightness)

Turn the M gain knob to
adjust overall gain of M-mode
image. Also in the B/M-mode,
DEPTH GAIN CONTROL adjusts
gain of both B and M-mode at
the same time.
This allows
gain for each depth to be
adjusted as well (Refer to
5.2.2).
5-35
Dark
Bright
Fig. 5.3.2-1
Adjusting Gain
(Brightness)
Q1E-EA0612
5.3.3
Single screen display of M-mode Image

If
pressing
MULTI
SINGLE
while
displaying
B/M-mode
image,
single screen display of M-mode image appears.

If pressing
MULTI
SINGLE
again, B/M-mode is displayed.

L(U)
Also, if pressing
while displaying M-mode single
screen display, B-mode single screen is displayed, and

if pressing
again, M-mode single screen is
R(D)
displayed.
Select
MULTI
SINGLE
L(U)
R(D)
MULTI
SINGLE
Select
Fig. 5.3.3-1 SINGLE/MULTI

5.3.4
Moving display position

(1)
Switching over display depth of M-mode image

Display depth of M-mode image may be switched over.
Larger display depth
DEPTH / MAG
Smaller display depth
Fig. 5.3.4-1 Switching Display Depth of M-mode
5-36
Q1E-EA0612
(2)
Moving a view in depth direction

When M-mode image display depth is smaller than that
of B-mode, the position to start display M-mode image
may be moved within the display depth of
B-mode image if selecting
screen with the
TRACKBALL
PRIORITY
on the upper right of
toggle switch.
And press the UNDO key, the travel is returned to 0mm.

Deep
Shallow
Fig. 5.3.4-2 Moving View in Depth Direction of M-mode

5.3.5
Switching electronic focus

Operation is the same as that of the B-mode.
Refer to 5.2.3 Switching over electronic focus.
5.3.6
Freeze of M-mode image

If
pressing
while
displaying the B/M-mode

image, the B-mode image
only can be frozen.
Pressing
returns
image.
B-FREEZE ; OFF
Live
Live
B-FREEZE ; ON
once again
to
real
time
Freeze
Live
Fig. 5.3.6-1 Freeze of M-mode Image
5-37
Q1E-EA0612
5.3.7
Switching over sweep speed

Sweep speed (time for the image
to flow from the right edge to
left edge) can be switched over
in 4 steps of 1.25s~10.0s.
Fast
If
clicking
upward,
sweep
becomes, faster (shorter time)
while clicking downward makes
sweep slower (longer time).
SWEEP
SPEED
Slow
Fig. 5.3.7-1
Scan Speed
5.3.8
MODE DEPENDED menu

Press
MODE
DEPENDED
to switch the function menu at the bottom of
screen to the MODE DEPENDED.

1st page
2nd page
Also when selecting the
automatically selected.
B/M
mode,
this
Menu
is
(1st page)
F5 Image display angle (Width)
F6 Scan line density

Operation is the same as that of B-mode.
Refer to F5 Display angle (Width) and F6 Scan line
density of 5.2.9 MODE DEPENDED menu (1st page).
F7 M blank width
A not displayed area (BLANK AREA) may be provided at
the bottom of M-image to allow ECG waveform and so on
to be easily observed. Also, not displayed area can
be adjusted in 8 steps of 0~7.
NOTICE:This function is not displayed when FREEZE.
5-38
Q1E-EA0612
Fig. 5.3.8-2 Blank Width

(2nd page)
F2 Screen division
Longitudinal
division
display
B-mode
image
is
displayed in the upper screen, and M-mode image is
displayed in the lower screen.
Lateral division display B-mode image is displayed in
the left screen and M-mode image is displayed in the
right screen.
F3 Frame Rate
You can change the frame rate of B image by switching
over this function key.
Fig. 5.3.8-3 Frame Rate

NOTICE:
When you select the frame rate L,

artifact of B image will be reduced.
an

F6 Selecting B color function
5-39
Q1E-EA0612
F7 B color
Operation of these functions is the same as that of
the B-mode.
Refer to 5.2.9 MODE DEPENDED menu (2nd page).
5.3.9
IMAGE PROCESS menu

Pressing
IMAGE
PROCESS
changes the function menu at the bottom of
screen to the IMAGE STATUS menu.

1st page
2nd page
(1st page)
F1 Dynamic range
F2 HI REZ
F3 Enhancement
F4 Dynamic range
F5 Enhancement
F6 Gray Map
F7 Switching over AGC (Automatic gain control)
Functions to adjust image quality of M-image.
Select any step where the image can be most easily viewed.
Contents of the process are the same as those of B-mode.
Refer to 5.2.10 IMAGE PROCESS menu.
Fig.5.3.9-2 Adjusting M-mode Image
5-40
Q1E-EA0612
(2nd page)
F1 Selecting an image subject to control.
Switches over images subject to
control
for
which
various
functions are applied.
1
Fig. 5.3.9-3 Images Subject to Control

F3 Switches over -CURVE
F4 Switches over -coefficient
F5 Center value of S-shape curve
F6 Rejection
F7 Saturation
Operation of these functions is the same as that of
the B-mode.
Refer to 5.2.10 IMAGE PROCESS menu.
5-41
Q1E-EA0612
5.3.10 M MENU of MAIN MENU

When MAIN MENU is displayed
by the
MAIN
MENU
key and M-mode has
started, M MENU can be

selected.
MAIN
MENU
Fig. 5.3.10-1 M MENU

(1)
M BLANK
Provides not displayed area at
the bottom of M-image.
ECG
waveform and so on can be easily
observed.
Refer to 5.3.8 MODE DEPENDED menu.
Fig. 5.3.10-2
M BLANK Menu
(2)
Range Ctrl.
By selecting [B + M], the display
depth of both B and M images can
be controlled at the same time.
By selecting [M], the display
depth of the M image only can be
controlled.
Fig. 5.3.10-3
Range Ctrl. Menu
5-42
Q1E-EA0612
(3)
Split
Switches split format of B/M display.
Refer to 5.3.8 MODE DEPENDED menu.
U/D:
Up/down
layout
L/R:
Left/right
layout
Fig. 5.3.10-4 Split Menu
5-43
Q1E-EA0612
5.3.11 Using ALARA in B/M-mode

When you press the M mode selection key B while the
FREEZE key is switched off, a window for B/M-mode images
details about the format of the window for B/M-mode
images, see 5.3.1 Displaying B/M-mode image. For details
about the possible bio-effects indicated by the MI and
TI, see 4.8.2 Acoustic output indices)

Main Menu.



5-44
Q1E-EA0612

values in B and M modes. Also note that the following
optimize B-mode images and M-mode images.
Focus
Changing the depth of focus or ultrasound

transmit aperture affects the MI, TIS, TIB,
and TIC values.
Ultrasound
output
Changing
the
ultrasound
output
level
Frame rate

angle, scan line density, or display depth
changes. A change in the frame rate affects
the TIS, TIB, and TIC values.
5-45
Q1E-EA0612
5.4
PW Mode
5.4.1
Display of B/PW-mode
If pressing
with Freeze OFF, the B/PW-mode appears.

Mechanical Index
Thermal Index
Doppler
beam
line
flow velocity
in forward direction
(Approaching toward probe)
Velocity marker
Angle bar
Doppler
sampling
gate
flow velocity
in backward direction
(Leaving from probe)
Incident angle
Sample width
Doppler mode gain
Unit
Doppler mode
FFT- value
Doppler frequency (PRF/REF)
Wall filter
Sampling gate depth
Fig. 5.4.1-1 Basic Screen Layout of B/PW-Mode

Beam line in this case is displayed in yellow showing
that it is active. When active, the beam line can be
moved left and right with the trackball.
Also, if switching over the symbol at the upper right
corner of screen with
TRACKBALL
PRIORITY
to select anyone other than
, the beam line changes to blue and inactive.

NOTICE: Set the Doppler sampling gate to the center of
blood vessel as accurate as possible. If it is
set to the part of high brightness, noises may
contaminate the image.
5-46
Q1E-EA0612
5.4.2
Display of Doppler mode from single B mode

As described in 5.4.1, by pressing
key, the Doppler
mode image is directly displayed. The Doppler mode image

can also be displayed from single B mode after setting
Doppler sampling gate.
(1) Press
PW
key in B mode
(2) Set the sampling gate

(3) Press
ENTER
key or
key
COLOR
POSI / SIZE
PW
ENTER
COLOR
POSI / SIZE
B/PW mode
5-47
Q1E-EA0612
5.4.3
Darker
Turn the Doppler gain knob to

adjust overall gain of PW-mode
image.
It
becomes
optimal
gain
automatically
starting HI Support.
5.4.4
Doppler
after
Brighter
Fig. 5.4.3-1
Adjusting Gain
(Brightness)
Adjusting Doppler angle

(1)
When the center of angle

key is pushed, an incident
angle bar is displayed on
Doppler line with an angle
registered in Application.
(Refer
to
Application
function, 8.3.4(2))
Counterclockwise
Clockwise
(1-a) When the angle key

is pushed under a
condition (1), the
incident angle bar
is
displayed
with
the
Angle
at
opposite side across
Doppler beam line.
(1-b) When the angle key
is pushed under the
condition (1-a), the
incident angle bar Fig. 5.4.4-1 Doppler Angle
is erased.
(2)
If an angle encoder is rotated, the incident angle

bar rotates.
So, it is possible to adjust the
incident angle to blood flow direction.
Simultaneous with the change of tilting angle of
incident angle bar a angle display (compensating
angle) shown in right lower position of Doppler
image is also changed.
In case the compensating
angle is set to 0, the indident angle bar is
erased. As shown in the figure the angle is to the
beam line and it is displayed in the range of
0~80.
5-48
Q1E-EA0612
As for the flow velocity, it is large without error when

the angle of the angle bar and the beam line becomes 70
degrees or more.
As caution, the color of angle bar is changed when the angle
becomes 61 degree or more.
5.4.5
Various adjustment functions

The same as those of the M-mode (Refer to 5.3.3~5.3.7).
Single screen display of PW-mode image
Moving display position
Switching over electronic focus
Freezing PW-mode image
Sweep speed
5.4.6
Switching over reference frequencies (REF FREQ)

Depending on probe frequency, two different reference
frequencies (REF) can be selected.
frequency.
High
REF FREQ
Low
Fig.5.4.6-1 Reference Frequency

NOTICE:
5.4.7
Depending on probe, the reference frequency is

fixed.
Moving base line

Shifts Doppler base line(0ms
level) up and down to allow any
waveform displayed shifted up
and down to be easily viewed.
The initial position of base
line can be set in the
application menu.
(Refer to Chapter 8 APPLICATION
Function.)
PW image
BASELINE
Fig. 5.4.7-1
Adjusting BASE LINE
It becomes the optimal baseline

automatically after starting HI
Support.
5-49
Q1E-EA0612
5.4.8
Switching over velocity range (PRF)

Allows repetitive frequency (PRF)
to be switched over in a range of
1~50kHz.
However, allowable range
may
differ
according
to
the
position of sample point.
High
V-SCALE
Low
Click the toggle switch upward to

select higher frequency and make
max detection speed faster.
Fig. 5.4.8-1
Repetitive
Frequency (PRF)
Click the toggle switch downward to

select lower frequency and enlarge
the Doppler image.
It
becomes
automatically
Support.
5.4.9
the
after
optimal
PRF
starting
HI
Loud
Adjusting Doppler sound volume

Doppler sound may be
silence + 15 steps.
switched
in
SOUND VOL
Quiet
Fig. 5.4.9-1
SOUND VOLUME
5.4.10 Oblique function <Exclusive for linear probe>
Doppler of the linear probe, which allows blood flow in
oblique direction to be measured.
Clicking upward swings to the right (+ direction), while
clicking downward swings to the left (- direction).
Single click swings 5 at a time and up to 20 to the
left or right. The Doppler sample beam is rotated
centering around the Doppler sample point.
+
-
OBLIQUE
Fig. 5.4.10-1 Oblique Function
5-50
Q1E-EA0612
5.4.11 Switching over sample gate width

Allows sample gate width to
be switched over.
Can be switched in a range
of 0.5mm (min) ~ 5.0mm in
0.5mm step, while up to 15mm
(max) in 1mm step over the
range above.
Wider
SAMPLE
LENGTH
Narrower
Fig. 5.4.11-1
Sample Gate
5-51
Q1E-EA0612
5.4.12 MODE DEPENDED menu

Pressing
MODE
DEPENDED
bottom of screen to the MODE DEPENDED menu.

1st page
2nd page
Also when selecting the
B/PW-mode,
this
menu
is
(1st page)
F2 Selecting B-mode
image Refresh mode
In B/PW mode there are
two modes, a
simultaneous rewrite
mode in which B-mode
image and PW-mode image
are simultaneously
displayed in real time
and an interval mode in
which B-mode image is
rewritten at a certain
period of time interval.
In addition when PW key
is pushed, B-mode image
is frozen.
If PW key is pushed
again, the freeze of Bmode image is released.
Also it is possible to
change the time interval
with DOP Menu of Main
Menu. (Refer to 5.4.14
in Main Menu.)
5-52
Fig. 5.4.12-2
B-image Refresh Mode
Q1E-EA0612
Starting-up HI Support function.
HI Support is started after clicking the toggle.
Doppler gain, base line shift and PRF are adjusted
automatically, and the optimal quality of image is
displayed according to the image displayed at the
time of a click.
Depending on the images displayed at the time of a click

(for example, image with many noise etc.), HI Support
does not operate or may not be optimized to desired
quality of image.
F4 Switching over polarity display of Doppler mode image

Allows forward/backward of
Doppler display to be
reversed.
If not selected, the upper
screen is the side
approaching to the probe,
while the lower screen is
the side leaving from the
probe.
If selected, the upper
screen is the side leaving
from the probe, while the
lower screen is the side
approaching to the probe.
OFF
ON
Fig. 5.4.12-3
FLOW INVERT
F5 Display angle (Width)

Operation is the same as that in the B-mode and Mmode.
Refer to F5 Display angle (Width) and F6 Scan line
density of 5.2.9 MODE DEPENDED menu (1st page).
5-53
Q1E-EA0612
F7 Oblique invert <Exclusive for linear probe>
Fig. 5.4.12-4 OBLIQUE-FLOW INVERT

Oblique function is effective only when the linear probe
is connected, and selectable only when oblique is
selected (Refer to F4 of this menu (1st page)).
Oblique invert is a function to invert left/right of
Doppler beam tilted.
(2nd page)
F2 Screen division
The operation method is the same as in M mode.
F6 Selecting B-color function
F7 B-color
These operations are the same as those in the Bmode. (Refer to 5.2.9 MODE DEPENDED menu.)
5-54
Q1E-EA0612

Pressing
IMAGE
PROCESS
switches the function menu at the bottom
of screen to the IMAGE PROCESS menu.
1st page
2nd page
(1st page)
F1 Dynamic range
F2 HI REZ
F3 Enhancement
F4 Switching over AGC (Automatic Gain Control)
A function to adjust image quality for the B-mode
image. Operation is the same as that in the B-mode
(Refer to 5.2.10 IMAGE PROCESS menu).
F5 Switching over wall filter
Removes
unnecessary
signals
due to wall motion in order to
display blood flow signal only.
50Hz ~ 1600Hz in 12 steps.

Fig. 5.4.13-2
Wall Filter
F6 Switching over FFT analysis mode
Allows FFT analysis mode
(number of analysis point for
detecting Doppler image) to be
switched over.
When LOW-RESO selected:
Doppler image detection
response speed becomes faster
and Doppler image of better
response may be obtained.
Fig. 5.4.13-3
FFT Analysis Mode
When HI-RESO selected:

Doppler image of high
resolution may be obtained.
5-55
Q1E-EA0612
F7 Switching over FFT-

-curve of Doppler image (FFT) is switched over in 8 steps.
Set it where the image looks
best.
Fig. 5.4.13-4
FFT-
(2nd page)
F1 Selecting screen subject to
control
Switches over screens to be
controlled to which various
function apply.
B/PW
Fig. 5.4.13-5
Screens Subject to
Control
F3 Switching over -CURVE
F4 Switching over -coefficient
F5 Center position of S-shape curve
F6 Rejection
F7 Saturation
Operation of these functions is the

same as those in the B-mode (Refer to
5.2.10 IMAGE PROCESS menu).
5-56
Q1E-EA0612
5.4.14 DOP. MENU of MAIN MENU

DOP.
when
MENU
the
can be selected
MAIN
MENU
is
displayed with the
MAIN
MENU
key
pressed and the PW-mode is

selected.
MAIN
MENU
Fig. 5.4.14-1
DOP. MENU
(1)
B-REFRESH
Rewriting method for B-mode image.
Simult.
:This is to rewrite Bmode

image
and
Doppler-mode image.
Interval
:This is to rewrite Bmode

image
at
a
certain
period
of
time interval.
(Interval mode)
Interval
[Sync. Off]
Interval
[Sync. On]
(2)
:This is one of
interval
modes in which ECG
synchronous function
is not used. (Refer
to 5.4.12 in MODE
DEPENDED menu)
Fig. 5.4.14-2
B-REFRESH Menu
:This mode can be used only

when ECG synchronous function is used.
Rewriting interval of B-mode image is
set based on heart beats frequency.
(Refer to 5.8.3 ECG synchronization)
DOP.Expand
An expanded Doppler image is displayed by clicking
(" checking")
5-57
Q1E-EA0612
(3)
Flow Invert
Click and "check" it to invert doppler image.
(Refer to F4 of 5.4.12.)
(4)
Auto PRF
Click and "check" it to start Auto PRF.
This function starts only when B-Refresh is
Interval and B-image is frozen.
PRF is automatically set for fast blood flow
detection according to the depth of Doppler
sampling gate.
(5)
Set Cursor
By clicking ("checking") , a
Doppler
image
is
displayed
together
with
a
Doppler
tone
output even if the Doppler cursor
is moving
(Refer to 5.2.9 MODE DEPENDED menu)
(6)
Split
Switches over the
spilit format of B/PW
display.
Fig. 5.4.14-3
Set Cursor Menu
L/R : Arranged left and

right
U/D : Arranged
down
up
and
(Refer to 5.4.12
MODE DEPENDED menu)
Fig. 5.4.14-4
Split Menu
5-58
Q1E-EA0612
(7)
Scale
Displays a velocity
scale at the center
of Doppler image.
Fig. 5.4.14-5 Scale
(8)
Unit
Switches over unit of Doppler image.
m/s
cm/s
kHz
Fig. 5.4.14-6 Unit

(9)
Oblique Inv.
Same as in F7 Oblique
Depended menu (1st page)
scan
inversion
in
Mode
(Refer to 5.4.12 MODE DEPENDED menu)
5-59
Q1E-EA0612
5.4.15 Using ALARA in B/PW-mode

When you press the PW mode selection key B while the
FREEZE key is switched off, a window for B/PW-mode
images appears. This window contains the mechanical
index (MI) and thermal index (TI) for the probe you are
using. (For details about the format of the window for
B/PW mode, see 5.4.1 Display of B/PW-mode. For details

Main Menu.



5-60
Q1E-EA0612

values in B and PW modes. Also note that the following
parameters are the main ones that you need to adjust to
optimize B-mode images and Doppler images.
Track Ball
Setting of Track Ball changes the FOCUS

depth
and
transmit
aperture
of
ultrasound, and affects the MI, TIS,
Reference
frequency
Changing
the
reference
frequency
changes the frequency of ultrasound
waves, affecting the MI, TIS, TIB, and
TIC values.
Velocity range
Changing the velocity range changes the

pulse
repetition
frequency
(PRF),
affecting the MI, TIS, TIB, and TIC
values.
Ultrasound
output
Changing the ultrasound output level

affects the MI, TIS, TIB, and TIC
values.
Frame rate

angle, scan line density, or display
depth changes. A change in the frame
rate affects the TIS, TIB, and TIC
values.
Note that changing the sample width does not affect the
MI and TI values.
5-61
Q1E-EA0612
5.5
Steerable CW Mode
(Optional accessory of Steerable CW Doppler unit Model EZU-ST5
is additionally required.)
5.5.1
Display of steerable CW-mode image

With the steerable CW-mode probe connected, steerable
CW-mode image is displayed by the following operation
procedures.
(1)
With Freeze set to OFF, press
to set Doppler
mode.
(2)
Select Steerable CW-mode by pressing
(3)
Pressing
CW
once again freezes B-mode image and
displays CW-mode image.

With Steerable CW-mode selected, every time
is pressed, B-real mode (mode to scan only B-image)
and steerable CW-mode (mode to scan only CW-image)
can be switched over.
B-mode image
CW-mode image
Mechanical Index
Thermal Index
Doppler
beam
line
flow velocity
in forward direction
(Approaching toward probe)
Velocity marker
Angle bar
Doppler
sampling
gate
flow velocity
in backward direction
(Leaving from probe)
Incident angle
Doppler mode gain
Unit
Doppler mode
Doppler frequency (PRF/REF)
FFT- value
Wall filter
Fig. 5.5.1-1 Basic Screen layout of B/CW-Mode
5-62
Q1E-EA0612
The beam line in this mode is shown

indicating that it is in active status.
in
yellow
When it is active, the beam line can be moved left

and right by the trackball.
By changing the symbol at the upper right of the
screen by
TRACKBALL
PRIORITY
and selecting other display than
the beam line is displayed in blue and it cannot be

moved.
NOTICE: Set the Doppler sampling gate at the center
of blood vessel as accurately as possible.
Setting it at the region with high brightness
may cause mixing of noise.
5.5.2
5.5.3
Gain adjustment
The operation procedure is same as
that of PW-mode.
Darker
(Refer to 5.4.3.)
Brighter
Selection of reference frequency (REF FREQ)

With Steerable CW-mode selected, reference frequency
(REF) is fixed.
5.5.4
Adjustment functions
The same adjustment functions as those of PW-mode are
available.
Base line shift
(Refer to 5.4.7.)
Repetition
frequency (PRF)
(Refer to 5.4.8. : Selection

range of PRF n CW-mode is from 4
to 50kHz.)
Adjustment of
Doppler sound
volume
Sweep speed
(Refer to 5.4.9.)
5-63
Q1E-EA0612
5.5.5
MODE DEPENDED menu

Pressing
button substitutes the function menu at the
bottom of the screen with MODE DEPENDED menu.
MODE
DEPENDED
1st page
2nd page
Fig. 5.5.5-1 MODE DEPENDED Menus
-1st page F2 Selects B mode image substitution mode
F4 Selection of polarity display of Doppler-mode image
F5 Display angle (width)
Operation procedures are same as those in PW-mode.
- 2nd page F2 Screen division

F6 Selection B-color function
F7 B-color
These operation procedures are same as those
in B-mode.(Refer to 5.2.9 MODE DEPENDED menu.)
5-64
Q1E-EA0612
5.5.6
IMAGE PROCESS menu

Pressing
button substitutes the function menu at the
bottom of the screen with IMAGE PROCESS menu.
IMAGE
PROCESS
1st page
2nd page
-1st page F1 Dynamic range
F2 HI REZ
F3 Enhancement
F4 Selection of AGC (Auto Gain correction)
Image quality adjustment
function for B-mode image.
The operation procedures are
same as those in B-mode.
(Refer to 5.2.10 IMAGE
PROCESS menu.)
F5 Selection of wall filter
F6 Selection of FFT analysis mode
F7 Selection of FFT-

same as those in PW-mode.
-2nd page F1 Selection of screen to be controlled

The screen to be controlled
for
execution
of
various
functions are selected.
F3 Selection of -Curve
F4 Selection of -coefficient
F5 Value at center point of S-Curve
F6 Rejection
F7 Saturation

same as those in B-mode.
(Refer
to
5.2.10
IMAGE
PROCESS menu.)
5-65
Q1E-EA0612
5.5.7
Dop. Menu of Main Menu

By
MAIN
MENU
displaying
key,
Main
Dop.
Menu
Menu
by
can
be
selected when Steerable CWmode is opened.

MAIN
MENU
Fig. 5.5.7-1 Dop. Menu

For Main Menu for modes other than Doppler-mode, refer
to Paragraph 5.4.14 DOP. MENU of MAIN MENU.
With Steerable CW-mode selected, the following items in
Dop. Menu are disabled.
B-Refresh
Dop. Expand
Auto PRF
Set Cursor
Oblique Inv.
5-66
Q1E-EA0612
5.5.8

When you press the CW mode selection key B while the
FREEZE key is switched off, a window for B/CW-mode
images appears. This window contains the mechanical
index (MI) and thermal index (TI) for the probe you are
using. (For details about the format of the window for
B/CW-mode images, see 5.5.1 Display of steerable CW-mode
image. For details about the possible bio-effects
indicated by the MI and TI, see 4.8.2 Acoustic output
indices)

Main Menu.



5-67
Q1E-EA0612

values in B and CW modes. Also note that the following
parameters are the main ones that you need to adjust to
optimize B-mode images and Doppler images.
Track Ball

depth and transmit aperture of ultrasound,
and affects the MI, TIS, TIB, and TIC
values.
Ultrasound
output
Changing
the
ultrasound
output
level
Note that changing the PRF (velocity range) does not

affect the MI and TI values.
5-68
Q1E-EA0612
5.6
Single Element CW-Mode

(Optional accessory of Steerable CW Doppler unit Model EZU-ST5
or
Single
Element
CW
Doppler
unit
Model
EZU-CW4
is
additionally required.)
5.6.1
Displaying single element CW-mode image

This function is effected only when connecting the
Continuous Doppler probe EUP-TC3 or exclusive probes
similar to that.
Operation of the single element CW-mode is the same as
that of the B/PW-mode except the following three points:
(1)
Simultaneous mode is not selectable.
(2)
Reference frequency (REF) cannot be switched over.
(3)
Selectable range of repetitive frequency (PRF) is

4k~50kHz.
(a)
Connecting the probe

Connect EUP-TC3 or any exclusive probe similar
to that with the exclusive receptacle located
at the lower right of main unit.
Receptacle of single element
probe is located here
Fig. 5.6.1-1 Single Element Probe Receptacle

NOTICE: When the single element probe is connected,
there may be cases where it cannot be recognized
by the ultrasound scanner. In such case,
disconnect the single element probe and connect
it again.
5-69
Q1E-EA0612
(b)
Starting CW-mode
Simply press
PROBE
to start the probe menu and
select TC3 to start the CW-mode.
Fig. 5.6.1-2 Probe Menu
Max. detectable flow speed

infoward direction
Thermal Index
Mechanical Index
CW image
Wall filter
Max. detectable
FFT- value
flow speed
backward direction
Doppler mode
frequency(PRF REF)
Unit
Doppler mode gain
Incident angle
Fig. 5.6.1-3 Basic Screen Layout of single element CW Mode
5-70
Q1E-EA0612
5.6.2

Turn the Doppler gain knob to
adjust overall gain of CW-mode
image.
It becomes optimal
gain
automatically
starting HI Support.
5.6.3
Doppler
after
Darker
Brighter
Fig. 5.6.2-1
Gain (Brightness)
Adjustment

These are the same as those in PW-mode.
Moving Base line (Refer to 5.4.7).
Repetitive frequency (PRF) (Refer to 5.4.8).
Adjusting of Doppler sound volume (Refer to 5.4.9).
Sweep speed.
5.6.4
MODE DEPENDED menu

Pressing
MODE
DEPENDED
of screen to the MODE DEPENDED menu.

1st page
2nd page
(1st page)
F4 Switching over Doppler mode polarity display
Operation of these functions is the same as that in
PW-mode.
(2nd page)
F6 Selecting B-color function
F7 B-color
Operation of these functions is the same as that in
the B mode.
5-71
Q1E-EA0612
5.6.5
IMAGE PROCESS menu

Pressing
IMAGE
PROCESS
of screen to the IMAGE PROCESS menu.

1st page
2nd page
Fig. 5.6.5-1 IMAGE PROCESS menu
(1st page)
F5 Switching over the wall filter
F6 Switching over FFT analysis mode
F7 Switching over FFT-
Operation of these functions

is the same as that in the
PW mode.
(2nd page)
F1 Selecting image subject to control
Switches images subject to
control
to
which
various
functions apply.
F3 Switching over -CURVE
F4 Switching over -Coefficient
F5 Center position of S-shape curve
F6 Rejection
F7 Saturation
Operation of these functions

is the same as that in the B
mode.
5-72
Q1E-EA0612
5.6.6
Dop. MENU of MAIN MENU

Dop.
MENU
may
be
displayed with the
selected
MAIN
MENU
when
the
MAIN
MENU
is
key pressed and the CW mode runs.
This function is the same as that of the PW mode.

to 5.4.14.
Refer
In Single Element CW mode, the following functions in

Dop. MENU are disabled.
B-Refresh
Dop. Expand
Auto PRF
5.6.7
Set Cursor
Split
Oblique Inv.
Using ALARA in CW-Mode

Refer to 5.5.8 Using ALARA in CW-mode.
5-73
Q1E-EA0612
5.7
CFM Mode
Mainly displays blood flow information by color display.
This equipment is provided with two types of CFM-mode of CFI
(Color Flow Image) indicating flow velocity and CFA (Color Flow
Angio) showing blood flow power.
5.7.1
Displaying CFM-mode image

(1)
CFI image
Pressing
with
CFI
Freeze
OFF
displays
the
CFA
B/CFM-mode.
Thermal Index
Mechanical Index
B-mode color MAX. detective flow

velocity in positive direction
Color scale
B-mode color MAX. detective flow
velocity in negative direction
CFM ROI
Smoothing
Packet size
Motion archfact
Suppression level
CFM filter
Persistence
Velocity variance
CFM gain
CFM mode frequency (PRF/REF)
Fig. 5.7.1-1 Basic Screen layout of CFM mode
When starting the equipment, CFI is displayed.
By
pressing
b)
,
CFI
the
following
either
a)
or
CFA
behavior is executed.
a) CFI is switched to CFA.
b) CFM mode is off and B mode is selected.
In the Application setting menu, the selection from
a), b) can be set. (Refer to "8.3.5 CFM-Mode Menu")
5-74
Q1E-EA0612
(2)
CFA image
In CFA, subject for display changes to the power of
Doppler signal.
Color map is changed and flow velocity is removed.
Fig. 5.7.1-2 CFA Image

(3)
Using together with the other mode

Both CFI and CFA may be simultaneously displayed
together with M image and PW image.
PW
MAX. detective
flow velocity on
M-mode image
Fig. 5.7.1-3
CFI-M Basic Screen Layout
5-75
Fig. 5.7.1-4
CFI-PW Basic Screen Layout
Q1E-EA0612
5.7.2
Setting COLOR BOX range

Adjusts the size and position of COLOR BOX (Region Of
Interest) for displaying the CFM image.
(1)
Switching over trackball priority
Use the
TRACKBALL
PRIORITY
toggle
switch to turn the

trackball
TRACKBALL
PRIORITY
priority display
to
Fig. 5.7.2-1
Switching Trackball
Priority
(2)
Moving position
Moving the trackball
moves the COLOR BOX
frame.
For
the
sector
or
convex type, moving
upward narrows width
and moving downward
widens it.
Fig. 5.7.2-2
Moving COLOR BOX
Position
5-76
Q1E-EA0612
(3)
Setting range
Pressing the ENTER key
displays "" at the
lower right of COLOR
BOX.
ENTER
COLOR
POSI / SIZE
This "" indicates the

position of trackball.
Moving the trackball
widens (narrows) the
COLOR BOX frame
left/right and up/down.
If the color box range

is determined, press the
ENTER key again or wait
for about 5 seconds
without touching track
ball. "" disappears
ENTER
COLOR
POSI / SIZE
Fig. 5.7.2-3 Setting

COLOR BOX Range
and returns to the state

of (1) Moving position.
(4)
Ending setting
Move
the
TRACKBALL
PRIORITY
toggle
to
priority to that other than
5-77
switch
the
trackball
Q1E-EA0612
5.7.3
Sampling gate moves depending on the color ROI

In Application menu(D menu 3), if CFM ROI "Move Together
with Sample point" is set to ON, the Doppler sampling
gate is automatically moved when color ROI is manually
moved.
(For details
Chapter 8)
of
the
application
function,
refer
to
ROI is moved to right.
Fig.5.7.3-1 Sampling gate moves depending on

the color ROI
5.7.4
Adjusting gain (Brightness)

Darker
Turn the CFM gain knob to adjust

the overall gain of CFM-mode image.
Brighter
CFI
CFA
Fig. 5.7.4-1
Adjusting Gain
(Brightness)
5.7.5

The same as those of each mode.
Adjusting gain (Refer to 5.2.2, 5.3.2 and 5.4.3)
Moving display position (Refer to 5.2.6)
Switching over electronic focus (Refer to 5.2.3)
Switching over screen display (Refer to 5.3.3)
Switching over PRF (Refer to 5.4.8)
5-78
Q1E-EA0612
5.7.6
Reference frequency (REF FREQ)

According to frequency of the probe, two types
different reference frequency (REF) can be selected.
of

frequency.
High
REF FREQ
Low
Fig.5.7.6-1 Reference Frequency

NOTICE:
5.7.7
Depending on probe, the reference frequency is

fixed.
Velocity Range (PRF)

Switches over PRF. <Common to CFI and CFA>
For CFM-PW, PRF
switched over.
of
both
modes
is
Up
If clicking the toggle switch upward,

high frequency is selected and the max
detection velocity becomes larger.
If clicking the toggle switch downward,
low frequency is selected and Doppler
image is enlarged.
5-79
V-SCALE
(PRF)
Down
Fig. 5.7.71
Velocity Range
Q1E-EA0612
5.7.8
Baseline
The baseline (line of velocity 0) is shifted in the
upward/downward direction by operating
key.
BASELINE
(1)
When CFI image is displayed

The baseline of color scale is shifted by operating
key in CFI mode.
BASELINE
Baseline
(0 cm/s)
BASELINE
Baseline
(0 cm/s)
Baseline
(0 cm/s)
Fig. 5.7.8-1
(2)
When Doppler image is displayed

The baseline of Doppler image is shifted by
operating
key in Doppler mode.

BASELINE
Baseline
(0 cm/s)
Baseline
(0 cm/s)
BASELINE
Baseline
(0 cm/s)
Fig. 5.7.8-2
5-80
Q1E-EA0612
5.7.9
Oblique <Exclusive for linear probes>

(1)
CFM
Allows the deep region to be widely examined by
tilting COLOR BOX to the left and right.
OBLIQUE
Fig. 5.7.9-1 CFM Oblique

(2)
CFM-M
CFM COLOR BOX is tilted.
At this time, Flow Invert may be effected
M
CFM ROI
M Beam Line
Fig. 5.7.9-2 Oblique

(3)
CFM-D
CFM COLOR BOX is tilted as well as Doppler beam
line (D Beam Line).
This function may also be operated with "Left
arrow" and "Right arrow" keys of the alphanumeric
keyboard.
PW
OBLIQUE
CFM ROI
D Beam Line
Fig. 5.7.9-3 Oblique Function
5-81
Q1E-EA0612
5.7.10 MODE DEPENDED menu

Pressing
MODE
DEPENDED
of screen to the MODE DEPENDED menu.

(1)
CFM-B mode
1st page
2nd page
Also, when selecting the CFM-B mode, this menu is
(1st page)
F2 Dual CFM
Depict two CFM images and use two types of color
scale to compare them.
Switch over the color scale in the MAIN MENU (Refer
to 5.7.12).
Fig. 5.7.10-2 Dual CFM
5-82
Q1E-EA0612
F3 Color map
Switches variation of color scale.
(I)
CFI: When selecting CARDIAC region

When selecting CARDIAC in the
APPLICATION menu, operate as follows;
Fig. 5.7.10-3
Color Map
(a) Velocity - Velocity variance (Color Map 1 to 4)
The
direction
of
blood
and
velocity
is
displayed in brightness of red and blue, and
add in brightness of green, light blue and
yellow in the place of velocity variance.
Red, Yellow:
Blood flow in the normal direction
Red is small velocity variance.
Yellow is large velocity variance.
Blue, Green:
Blood flow in the reverse direction
Blue is small velocity variance.
Green is large velocity variance.
Blue, Light blue:
Light blue is large velocity variance.
5-83
Q1E-EA0612
(b) Velocity (Color Map 5 to 7)

The direction of blood and difference of
velocity is displayed in contrast of variation.
Red, Yellow:
Red is lately velocity.
Yellow (or white) is fast velocity.
Blue, Light blue:
Blue is lately velocity.
Light blue (or white) is fast velocity.
(c) Velocity variance (Color Map 8)
The size of and velocity variance is displayed
in brightness of yellow.
Yellow: Part of confused blood flow
Brightness: Size of velocity variance
(II) CFI: When selecting other region

When selecting CFI except in
CARDIAC;
(a)
Velocity (Color Map 1 to 7)

Red, Yellow:
Red is lately velocity.
Yellow (or white) is fast velocity.
Blue, Light blue:
Blue is lately velocity.
Light blue (or white) is fast velocity.
5-84
Q1E-EA0612
(b) Velocity - Velocity variance (Color Map 8)

The
direction
of
blood
and
velocity
is
displayed in brightness of red and blue, and
add in brightness of green and yellow in the
place of velocity variance.
Red, Yellow:
Red is small velocity variance.
Yellow is large velocity variance.
Blue, Green:
Green is large velocity variance.
(III)
CFA: When selecting CFA;
Color flow angio;

Displays power information of blood flow for
using brightness and variation of contrast
F4 Flow Invert (For CFM)

Inverts color map.
Fig. 5.7.10-4
Flow Invert (For CFM)
5-85
Q1E-EA0612
Operation is the same as

that in the B-mode and Mmode.
Refer to F6 Scan line
density of 5.2.9 MODE
DEPENDED menu (1st page)
F7 Oblique invert <Exclusive for linear probes>

The oblique function is effected only when connecting
the linear probe, and this function is available only
when selecting the oblique function (Refer to F4 of Main
Menu (2nd page)).
As well as 5.4.10 (Oblique Invert of Doppler), switched
as shown below in CFM.
Color scale is inverted

4
Fig. 5.7.10-5 Oblique-Flow Invert (CFM)
5-86
Q1E-EA0612
(2nd page)
F1 Peak Hold
F2 Switching over CFM refresh interval (Only for PEAK
HOLD operation)
Displays an image which part of high brightness
remains by stopping refresh in CFM COLOR BOX for
specified time (interval).
If starting PEAK HOLD, F2 toggle becomes refresh
interval selection allowing it to be switched over
1 ~ 8 sec and eternity (no refresh). Also, when
starting SYNC, it is refreshed by heartbeat. (Refer
to PEAK HOLD of 5.7.12 CFM MENU of MAIN MENU).
(SYNC ON)
1
Fig. 5.7.10-6 PEAK HOLD

F2 Fixed-B
Displays B image as it was
designated in B-mode
regardless of width of CFM
image.
Frame rate is lowered as the
screen is widened, but the
image can be viewed as a
whole.
Fig. 5.7.10-7 Fixed B
5-87
Q1E-EA0612
F3 Biplane Refer to B Biplane of 5.2.9 MODE DEPENDED

menu (1st page).
F4 Lateral inversion of image
The operation is the same as that in
mode.(Refer to 5.2.9 MODE DEPENDED menu.)
the
B-
F6 CFI/CFA selection
F7 CFM Preference
CFM image and B mode image are
displayed overlaid on the same
screen. This function
switches display preference of
two mode in 16 steps.
Current CFM Preference setting
is displayed in a green line
on the gray scale at the left
side of screen.
For the gray scale exceeding
the position of green line in
COLOR BOX range (within the
broken line on the screen) the
B image is displayed, while
the color image is displayed
for the part below the green
line.
Green
line
BW image
Green
line
7
CFM image
Green line
Fig. 5.7.10-8
CFM Preference
As
CFM
Preference
No
is
smaller,
the
B
image
is
brighter, and as No is larger,
CFM becomes brighter.
NOTICE: This function may also be switched over in the MAIN
MENU.
If the setting is "Auto", it cannot be
switched over (Refer to 5.7.12 CFM MENU of MAIN
MENU).
5-88
Q1E-EA0612
(2)
CFM-M mode
page1
page2
(1st page)
F2 Selecting B mode refresh mode
The
CFM-M-mode
includes
the
simultaneous mode in which CFM
image (B-CFM) and M image are
displayed, and the mode that
normally depicts a CFM image
only.
1
Further pressing the

switch
activates
B
allowing
these
modes
switched over.
mode
freeze
to
be
Fig. 5.7.10-10 B-image Refresh Mode(CFM-M)

F3 Switching over color map
Refer to 5.7.10 (1) CFM-B mode (1st page)
F4 Flow Invert
Refer to 5.7.10 (1) CFM-B mode (1st page)
F5 M blank width
Refer to 5.3.8 MODE DEPENDED mode (1st page)
F6 Switching over line density
Refer to 5.2.9 MODE DEPENDED mode (1st page)
(2nd page)
F2 Screen division
Refer to 5.7.10 (1) CFM-B mode (2nd page)
5-89
Q1E-EA0612
(3)
CFM-D mode
page1
page2
Fig. 5.7.10-11 MODE DEPENDED Mode
(1st page)
The same as those of CFM-B mode and CFM-M mode.
F2 Simult
The CFM-D mode includes the
simultaneous mode in which CFM
image (B-CFM) and a D image is
displayed, and the mode that
normally depicts a CFM image
only.
Further pressing the PW mode

switch
activates
B
freeze
allowing
these
modes
to
be
switched over.
Fig. 5.7.10-12 B Image Refresh Mode (CFM-D)
(2nd page)
F2 Screen division
5-90
Q1E-EA0612

Pressing
IMAGE
PROCESS
bottom of screen to the IMAGE PROCESS menu.

(1)
CFM-B/CFM-M
page1
page2
Fig. 5.7.11-1 IMAGE PROCESS Menu (CFM-B/CFM-M)

F1 CFM filter
Switches
over
the
color
filter for CFM in 3 steps of
L, M and H.
Fig. 5.7.11-2
CFM Filter
F2 Function to remove body motion
Reduces an effect from body
motion
and
improves
color
display performance. Effect of
removing body motion can be
switched
over
in
4
steps
according to intensity of body
motion.
It becomes larger in
the order of 0-1-2-3.
Fig. 5.7.11-3
A. SUPPRESS
F3 Switching Packet size

Every time selecting "PACKET",
it is switched over in 3 steps
of L, M and S.
Varies frame rate in CFM-mode.
Fig. 5.7.11-4 Packet
L :
Frame rate decreases but a CFM image of higher

quality is obtained.
M :
Usually set this level for use.
S :
Frame rate increases allowing a better real

time CFM image to be obtained but image quality
becomes a little bit worse.
5-91
Q1E-EA0612
F4 Switching over CFM interpolation level

Applies the interpolation
process to CFM image to display
CFM images of better
continuity. Interpolation
level is divided into 3 levels.
Fig. 5.7.11-5 Smooth

F5 Switching over persistence
Applies the correlation process
to CFM image to display CFM
images of better continuity.
Correlation level is divided
into 8 levels of 0~7.
Fig. 5.7.11-6
Persistence
F6 Switching over velocity variance
Allows the grade of displaying
velocity variance to be
selected in 8 steps of 1~8.
Fig. 5.7.11-7
Velocity Variance
(2nd page)
F1 Selecting screen subject to control
Switches over the screen
subject to control to which
various functions apply.
In the CFM-B-mode, the
screen subject to control
may be switched over the
whole B image or inside
COLOR BOX of CFM image.
In the dual CFM screen
mode, the whole B image
and left and right CFM
images are switched over
individually.
CFM-B
CFM dual screen
CFM-PW
CFM-M screen
If adding screens as CFMPW-mode and CFM-M-PW-mode

and so on, screens that
can
be
switched
Fig. 5.7.11-8
automatically increase.
Screen Subject to Control
5-92
Q1E-EA0612
F2 Selecting Velocity Tagging

Allows any specific level
of
color
scale
to
be
extracted for obtaining a
CFM image.
Also, F3~F5 can not be
selected unless selecting
F2.
Fig. 5.7.11-9
Velocity Tagging
F3 Switching over lower limit
F4 Switching over upper limit
Switches the upper and lower limits of tagging.
F5 Moving tagging width in parallel
Allows entire range of tagging to be moved up/down.
Setting
level.
of
F3~F5
moves
if
moving
the
CFM
zero
F6 Rejection
Sets a region rejected equally above and below the
CFM base line.
5-93
Q1E-EA0612
5.7.12 CFM MENU of MAIN MENU

CFM MENU can be selected when
displaying the MAIN MENU with
the
MAIN
MENU
key pressed and CFM
mode has started.

MAIN
MENU
Fig. 5.7.12-1 CFM MENU

(1)
Scan Density (CFM)

Switches over scan density of
the CFM image in 4 steps.
Fig. 5.7.12-2
Scan Density
(2)
B-Refresh
Switches over the screen mode of CFM.
By clicking ("checking") , both B
images are refreshed at the same time.
(3)
and
Doppler
Flow Invert
Click and "check" it to invert
Doppler detection (Refer to 5.4.12).
5-94
direction
of
Q1E-EA0612
(4)
Color Map
Switches over Color Map.
(Selectable items are
automatically switched over
according to the mode.)
Fig. 5.7.12-3
Color Map
(5)
Dual CFM
Click and "check"
start Dual CFM .
it
to
Also this allows Color Map of

left and right CFM images to
be set independently.
Move the cursor to "
" and
click it to display a list of
Map that can be currently
selected.
Fig. 5.7.12-4 Dual CFM
When CFI, don't use the following combination.
Color Map Region is Cardiac: Map1-4,8 and Map5-7
Color Map Region is Others: Map1-7 and Map8
(6)
Fixed-B
Click for "Checking", then B-mode image is
displayed with the width as designated in B mode
setting regardless the width of CFM image.
5-95
Q1E-EA0612
(7)
COLOR ROI
Switches over the shape of
COLOR ROI
Fig. 5.7.12-5
COLOR ROI
(8)
Peak Hold
Stops refreshing the image
for predetermined time and
leaves spots of high
brightness. Click and
"check" it to execute Peak
Hold.
Temporal refresh
(In Sync Off):ECG OFF
1s ~ 8s: Refreshes the
image every predetermined
time.
No refresh.
Heartbeat refresh
(In Sync On):ECG ON
1 beat ~ 8 beat:
Refreshes every beat.
No refresh.
Fig. 5.7.12-6
Peak Hold
5-96
Q1E-EA0612
(9)
CFM Pref.
Switches over display
reference of B image and CFM
image.
If selecting Auto mode, this
operation is disabled on the
function menu.
Fig. 5.7.12-7
CFM Pref.
(10) Marker
Click and "check" it to display the COLOR ROI
frame of CFM image.
Fig. 5.7.12-8 Marker

(11) Color Scale
Click for "checking" then COLOR SCALE display.
(12) Unit
Switches the unit system of Doppler image (Refer to
5.4.14).
(13) Oblique Inv.
The direction of an oblique scanning is inverted.
5-97
Q1E-EA0612
5.7.13 Using ALARA in CFM mode

When you press the CFM mode selection key B while the
FREEZE key is switched off, a window for CFM-mode images
details about the format of the window for CFM-mode
images, see 5.7.1 Displaying CFM-mode image. For details

Main Menu.



5-98
Q1E-EA0612

values in B and CFM modes. Also note that the following
optimize B-mode images and CFM-mode images.
Track Ball

depth
and
transmit
aperture
of
Reference
frequency
Changing
the
reference
frequency
TIC values.
Ultrasound
output

values.
Frame rate

values.
Note that changing the gain for CFM-mode images does not
affect the MI and TI values.
5-99
Q1E-EA0612
5.7.14 Using ALARA in CFM mode with/M and/PW modes

Each window for CFM-B/M mode and CFM-PW mode contains
the mechanical index (MI) and thermal index (TI) for the
probe you are using. (For details about the format of
the window for CFM-mode images, see 5.7.1 Displaying
CFM-mode image. For details about the possible bioeffects indicated by the MI and TI, see 4.8.2 Acoustic
output indices)

Main Menu.



5-100
Q1E-EA0612

values in the B, CFM, PW, and M modes. Also note that
the following parameters are the main ones you need to
adjust to optimize B-, CFM-, PW-, and M-mode images.
Track Ball

depth
and
transmit
aperture
of
Reference
frequency
Changing
the
reference
frequency
TIC values.
Ultrasound
output

values.
Frame rate

values.
Note that changing the gain for CFM-mode images or

Doppler sampling gates does not affect the MI and TI
values.
5-101
Q1E-EA0612
5.8
ECG Function
(Optional accessory of Biomedical waveform display unit Model
EZU-EK25 is additionally required.)
5.8.1
Connecting cords
(1)
Connecting with main unit

Securely connect the ECG cord on the side of
keyboard support frame located at the right side of
main unit.
ECG connector
ECG connector is the defibrillator-roof TYPE BF APPLIED PART.

Dont contact the electrode of TYPE BF APPLIED PART to earth
(ground).
Fig. 5.8.1-1 Connector Layout
(2)
Attaching the ECG cord to human body

*1) Before attach the ECG cord to human body, check
the each function of ECG referring to 5.8.4.
*2) When using the defibrillator, dont touch the
patient.
After checking if the ECG induction cord is
connected with the main unit, apply jelly for
ECG clip to the electrode inside the clip and
use the second induction (refer to the figure
to the left) to mount it on the patient.
Each electrode terminal is discriminated with
the color of the terminal at the end of the ECG
induction cord. Attach a provided clip to the
terminal and clip the terminal to the specified
section.
5-102
Q1E-EA0612
Red (R)
- Right hand
Black (F)
- Right foot
Green (LF) - Left foot
Fig. 5.8.1-2 Attaching ECG Cable

5.8.2
Displaying physiological signal waveform

Pressing
PHYSIO
key displays the selectable option menu
(Base menu). (Fig. 5.8.2-1)
(1st page)
(2nd page)
Fig. 5.8.2-1 Physio Menu
The optional function Base menu can be restored by F7
Function button on Page 2.
It is also possible to make the default setting on the
application menu so that Physio menu (refer to
8.3.10(2)) is directly displayed by switching over
APPLICATION. (Refer to Fig. 5.8.2-1.)
By selecting F5 ECG on page 1
related function can be selected.
5-103
of
Physio
menu,
the
Q1E-EA0612
(1)
Waveform display (F5 of 1st page)

If turning the
toggle switch of function menu

5
(1st page) ON (highlighted), physiological signal

waveform appears on the screen in green.
ECG WAVE FORM
Fig. 5.8.2-2 Starting ECG

In displaying the ECG waveform, if the system
recognizes
ECG
waveform,
auto
measurement
of
heartbeat is displayed at the upper right.
When recording mode of ECG sync or image memory is
the continuous recording heartbeat auto detection
mode, R-wave on the ECG waveform needs to be
recognized.
When the R-wave is recognized, the trigger mark at
the right side of screen flickers.
Fig. 5.8.2-3 Trigger Mark and Beat Display
5-104
Q1E-EA0612
(2)
Adjusting position of waveform (POSITION: Adjusting

height)
Allows the
toggle switch
7
of function menu (1st page)

to adjust vertical position
of waveform display.
Fig. 5.8.2-4
Adjusting Display Position
(3)
Switching over sweep speed

Refer to 5.3.7
over sweep speed.
Switching
SWEEP
SPEED
Fig. 5.8.2-5
Switching over Scan Speed
(4)
Adjusting amplitude of waveform (GAIN)

Allows
toggle
the
6
switch of function menu

(1st page) to adjust
amplitude of waveform
in a range of 0 ~ 30.
6
Fig. 5.8.2-6
Adjusting Amplitude of
Waveform
5-105
Q1E-EA0612
(5)
Up/Down Reversal of ECG waveform

Allows
the
toggle
1
switch of function menu

(2nd page) to invert
the display of waveform.
1
Fig.5.8.2-7
Up/Down Reversal of ECG
Waveform
5.8.3
ECG synchronization (ECG SYNC)

Applying ECG SYNC while ECG is activated, B-mode image
is refreshed in a timing of any phase from the R-wave
and Freeze image is displayed switched intermittently.
With the R-wave as a starting point, Freeze image is
rewritten after a predetermined time (Delay Time). This
allows any beat related region to be easily observed at
a specific phase.
(1)
Single synchronization
This function starts only either one of two SYNC
functions.
It rewrites the image at
heartbeat and displays it.
any
time
within
When you start Single Synchronization, the SYNC-bar

appears over the ECG waveform. This bar indicates
when the sync image is re-written.
5-106
Q1E-EA0612
Delay Time
SYNC image
R-wave
Trigger
Mark
SYNC-bar
R-wave
Fig. 5.8.3-1 ECG SYNC Basic Screen Layout

Clicking the
toggle switch of
1
function menu (1st page)

starts SYNC1, highlights the menu
and allows the B image to be
switched intermittently.
Fig.5.8.3-2
Also, delay time display is added

to the upper right corner.
It
shows
that
the
image
is
rewritten after this delay time
from the R-wave.
Also
the
toggle
switch
(1st
page) starts SYNC2.

Function is completely the same as
that of SYNC1.
Fig.5.8.3-3
SYNC Switch
5-107
Q1E-EA0612
(2)
Delay time setting

and
2
of the function
4
menu
(1st page) switch over
delay time settings of
SYNC1
and
SYNC2
respectively.
Either
of
delay-time
point.
these
shows
from
the
R
(This function is common

to dual sync.)
Fig. 5.8.3-4
Delay Time
In dual sync, when two ECG synchronizations are
occurred during one image scan, a message as shown
in the left picture is displayed. In that case
change the delay time.
Fig.5.8.3-5 Confirmation
(3)
Dual synchronization (Dual SYNC)

Dual SYNC obtains SYNC images at two timing points
utilizing two SYNC systems. If starting dual SYNC,
two vertical lines appear on ECG waveform. These
show
rewrite
timing
of
SYNC
image
and
are
recognized by temporal positions. (only B mode
single image)
R(D)
T1/T2
T1/T2
SYNC1
T1
SYNC2
T1
T2
T2
L(U)
Fig. 5.8.3-6 Dual SYNC
5-108
Q1E-EA0612
If ECG waveform has started, pressing the
toggle
switch
(2nd page) starts Dual SYNC.
Image display mode at that time
screen currently selected (L, R).
depends
on
the
As for R-wave delay time, set delay time by using

the
the
and
toggle
toggle keys (1st page).

(2nd
page)
again,
If pressing
Dual
SYNC
is
terminated.
(4)
Using together with the other mode

B-mode single SYNC may be used together with any
other mode.
Sync timing is displayed as a vertical bright line
on the PW or M-mode image.
Setting of B/M and B/D is the same as that of Bmode; however, Dual SYNC is not available.
Sync
Line
SYNC-B
Timing
M Image
ECG wave
Fig. 5.8.3-7 ECG in B/M Image
5-109
Q1E-EA0612
5.8.4
ECG MENU of MAIN MENU

Press
display
the
MAIN MENU then select

Physiology menu.
the
MAIN
MENU
to
MAIN
MENU
Fig. 5.8.4-1 MAIN MENU

(1)
Setting ECG
Switches over 2-step setting of
L/H of HPF (DC variation filter)
for ECG.
Fig. 5.8.4-2
Setting ECG
5-110
Q1E-EA0612
5.9
Needle Guide Line

Pressing
GUIDE
displays the needle guide line in a dot line.
Guide Line
Fig. 5.9-1 Guide Line for Convex Probe

1) Displaying the needle guideline needs probes to be
registered individually.
Order the installation agent for registration of needle
guideline.
2) When ZOOM key is pushed during the display of a needle
guideline, it is not concerned with a setup of the zoom
function, the usual zoom function is performed. (HI zoom
function cannot be used.)
3) When HI zoom function is performed on the freezing side
screen and the needle guideline is displayed on the real
side screen in B-mode image 2 screen display, ZOOM key
cannot be used.
4) At the time of biopsy guideline un-displaying, when the zoom
function is carried out first and the biopsy guideline is
displayed next, a zoom function is canceled automatically.
5) Displaying the guideline gives a guide of direction.
Be sure to perform biopsy operation while confirming the
actual position of needle on the ultrasound image.
6) The start point of the dot line is not body surface. Do not
use the dot line as biopsy distance.
7) Refer to the instruction manual of each probe for attaching
the needle and support bracket to the probe.
5-111
Q1E-EA0612
The needle guideline differs depending on the probe used.

Display data needs to be registered in advance.
If selecting the probe already registered, the
GUIDE
lights half
displayed.
may
indicating
that
the
guideline
key
be
Also, the probe which needle angle can be switched over

and the adapter for probe are available.
In such case, turn the periphery of
knob to switch
over angle.
NOTICE: In case you want to display a biopsy needle guide

line, perform it as much as possible under a
single image display mode.
When the biopsy operation is performed, please set
up a zoom position and a view so that a needle
guideline does not disappear from a screen.
5-112
Q1E-EA0612
-POST SCRIPT-
In case of using EUP-U533 with Brachystepper manufactured by

Barzell-Whitemore Maroon Bells, Inc., EUB-5500 can show the
following needle guide template grid display when biopsy guide
line is registered, the convex array of the EUP-U533 is
activated, and "GUIDE" key is pressed.
-
The needle guide template is a 1313 grid (shown in Figure

below) with needle slots displayed at 5-mm intervals in
the vertical and horizontal axis.
Coordinate values labeled from A to G (the center is D)

are displayed at the top of the template with a pitch of
1mm.
No readjustment of the grid is necessary if the image is

inverted top/bottom, or right/left.
The template display can be adjusted in 1-mm increments in

the vertical direction and 1-degree increments in the
lateral (rotational) direction.
This function is meant for use only as a guide. Hitachi

Medical Corporation makes no claim, not accepts liability
for, products manufactured by other companies used in
conjunction with EUB-5500.
5-113
Q1E-EA0612
1) There are several needle gauge sizes used for the

brachytherapy procedure. The different needle gauges have
different diameters.
In order to accommodate the
different needle diameters the stepper/needle guide
template hardware may have template needle guide slot
diameters larger than the needle slot represented by the
software. This results in "needle play" in the stepper
template and may cause an alignment problem with the
needle guide template software display in the range of 1
to 1.2 mm. To avoid this potential problem use needles
with diameter of 1 to 1.2-mm. Do not use needles outside
of this range.
2) It is necessary to register data for the grid display
beforehand. Please request the registration of data to
service personnel of the system.
3) It is necessary to display the grid by the following
methods, and to decide the position by EUP-U533,
Brachystepper, needles and a needle grid before treating
the brachytherapy.
Fix the probe correctly to Brachystepper.
Display the image on the convex side and the method of
displaying the image (left/right reversal and up/down
reversal) is matched to the state to use it.
Push GUIDE key
Match the position of Brachystepper's horizontal

movement stand to scale "60".
Put in the probe in the tank of the physiological
saline and insert the needle in reference point "4D"
of the slot in the needle grid.
Adjust the position of Bracheystepper and needle grid
so that the distance between the needle image and the
point of the grid becomes within the range of 1mm.
Please carry out correctly about the above-mentioned
method according to the instruction of the manufactured
company of the tools. If the setting is not done
correctly, the needle doesn't match to the grid display.
5-114
Q1E-EA0612
4) Because the grid display is done by the cross-section of

the probe, the position of the needle cannot be confirmed
from the body surface plane to the cross-section plane.
Please note that there is a possibility that the position
of the needle shifts by the insertion operation.
Confirmed model of the brachytherapy products:
Company : Barzell-Whitmore Maroon Bells, Inc.
1121 Lewis Ave., Sarasota, FL 34237 USA
Phone: 941-955-7700
Fax: 941-955-7735
E-mail: lewis1121@aol.com
Products : Refer to the following list
TYPE
PRODUCT
NUMBER
PRODUCT NAME
Brachystand 6 Ultra
(for Table-mount or floor-based
1000
procedures)
(Includes floor fixation stand)
Brachystand 6 Ultra-S
(for Table-mount procedures
1000S
only)
BRACHYSTAND
(Includes set-up and storage stand only)
(STABILIZERS)
Brachystand 4 Compact
1100
only)
(Includes set-up and storage stand only)
Micro-TouchTM Brachystand
6200
only)
BRACHYSTEPPER
5800
Brachystepper - For Hitachi
NEEDLE GRIDS
1454
Template Grid - 18 gauge (Generic fits Hitachi)
2200
Dust Cover for Brachystand
Brachyclamp Kit for Brachystand 6 Ultra for OR table
3600
with Rails (Includes a right clamp, left clamp and clamp
ACCESSORIES
rack)
Brachyclamp Kit for Brachystand 4 Compact for OR
3700
table with Rails (Includes a right clamp, left clamp and
clamp rack)
Brachystand 6 Ultra Bundle Includes Brachystand 6
Ultra 1000S Model (for Table-mount procedures only),
1000SB
Brachystepper of choice (except P/N 8500), template
grid, and Brachyclamp Kit.
Brachystand 6 Ultra Bundle Includes Brachystand 6
BRACHYBUNDLE
OFFER
Ultra (1000 Model for Table-mount or floor-mount
1000B
for HITACHI
procedures), Brachystepper of choice (except P/N 8500),
template grid and Brachyclamp Kit.
Micro-TouchTM Brachystand Bundle Includes Micro-Touch
Brachystand
(6200 Model) (for Table-mount procedures
6200B
only), Brachystepper of choice (except P/N 8500) and
needle template grid.
BRACHYWARE USER ORDERING GUIDE
The Brachystand 6 Ultra (Product 1000) can be used either in a fully table mounted
configuration, or in a combination of a floor-based and table-mounted set-up.
The
Brachystand 4 Compact (Product 1100) includes a set-up, storage, and transportation
stand and, as such, can only be used for fully table-mounted procedures. The MicroTouchTM is also for table-mounted procedures.
Do not use the other products except as stated above.
5-115
Q1E-EA0612
5.10 Omni-Directional M mode

(Optional accessory Model EZU-OD2 is additionally required.)
5.10.1 General
By combining optional unit(Omni Directional M mode unit)
with the ultrasonic equipment, <ODM (Omni-Directional M
mode) function> can be utilized to display an M mode
image on an any axis of a B image.
5.10.2 Features
(1)
Real-time ODM mode

ODM image is produced from the B image
scanned in real time.
(2)
Cine memory ODM mode

After freezing the image, ODM image is
produced by reading the B images from the
cine memory.
(3)
Single /dual ODM mode switching function

Single ODM mode (mode of displaying an ODM image to
the single beam line) and dual ODM mode (mode of
displaying an ODM image to the dual beam line) can
be switched from each other.
(4)
ODM beam line center control switching function

The beam line center control method can be switched
to either center common mode (where the beam line
center is controlled commonly) or center
independent mode (where the beam line center is
controlled independently) in dual ODM mode.
5-116
Q1E-EA0612
5.10.3 Operating requirements of ODM function

The following setting and requirements are required for
starting the ODM function
In order to operate the ODM function, it is necessary to
satisfy the conditions as follows.
(1)
Correspondence to option
Optional unit(Omni Directional M mode unit) shall
be combined.
(2)
Probe selection
Please refer to 15.7.2 Omni-Directional M mode disp
lay software.
(3)
Other requirements
<Setting in real-time ODM mode>
B/M simultaneous mode shall be selected
CFM mode shall not be selected
ECG SYNC mode shall not be selected.
<Setting in cine memory ODM mode>
B mode shall be selected
CFM mode shall not be selected
Cine review can be done
Scan line density shall be "1".
Single focus
Image memory shall not be B:B Split mode
ECG SYNC mode shall not be selected.
5-117
Q1E-EA0612
5.10.4 Real-time ODM mode

ODM image is produced
in real time.
(1)
from
the
image
scanned
Start
Real-time ODM mode can be started by the following
procedure.
(a)
Select B/M mode by pressing
(b)
Display the function menu (Fig.5.10.4-1) by

pressing
.
MODE
DEPENDED
Fig. 5.10.4-1 Function menu (MODE DEPENDED menu)

OFF
(c)
Real-time ODM mode is selected

by turning on the toggle switch
F3 of the function menu (page
1) to ON (highlighted display).
ON
The scan line density becomes "1" automatically in
real-time ODM mode.
In case of using Linear type probe with selecting
View Angle 1, the maximum PRF is 6.0kHz.
In case of any other probes with selecting View
Angle 1, the maximum PRF is 3.5kHz.
5-118
Q1E-EA0612
(2)
Display of ODM mode

The screen display changes as shown in Fig.5.10.4-2
in ODM mode.
ODM beam line :
ODM beam line (Beam line tips are displayed by
an arrow, while the beam line center is
displayed by a circle) is displayed.
Image quality adjusting parameter:
Image quality parameter is
value/ODM enhanced value/-.
displayed
as
ODM
(Example If display is 3/4/-, ODM value is 3

and ODM enhanced value is 4)
ODM image
C'
Beam Center
ODM Beam Line

ODM / ODM-Enhance/ -
Fig. 5.10.4-2 Display of ODM mode
The center (C) of the beam

center (C) of the ODM image.
5-119
line
is
set
to
the
Q1E-EA0612
5.10.5 ODM beam line operation

The operation method of the ODM beam line is shown below.
(1)
Beam line angle selection

By
turning
the
ODM
beam
line
angle
is
switched.
(The ODM beam line rotates around the
beam line center as a reference.)
The beam line rotation can be operated over a range
from -90 to +90 as shown in Fig.5.10.5-1
The
angle is switched sequentially in the order of 45
90 -45 0 45 by pushing
-90
Rotatory range
90
-45
45
0
Fig. 5.10.5-1 Rotatory range of beam line.
If the track ball priority display is

upper right of the screen, set
at the
to the sample
mark side to make sure that the track ball priority

display has been switched to
, and then, operate
key
5-120
Q1E-EA0612
(2)
Beam line move

The beam line can be moved by the track ball.
This function can be operated only when the track

ball priority display is
at the upper right of
the screen In other cases, switch the track ball
priority display to
by the track ball priority
toggle switch before operating the track ball.
5-121
Q1E-EA0612
5.10.6 Single /Dual ODM modes

<Single ODM mode>
This mode is provided to display an ODM mode to the
single beam line.
<Dual ODM mode>
This mode is provided to display an ODM mode to the dual
beam line.
Single ODM mode and dual ODM mode can
be switched from each other by toggle
switch F2 of the function menu (Page 1).
Single ODM mode
Dual ODM mode
In the dual ODM mode, the screen display becomes as

shown in Fig.5.10.6-1.
shows beam line 1, and its
ODM beam line 1: ODM mark
corresponding ODM image is displayed on the upper side.
ODM beam line 2: ODM mark
shows beam line 2, and its
corresponding ODM image is displayed on the lower side.
ODM Mark
The ODM Image to The Beam Line 1
ODM Beam Line 1

ODM Beam Line 2
The ODM Image to The Beam Line 2
Fig.5.10.6-1 Dual ODM image

You can select whether ODM mark is displayed or not in
the Application parameter setup menu.(Refer to 5.10.10
Application parameter setup)
5-122
Q1E-EA0612
5.10.7 Beam line center control in dual ODM mode

In dual ODM mode, the ODM beam line center control
method can be switched to either common center mode or
independent center mode by toggle switch F4 of function
menu (Page 1).
<Common center mode>

The beam line centers are common to
each other in this mode.
<Independent center mode>
The beam line centers are
independent of each other in this
mode.
By pressing
ENTER
Common Center mode
Independent Center mode
when the track ball priority is set to
COLOR
POSI / SIZE
, the beam line to be operated is switched. (The beam

line being displayed yellow can be operated )
Each time
ENTER
is pressed once, the beam line to be
COLOR
POSI / SIZE
operated is switched as shown in Fig.5.10.7-1 in the

common center mode or as shown in Fig.5.10.7-2 in the
independent center mode.
Both beam line 1 and 2
Only beam line 1
Only beam line 2
Fig.5.10.7-1 Common center mode

Only beam line 1
Only beam line 2
Fig.5.10.7-2 Independent center mode
5-123
Q1E-EA0612
5.10.8 Image quality adjustment function (IMAGE PROCESS menu)

By pressing
IMAGE
PROCESS
in ODM mode, the function menu for
adjusting the image quality (Fig.5.10.8-1) is displayed

(The image quality adjustment menu for ODM is displayed
in F5 and F6 of the function menu)
Fig.5.10.8-1 Function menu (IMAGE PROCESS menu)

F5 ODM-switching
An ODM image gamma curve is
switched in 5 steps Select a
gamma curve where the image
quality can be monitored most
easily.
F6 ODM enhancement switching

The
image
edge
enhancement
degree is switched in 4 steps.
4: Edge enhancement Strong
1: Edge enhancement Weak
5-124
Q1E-EA0612
5.10.9 Cine memory ODM mode

After freezing the image, ODM image is produced
by reading the B images from the cine memory.
(1)
Start
The cine memory ODM mode can be started by the
following procedure.
(a)
Select B mode by pressing
(b)
Freeze the B image by pressing
to be able
FREEZE
to review the cine memory

(c)
Display the function menu (Fig.5.10.9-1) by

pressing
.
MODE
DEPENDED
(d)
The cine memory ODM mode is selected by turning

on toggle switch F3 of function menu (page 1)
to ON(highlighted display).
Fig.5.10.9-1 Function menu (MODE DEPENDED menu)

(2)
Display of ODM mode

Same as in real-time ODM mode Refer to 5.10.4 (2).
(3)
ODM beam line operation

Same as in real-time ODM mode Refer to 5.10.5
(4)
Single /Dual ODM modes

(5)
Beam line center control in dual ODM mode

(6)
Image quality adjustment function

By
pressing
IMAGE
PROCESS
during
ODM
image
review,
the
function menu for adjusting the image quality

(Fig.5.10.9-2) is displayed.
(The image quality
adjustment menu for ODM is displayed in F5 and F6
of the function menu)
Fig.5.10.9-2 Function menu (IMAGE PROCESS Menu)
F5 ODM-switching
F6 ODM enhancement switching
5-125
Q1E-EA0612
5.10.10 Application parameter setup

This function is provided to edit various application
parameters for ODM mode.
(1)
Application parameter setup menu

For editing various parameters in ODM mode, display
"Edit Application" of application menu by pressing
Main menu Setup Application "Edit Data"
button, and then, select "ODM Menu" of "M Menu" of
"Item View" (For details of the application
function, refer to Chapter 8)
(2)
ODM menu
Initial mode
Sets whether ODM mode is selected or

not when pressing M mode key first
after application switching (M mode
/ ODM mode)
ODM mode
Selects single ODM/dual ODM modes
Beam Center Control

Selects the control methods
(common/independent) at the beam
line center in dual ODM mode
B View Angle
View angle of B-mode image (6 steps

of 1 ~ 6) in Real-time ODM mode.
5-126
Q1E-EA0612
Image Process
Enhancement
Enhancement value for ODM image
ODM-
Gamma value for ODM image.
Initial Gain
Initial gain for ODM mode
Fundamental
Normal use
dTHI
dTHI use
ODM Mark Display
Selects the display of ODM mark
5-127
Q1E-EA0612
5.11 TDI Mode

5.11.1 General
This is the function < TDI (Tissue Doppler Imaging mode)
function > to display the movement speed of a tissue
(mainly the myocardium) in color superposed on B, M mode
image, or as the Doppler mode image.
5.11.2 Basic function of TDI
(1)
(2)
TDI-B mode
The movement speed of a tissue
color superposed on B mode image.
is
displayed
in
TDI-M mode
The movement speed of a tissue
color superposed on M mode image.
is
displayed
in
(3)
TDI-PW mode
The movement speed of a tissue is displayed as the
Doppler mode image.
(4)
Blend function
This is the function to penetrate and show the B/W
image behind color, when the movement speed of a
tissue is displayed in color superposed.
5.11.3 Operating requirements of TDI function

The following setting and requirements are required for
starting the TDI function.
In order to operate the TDI function, it is necessary to
satisfy the conditions as follows.
(1)
Probe selection
Phased array probe shall be selected.
(2)
Other requirements
< Setting in TDI-B mode >

The Freeze status should be OFF.
CFI mode shall be selected.
5-128
Q1E-EA0612
< Setting in TDI-M mode >

CFI-B/M mode shall be selected.
< Setting in TDI-PW mode >
B/PW mode shall be selected.
After switching to other modes from TDI mode, the TDI

status keeps ON.
When TDI mode is selected, it is not allowed to
switch the mode of CFI and CFA by pressing color mode
key.
Reference frequency cannot be changed.
NOTICE
Depending on probe frequency, the following

reference frequency(REF) can be selected in
TDI mode.
Table 5.11.3-1
Probe frequency
Reference
frequency
2.5MHz
4-2
5.0MHz
6-3.5, 7-3
2.5MHz
3.5MHz
5-129
Q1E-EA0612
5.11.4 TDI-B mode

The movement speed of a tissue is displayed in color
superposed on B mode image.
(1)
Start
TDI-B mode
procedure.
can
be
started
by
1 Select CFI-B mode by pressing
menu
following
.
CFI
2 Display the function

MODE
pressing
.
DEPENDED
the
CFA
(Fig.
5.11.4-1)
by

3 TDI-B mode is selected by turning on the toggle
switch F7 of the function menu (page 1) to ON
(highlighted display).
OFF
ON
(2)
Display of TDI-B mode

The screen display changes as shown in Fig. 5.11.42 in TDI-B mode.
Reference frequency in color mode :

TDI is displayed on the display position of
reference frequency in color mode. (Refer to Fig.
5.11.4-2)
Image quality adjusting parameter for color mode
image :
Image quality parameter for color mode image is
displayed as -/Blend/Packet size/Smoothing/
Persistence/-. (Example If display is -/6/S/2/2/-,
Blend is 6, Packet size is S, Smoothing is 2,
Persistence is 2.)
5-130
Q1E-EA0612
-/Blend/Packet size/Smoothing/Persistence/color mode frequency (PRF/TDI)
Fig. 5.11.4-2 Display of TDI-B

5.11.5 TDI-M mode
The movement speed of a tissue is displayed in color
superposed on M mode image.
(1)
Start
TDI-M mode
procedure.
can
be
started
by
1 Select CFI-B mode by pressing
pressing
the
function
MODE
DEPENDED
menu
following
.
CFI
2 Display
the
CFA
(Fig.
5.11.5-1)
by
5-131
Q1E-EA0612
3 Turn on the toggle switch F7 of the function menu

(page 1) to ON (highlighted display).
OFF
ON
4 TDI-M mode is selected by pressing
(2)
Display of TDI-M mode

The screen display changes as shown in Fig. 5.11.52 in TDI-M mode.
Reference frequency in color mode :

reference frequency in color mode. (Refer to Fig.
5.11.5-2)
Image quality adjusting parameter for color mode
image :
Image quality parameter for color mode image is
displayed as -/-/Smoothing/-.
(Example If display is -/-/2/-, Smoothing is 2.)
color mode frequency (PRF/TDI)

-/Blend/Packet size/Smoothing/Persistence/-/-/Smoothing/-
Fig. 5.11.5-2 Display of TDI-M
5-132
Q1E-EA0612
5.11.6 TDI-PW mode

The movement speed
Doppler mode image.
(1)
Start
TDI-PW mode
procedure.
of
can
tissue
be
is
started
displayed
by
the
1 Select PW Doppler mode by pressing

PW-mode is selected by pressing
mode is selected.
2 Display the function

MODE
pressing
.
DEPENDED
menu
as
the
following
.
PW
(Fig.
, when CW-
5.11.6-1)
by
3 TDI-PW mode is selected by turning on the toggle

switch F7 of the function menu (page 1) to ON
(highlighted display).
OFF
ON
(2)
Display of TDI-PW mode

The screen display changes as shown in Fig. 5.11.62 in TDI-PW mode.
Reference frequency in Doppler mode :

reference frequency in Doppler mode. (Refer to Fig.
5.11.6-2)
5-133
Q1E-EA0612
Image quality adjusting parameter for Doppler mode

image :
Image quality parameter for Doppler mode image is
displayed as -/FFT-.
(Example If display is -/1, FFT- is 1.)
-/FFT-
Doppler mode frequency (PRF/TDI)
Fig. 5.11.6-2 Display of TDI-PW

5.11.7 Blend function
This is the function to penetrate and show the B/W image
behind color, when the movement speed of a tissue is
displayed in color superposed.
The degree of penetration can be changed by turning on
the toggle switch F2 of the function menu (page 1) for
adjusting the image quality.
0 : Penetration OFF
1 : Penetration level low
2
7 : Penetration level high
5-134
Q1E-EA0612
5.11.8 Application parameter setup

This function is provided to edit various application
parameter of TDI mode.
(1)
Application parameter setup menu

For editing various parameters in TDI mode, display
Edit Application of application menu by pressing
Main menu -> Setup -> Application -> Edit Data
button, and then, select TDI of Item View. (For
details of the application function, refer to
Chapter 8)
(2)
TDI menu
TDI Menu 1
Initial Mode
Sets whether TDI mode is selected or

not when pressing color mode key or
Doppler
mode
key
first
after
application switching.
5-135
Q1E-EA0612
D Menu 1
PRF
Doppler pulse repetitive frequency

in the Doppler mode image of TDI or
max
detection
frequency
in
the
Doppler mode image of TDI
InitialGain
Initial gain value for the Doppler

mode of TDI
Image Process
Analysis
Number of FFT analysis point in the

Doppler
mode
image
of
TDI
(RESPONSE/HI-RESO(L/H))
FFT-
Dynamic range for the Doppler mode

of TDI
Sample Length
Width(detection area)
sample points of TDI
Base Line Position
Sets position to display the base

line when selecting Doppler mode of
TDI
5-136
of
Doppler
Q1E-EA0612
CFI Menu 1
Color Map
Selects color map when TDI mode is

selected.
Dual CFM
A function to display dual screen

simultaneous
color
mode
display
Allows color map to be designated
individually for each L/R screen.
PRF
Repetitive
frequency
of
Doppler
pulse in color mode image of TDI
Scan Line Density
Scan line density

image of TDI
of
color
mode
Color Box
Fixed-B
A function to acquire more precise

color mode image of TDI by making
display angle of B/W image the same
width as that of color region.
Width
Initial range of color display in

color mode image of TDI display
(angle and width)
Height
Initial range of color display in

color mode image of TDI display
(Height)
5-137
Q1E-EA0612
CFI Menu 2
Image Process
Packet Size
Minimum unit size to detect color

information in color mode image of
TDI
Smoothing
Designates smoothing process level

in color mode image display of TDI.
Persistence
Designates persistence (Color SCC)

process level in color mode image
display of TDI.
Blend
Designates penetration process level

in color mode image display of TDI.
Initial Gain
Initial gain value for color mode of

TDI
5-138
Q1E-EA0612
5.12 360 Radial display mode

5.12.1 360 Radial display
If 360 electrical radial type intracavital probe(EUPR54AW-19, EUP-R54AW-33) and endoscopic probe(EG-3670URK)
is
selected(called
as
360 Radial
display
mode
hereafter), 360 radial view is displayed.
The screen display changes as shown in Fig.5.12.1-1 in
360 Radial display mode.
View direction
Index mark
Fig. 5.12.1-1 360 Radial display

Index mark :
By displaying the position which the

probe has (Refer to Fig.5.12.1-2 on a
screen, the directional relation between
a image and a probe becomes easy.
View direction : On the right-up of image display are,

display PROX. (at the view from base
of PROBE) and DISTAL (at the view
from top of PROBE).
5-139
Q1E-EA0612
Fig. 5.12.1-2
Index mark
Index mark position
Index mark
Right
Up
Down
Left
* The arrow indicates the bending direction.
Fig.5.12.1-3 Index mark position(EG-3670URK)
5.12.2 Special operating method in the 360 Radial display mode

Operating method
described below.
in
the
360
Radial
display
mode
is
(1) Switching display width (360/180) of B-mode image

The display width of B-mode image can be switched
by
clicking
the
toggle
switch
F1
of
the
function menu (MODE DEPENDED menu) (page 1).
5-140
Q1E-EA0612
360 display
up
down
180 display(upper side)
180 display(lower side)
Fig. 5.12.2-1 Switching display width (360/180) of Bmode image

(2) Rotation and reversal of image
When the display width of B-mode image is 360, a
displayed image can be rotated by ANGLE key encoder
.
And, the view direction can be switched by
horizontal reversal of the function menu (MODE
DEPENDED menu) (page 2).
PROX.(at the view from base of PROBE)
DISTAL(at the view from top of PROBE)

Fig. 5.12.2-2 Switching view direction
5-141
Q1E-EA0612
NOTICE :
It is prohibited to use image 90 rotating

function. In case you want to move the position of
image, use ANGLE key encoder.
When the display width of B-mode image is 180, it

is prohibited to use image rotating function.
(3) M mode
(3-1) Displaying B/M-mode image from 360 display
When the display width of B-mode image is 360,
pressing
with Freeze OFF displays M beam line
on the B-mode image. Pressing
again displays
B/M-mode. At this time, B-mode image becomes 180

display focusing on M beam line.
When the display width of

B-mode image is 360, pressing
.
M beam line is displayed on the

B-mode image.
After setting M beam line,
M beam line
pressing
B/M-mode is displayed. At this

time, B-mode image becomes 180
display focusing on M beam
line.
Fig. 5.12.2-3 B/M-mode image
5-142
Q1E-EA0612
(3-2) Displaying B/M-mode image from 180 display

operation is the same as the existing one.
(4) PW mode
(4-1) Displaying B/PW-mode image from 360 display
pressing
with Freeze OFF displays doppler beam
line on B-mode image. Pressing
again displays
B/PW-mode. At this time, B-mode image becomes 180

display focusing on doppler beam line.
When the display width of

B-mode image is 360, pressing
.
Doppler beam line is displayed

on the B-mode image.
After setting doppler beam
doppler
beam line
line, pressing
B/PW-mode is displayed. At
this time, B-mode image
becomes 180 display focusing
on doppler beam line.
Fig. 5.12.2-4 B/PW-mode image

(4-2) Displaying B/PW-mode image from 180 display
operation is the same as the existing one.
5-143
Q1E-EA0612
(5) Zoom Function

When Freeze ON, HI Zoom ROI can not be moved across
the crossing point of scan start line and scan end
line of one frame.
The other operations are the same in other mode.
The crossing point of scan

start line and scan end line
of one frame
90
Fig. 5.12.2-5 The crossing point of scan start line

and scan end line of one frame
NOTICE :
When the display width of B-mode image is 360, at
an area close to crossing point of scan start line
and scan end line of one frame a time phase
difference is caused. So, avoid to diagnose around
there.
5-144
Q1E-EA0612
5.13 Usage methods of Probe Extension unit EZU-AB7

5.13.1 Connecting the probe
(1) Check the connection to the ultrasound examination
device
Check that the probe connector of the probe
extension unit is connected to the probe connection
bay of the ultrasound examination device. It is
available to connect the probe to the connection
bay #1 ~ #3.
Fig. 5.13.1-1 Check the connection to the ultrasound

examination device
(2) Connecting the probe
Connect the probes probe connector to the probe
connection bay of the probe extension unit.
Fig. 5.13.1-2 Connecting the probe
5-145
Q1E-EA0612
(3) Setting the switch

Press the toggle switch whose number corresponds to
the probe connection bay in step(2). In this case,
we are using probe connection bay I, so we press
probe toggle switch I.
Fig. 5.13.1-3 Setting the switch

(4) Selecting the probe
In the selection menu for the probe and
application, select the probe connected
probe extension unit.
to
the
Fig. 5.13.1-4 Selection menu for the probe and

application
5-146
Q1E-EA0612
The probe connected to the probe extension unit is

displayed using the number of the ultrasound
examination devices probe connection bay that is
connected to the probe extension unit. In this case,
it is #2.
When using a probe connected to the probe

extension
unit,
note
that
the
quality
of
ultrasound image may lower slightly, due to the
fact that the length of cable between the
ultrasound device and probe becomes slightly
longer.
To use the
required.
probe
extension
unit,
EZU-TY1L
is
5.13.2 Switching the probe

When two probes are connected to the probe extension
unit, you can use the probe toggle switches to switch
between the two probes.
After switching the probe, be sure to select the
corresponding probe in the selection menu for the probe
and application.
Please do not operate the probe toggle switches of

this unit during the change of probe application.
It causes incorrect-action.
5-147
Q1E-EA0612
5.14 Zoom Function

5.14.1 Zoom function(usual)
Magnifies any region in the B, B/M, B/PW, B/CW and CFM
mode.
(1) B, B/M, B/PW, B/CW mode
(a)
Pressing
ZOOM
ZOOM
ZOOM
displays
a
rectangular
frame indicating a region
of interest (ROI) on the
image.
(b)
When the trackball is not

set for moving ROI, use
the
TRACKBALL
PRIORITY
toggle switch to
select ZOOM at the upper

right of screen.
Use the trackball to move
ROI
to
any
intended
region.
(c)
Clicking the
toggle
DEPTH / MAG
switch downward enlarges

the ROI, while clicking
upward contracts the ROI.
(d)
Press the
display
surrounded
enlarged.
ENTER
COLOR
POSI / SIZE
ENTER key to
the
region
by
ROI
Use the trackball to move

ROI up/down or to the
left/right, or use the
toggle
switch
ZOOM
to
DEPTH / MAG
change
factor.
(e)
magnification
Pressing ZOOM key

ends
the
Pan
function.
5-148
again
Zoom
Fig. 5.14.1-1
Black/White Pan Zoom
Q1E-EA0612
(2) CFM mode

ZOOM of CFM-mode differs from
that of the other mode.
ZOOM
The rectangular frame which

indicates
the
ROI
is
not
displayed.
Pressing
ZOOM
expands
the
image set up by the ROI frame

which displays CFM image and
appears
Symbol
at
the
DEPTH / MAG
upper right corner of screen.

Clicking
the
toggle
DEPTH / MAG
switch downward raises screen

magnification
ratio,
while
clicking upward lowers it.
Move the trackball to move the
image to view any region to be
observed.
If moving to the right, the
screen moves to the right.
Press
ZOOM
again to end ZOOM.

ZOOM
Fig. 5.14.1-2
ZOOM of CFM
5-149
Q1E-EA0612
5.14.2 HI Zoom function

Compared with the usual pan zoom image, scanning line
density and frame rate improve, and a high definition
picture is displayed in B, B/M,B/PW,B/CW and CFM mode.
(1) B, B/M, B/PW, B/CW mode
Zoom ROI is displayed on a
screen by pushing a zoom key
.
ZOOM
ZOOM
Use the trackball to move Zoom

ROI.
For the sector and convex
probes, if it moves up, width
will become narrow, and it
will become large if it moves
below.
Press the ENTER key displays
"" at the lower right of Zoom
ROI.
ENTER
COLOR
POSI / SIZE
This "" indicates the

position of a trackball.
Moving the trackball widens
(narrows) the ROI frame
left/right and up/down.
If the zoom range is

determined, press the ENTER
key again.
"" disappears and returns to
ENTER
COLOR
POSI / SIZE
the state of moving position.
5-150
Q1E-EA0612
If a Zoom key is pressed again

or wait for 5 seconds without
touching trackball after deter
mining a region of interest,
the expansion image of the
region surrounded by ROI is
displayed.
If the UNDO key is pressed
during displaying the
expansion image, it will
return to the ROI setting.
ZOOM
UNDO
toggle
Clicking the
DEPTH / MAG

magnification ratio, while
But magnification cannot be
lowered more than the
expansion image set up by the
ROI frame.
observed.
Press the Zoom key
ZOOM
again
ZOOM
to end ZOOM.
When display width of B-mode image is over 180,the

maximum size of ROI is 180.
5-151
Q1E-EA0612
(2) CFM mode

(a) Case that size of COLOR BOX is under 180
ZOOM of CFM mode differs from
that of the other mode.
Zoom ROI is not displayed.
ZOOM
Pressing Zoom key
expands
the image set up by the ROI

frame which displays CFM image.
Clicking the
ZOOM
toggle
DEPTH / MAG

DEPTH / MAG
But magnification cannot be

ROI frame.
image to view any region
to be observed. (It is
necessary that symbol
appears at the upper right
corner of screen.)
Press the Zoom key
ZOOM
ZOOM
again
to end ZOOM.
5-152
Q1E-EA0612
(b) Case that size of COLOR BOX is over 180

Zoom ROI which size is 180 is
displayed on a screen by
pressing zoom key
.
ZOOM
ZOOM
Zoom ROI can move in the

inside of COLOR BOX by moving
trackball.
However, the size of Zoom ROI
and COLOR BOX can not be
changed at this time.
If Zoom key is pressed again

after determining a region of
interest, the expansion image
of the region surrounded by
Zoom ROI is displayed.
ZOOM
toggle
Clicking the
DEPTH / MAG

DEPTH / MAG
But magnification can not be

ROI frame.
5-153
Q1E-EA0612

observed.
Press the Zoom key
ZOOM
again
ZOOM
to end ZOOM.
5-154
Q1E-EA0612
Chapter 6 Character, Annotation and Body Mark

6.1
Entering Characters
Displays characters entered from the keyboard on the ultrasound image.

Pressing the Character key switches
over the function menu to the menu
for entering characters and a
yellow cursor line is displayed on
the screen.
A comment may be entered from the
position of cursor to the right.
Also, if the trackball priority on
the upper right of screen is
,
the cursor may be moved with the
trackball or arrow keys
Fig. 6.1-1
Entering Characters
.
Characters may be entered from the
alphanumeric keyboard.
Press the Shift key and character
keys to enter small characters and
symbols.
Also it is possible to enter an
arrow mark by pressing Ctrl key,
Alt key and a character key
simultaneously.
6.1.1 Character input menu
Fig. 6.1.1-1 Character Input Menu

F1 SIZE
Pressing the
toggle switch
1
switches the size of characters

to be entered in 4 steps.
1
Fig. 6.1.1-2 Character Size
6-1
Q1E-EA0612
F2, F3 FONT
Pressing
the
toggle
2
switch switches over the font of

characters to be entered in 4
types.
Fig. 6.1.1-3 Character Fonts

F4 Correcting characters
Pressing the
toggle switch
4
to switch over Overwrite and

Insert
characters
to
be
entered.
(Insert)
After entering [ABCDE], move
the cursor behind [B] and enter
[cde] to change to [ABcdeCDE].
(Overwrite)
After entering [ABCDE], move
the cursor behind [B] and enter
[cde] to change to [ABcde].
Fig. 6.1.1-4
Correcting Characters
F5 Moving character string
Place the cursor at the tail of

character string or in the middle
of character string and press the
[ENTER] key to put a yellow frame
onto the character string (F5 of
the function menu changes to
white characters).
In this state, the character
string may be moved within the
screen. Use the trackball or
arrow keys to move the string.
If pressing the [ENTER] key again
after moving the string, the
frame disappears and F5 of the
menu changes to gray characters.
Fig. 6.1.1-5
Moving Character String
6-2
Q1E-EA0612
F6 Home position
By pressing
toggle switch, the present cursor position is stored
into memory so that the cursor line is displayed from the position
when the character input mode was selected next.
NOTICE: When "HOME POSI" is selected in the function menu, the frame
is set to the selected condition momentarily.
6.1.2 Deleting characters
(1) Deleting characters
Select a character string as well as moving a character string
and press the Del key.
(2) Clearing all characters being displayed
Pressing
Character
Clear
all clears the character string being displayed.
6.1.3 Ending entry

Character input function ends when one of below mentioned operation
is selected.
When
When
When
When
When
6.2
key is off.
current function is changed to another function menu.
the mode except CFM is changed.
Patient key is pushed.
the function is changed to VCR.
Character
Entering Characters with Annotation
6.2.1 Calling ANNOTATION menu

Anno
Pressing
displays
the
tation
character cursor and ANNOTATION
menu on the screen.
The menu includes menus to
designate the position to display
ANNOTATION by region and type, and
arrow mark menu. Use the trackball
or arrow keys to move the cursor
to any place where ANNOTATION is
to be located.
Selecting ANNOTATION page

Select "Prev. Page" or "Next Page"
and press [ENTER] key to change the
menu
displayed.
Select
any
ANNOTATION to be called.
Fig. 6.2.1-1 ANNOTATION Cursor
6-3
Q1E-EA0612
(1)
Entering ANNOTATION
Use the [ENTER] key to select
ANNOTATION highlighted in the menu,
it is displayed on the screen with
a frame.
In this state, use the trackball to
move ANNOTATION to any location.
(2)
Fixing ANNOTATION
Press the [ENTER] key again at
the location desired. It turns
to
white
and
the
frame
disappears.
Then the icon on the upper right
of screen changes from
to
.
Fig. 6.2.1-2 Input & Move
Fig. 6.2.1-3 ANNOTATION Fixed

(3)
Arrow symbol
May be selected as well as the other ANNOTATION.
6.2.2 ANNOTATION function menu

Selecting the ANNOTATION mode displays the function menu as shown
below:
1st page
If selecting F1 SORT
1st page
2nd page
Fig. 6.2.2-1 Function Menu
6-4
Q1E-EA0612
F1 SORT: Sorting MAIN MENU (F2~F4)

Menu layout of default setting is in the order of alphabet. This
may be changed over to SORT by layout or clinical region.
Fig. 6.2.2-2 SORT

(2nd page)
F1 Character size
F2, F3 Character font
F4 Correcting characters
The same as those of the character mode
(Refer to 6.1.1).
F7 Arrow menu
Switches over display/not
display of the ARROW menu.
7
Fig. 6.2.2-3 Arrow Menu
6-5
Q1E-EA0612
6.2.3 Display setting of ANNOTATION menu

Set display of the ANNOTATION menu by application in the Application
menu of Setup menu of Main Menu.
If starting the Application menu in Setup Menu, a list of Application
is displayed.
Double click the name of Application selected or click EDIT DATA
at the right side to edit setting of the Application selected. If
opening the ANNOTATION menu, default of the ANNOTATION entry menu
may be switched over to alphabetical order or purposeful order,
and display of the Arrow menu may be switched over.
END
Fig. 6.2.3-1 Display Setting

6.2.4 Ending ANNOTATION menu
key again or click the mark at the upper right
Press the Anno
tation
corner of sub-window to clear all windows being displayed.
6-6
Q1E-EA0612
6.2.5 List of ANNOTATION

ANNOTATION registered to each diagnostic region differs by
APPLICATION. Fixed registrations are as follows.
Table 6.2.5-1 ANNOTATION LIST-1
Region
Category
Abdominal Location
Clinical
Common
Term
LIVER
RHV
MHV
LHV
PV
IVC
Ao
GB
CBD
BD
SMA
SMV
CA
PANCREAS
MPD
SPLEEN
SPA
SPV
KIDNEY
BLADDER
PROSTATE
UTERUS
STOMACH
CYST
MASS
TUMOR
META
HCC
FATTY
ABSCESS
ASCITES
POLYP
SHADOW
STONE
RLSITTING
Formal name
Liver
Right Hepatic Vein
Middle Hepatic Vein
Left Hepatic Vein
Portal Vein
Inferior Vera Cava
Aorta
Gallbladder
Common File Duct
Bile Duct
Superior Mesenteric Artery
Superior Mesenteric Vein
Celiac Artery
Pancreas
Main Pancreatic Duct
Spleen
Splenic Artery
Splenic Vein
Kidney
Bladder
Prostate
Uterus
Stomach
Cyst
Mass
Tumor
Metastasis
Hepatocellular Carcinoma
Fatty
Abscess
Ascites
Polyp
Acoustic Shadow
Stone
RightLeftSitting
6-7
Q1E-EA0612

Region
Cardiac
Category
Location
Term
LA
LV
IVS
LVPW
RA
RV
MV
AML
PML
AV
Ao
AAo
DAo
ARCH
RCA
LCA
LMT
LAD
LCX
PA
PV
TV
LVOT
LVIT
RVOT
RVIT
NCC
LCC
RCC
LAA
SVC
IVC
Formal name
Left Atrium
Left Ventricle
Interventricular Septum
Posterior Wall of Left Ventricle
Right Atrium
Right Ventricle
Mitral Valve
Anterior Mitral Leaflet
Posterior Mitral Leaflet
Aortic Valve
Aorta
Ascending Aorta
Descending Aorta
Aortic Arch
Right Coronary Artery
Left Coronary Artery
Left Main Truck Coronary Artery
Left Anterior Descending
Left Circumflex
Pulmonary Artery
Pulmonary Valve
Tricuspid Valve
Left Ventricular Outflow Tract
Left Ventricular Inflow Tract
Right Ventricular Outflow Tract
Right Ventricular Inflow Tract
Non-Coronary Cusp
Left Coronary Cusp
Right Coronary Cusp
Left Atrial Appendage
Superior Vena Cava
Inferior Vena Cava
6-8
Q1E-EA0612

Region
Cardiac
Category
Clinical
Stress
Common
Term
EFFUSION
VEC
SAM
THROMBUS
MYXOMA
VSD
ASD
PDA
HYPO
AKINESIS
ANEURYSM
ENTRY
REENTRY
TL
FL
IF
TUMOR
REST
EXERCISE
L-DOSE
H-DOSE
PEAK
POST
RECOVERY
DIASTOLE
SYSTOLE
TRANS
LONGI
AWAY
TOWARD
PRE-OPE
POST-OPE
Formal name
Effusion
Vegetation
Systolic Anterior Motion
Thrombus
Myxoma
Ventricular Septal Defect
Atrial Septal Defect
Patent Ductus Arteriosus
Hypo
Akinesis
Aneurysm
Entry
Reentry
True Lumen
False Lumen
Intimal Flap
Tumor
Rest
Exercise
Low Dose
High Dose
Peak Dose
Post Dose
Recovery
Diastole
Systole
Transverse
Longitudinal
Away
Toward
Pre Operation
Post Operation
6-9
Q1E-EA0612

Region
Vascular
Category
Location
Clinical
Term
RCCA
LCCA
ICA
ECA
BIF
RCCV
LCCV
ICV
ECV
JUG-V
VERT-A
S-TH-A
I-TH-A
SUBCL-A
SUBCL-V
AX-A
AX-V
BRACH-A
BRACH-V
CEPH-V
BAS-V
RAD-A
UL-A
DIGITAL
FEMORAL
CFA
CFV
GSV
POP-A
POP-V
PER-A
PER-V
ATA
ATV
PTA
PTV
PLAQUE
ATHEROMA
THROMBUS
Formal name
Right Common Carotid Artery
Left Common Carotid Artery
Internal Carotid Artery
External Carotid Artery
Bifurcation
Right Common Carotid Vein
Left Common Carotid Vein
Internal Carotid Vein
External Carotid Vein
Jugular Vein
Vertebra Artery
Superior Thyroid Artery
Inferior Thyroid Artery
Subclavian Artery
Subclavian Vein
Axillery Artery
Axillery Vein
Brachial Artery
Brachial Vein
Cephalic Vein
Basilic Vein
Radial Artery
Ulner Artery
Digital
Femoral
Common Femoral Artery
Common Femoral Vein
Greater Saphenous Vein
Popliteal Artery
Popliteal Vein
Peroneal Artery
Peroneal Vein
Anterior Tibial Artery
Anterior Tibial Vein
Posterior Tibial Artery
Posterior Tibial Vein
Plaque
Atheroma
Thrombus
6-10
Q1E-EA0612

Region
Vascular
Category
Common
Ob/Gyn
Location
Clinical
Common
Term
RLARTERY
VEIN
SUPERIOR
INFERIOR
ANTERIOR
POSTERIOR
COMMON
INTERNAL
EXTERNAL
DISTAL
DIASTOLE
SYSTOLE
UTERUS
DOUGLAS
OVARY
FOLLICLE
GS
YOLK-SAC
FETUS
PLACENTA
BLADDER
UM-ARTERY
UM-VEIN
UT-ARTERY
SPINE
STOMACH
KIDNEY
CORD
CYST
TUMOR
MYOMA
CHOCOLATE
DERMOID
IUD
MOLE
ECTOPIC
IUGR
TWINA
TWINB
RLANTERIOR
POSTERIOR
CERVIX
FUNDUS
Formal name
RightLeftArtery
Vein
Superior
Inferior
Anterior
Posterior
Common
Internal
External
Distal
Diastole
Systole
Uterus
Douglas
Ovary
Follicle
Gestational Sac
Yolk Sac
Fetus
Placenta
Bladder
Umbilical Artery
Umbilical Vein
Uterine Artery
Spine
Stomach
Kidney
Umbilical Cord
Cyst
Tumor
Myoma
Chocolate Cyst
Dermoid
Intrauterine Device
Mole
Ectopic Pregnancy
Intrauterine Growth Retardation
Twin A
Twin B
RightLeftAnterior
Posterior
Cervix
Fundus
6-11
Q1E-EA0612

Region
Urology
Category
Location
Clinical
Common
Term
PROSTATE
DUCT
SV
EJ-DUCT
TESTIS
SCROTUM
PENIS
URETHRA
BLADDER
PB
PC
BPH
TUMOR
MASS
CYST
AMYLOID
RLANTERIOR
POSTERIOR
SAG
TRANS
PRE-OPE
POST-OPE
Formal name
Prostate
Duct
Seminal Vesicle
Ejaculation Duct
TESTIS
Scrotum
penis
Urethra
Bladder
Public Bone
Prostatic Cancer
Benign Prostate Hypertrophy
Tumor
Mass
Cyst
Amyloid
RightLeftAnterior
Posterior
Sagittal
Transverse
Pre Operation
Post Operation
6-12
Q1E-EA0612

Region
Breast
Category
Location
Clinical
Common
Thyroid
Location
Clinical
Common
Term
MAMMA
COOPER
SKIN
FAT
RIB
NIPPLE
LN
DUCT
PM
TUMOR
MASS
CYST
MASTOPATHY
FA
PAPILLOMA
LYMPHOMA
LIPOMA
RLPRE-OPE
POST-OPE
THYROID
TRACHEA
THYROID-A
THYROID-V
RCCA
LCCA
ICV
ESOPHAGUS
TUMOR
MASS
CYST
BASEDOW
HASHIMOTO
GOITER
AMYLOID
RLSUPERIOR
MIDDLE
INFERIOR
LOBE
6-13
Formal name
Mammary Gland
Suspensory Of Cooper
Skin
Fat
Rib
Nipple
Lymph Node
Duct
Pectoral Muscle
Tumor
mass
Cyst
Mastopahy
Fibroadenoma
Papolloma
Lymphoma
Lipoma
Right
Left
Pre Operation
Post operation
Thyroid
Trachea
Thyroid Artery
Thyroid Vein
Right Common Carotid Artery
Left Common Carotid Artery
Internal Carotid Artery
Esophagus
Tumor
Mass
Cyst
Basedow disease
Hashimoto disease
Goiter
Amyloid Goiter
Right
Left
Superior
Middle
Inferior
Lobe
Q1E-EA0612
6.2.6 Registration of user defined annotation

User defined annotation may be registered up to 20 words for 8
diagnostic regions (Max 160 items per preset).
(1) Starting registration menu
Press
MAIN
MENU
key to select "ANNOTATION"
in the SET UP submenu of MAIN MENU.
Fig. 6.2.6-1 Setup

(2) Selecting diagnostic region
When the User Def menu is displayed,
select
diagnostic
region
of
ANNOTATION at the upper most field.
If clicking
with the cursor, the
window of diagnostic region list is
extended downward. Click the name
of region to be designated to display
it in the field.
(3) Designating registration frame
Designate to which frame it is to
be registered. If not specified, it
is
registered
to
the
frame
highlighted in blue.
Fig. 6.2.6-2 User Def.
(4) Entering ANNOTATION

Enter any character string from the
alphanumeric keyboard.
(5)Registering ANNOTATION
Click the Register
register ANNOTATION.
6-14
button
to
Q1E-EA0612
(6)Example display
If the user registers, they are
displayed on the ANNOTATION menu as
follows:
Listed in the alphabetical order:
Described in the alphabetical
order.
Listed in the layout or clinical
order:
User Def page is added.
Fig. 6.2.6-3 User Def.
6.3
Entering Body Mark
6.3.1 Displaying body mark

(1) Initial display
Any body mark to be displayed by default when starting the
ultrasound scanner may be set in APPLICATION. Refer to Section
8 for details.
(2) Selecting a body mark with
displays 4 types of mark registered in APPLICATION every
time pressed. After the last mark is displayed, if
is
pressed, then the mark is erased.
Fig. 6.3.1-1 Order of Display
6-15
Q1E-EA0612
6.3.2 Moving position of probe mark

When selecting
in the trackball
priority, use the trackball to move the
probe mark to any location.
Fig. 6.3.2-1 Moving Probe Mark

6.3.3 Adjusting angle of probe mark
Use
to adjust angle of the probe
mark in the body mark.
Fig. 6.3.3-1 Rotating Probe Mark
And when selecting

in the
trackball priority, it is possible to
adjust angle of the probe mark by moving
a trackball, pushing the ENTER key.
NOTICE:
It is not displayed in the

body mark for heart.
6.3.4 Displaying upright position mark

UP
Pressing
while a body mark being
displayed, the characters "UP" is
displayed on the upper left of the body
mark.
Pressing
again clears the upright
position mark.
Fig. 6.3.4-1 Upright Position Mark

6.3.5 Operating probe mark supporting radial scan
When a specific body mark is selected, adjusting angle of the
probe mark with
supports radial scan. However, once probe
mark is moved with trackball, operation of it will become the

existing one. When the UNDO key is pressed, adjusting angle of
the probe mark supports radial scan again.
Fig.6.3.5-1 The body marks supporting radial scan
6-16
Q1E-EA0612
6.3.6 Body Mark function menu

(1) Outline
Body Mark function menu can be displayed with selecting Body
Mark on MODE DEPENDED function menu page 2 F5. The following
operations are available in this menu.
To
on
To
To
select and display a Body mark which is not registered

Application.
move the Body mark displayed on the screen.
erase the Body mark displayed on the screen.
(2) Diagnostic region selection menu

If Body Mark function menu is selected, then the following
diagnostic region selection menu is displayed.
1st page :
2nd page :
Fig. 6.3.6-1 Diagnostic Region Selection Menu
1st page F1 to F6, 2nd page F1
Diagnosis region is selected. After that, refer to (3) Mark
selection menu.
1st page F7, 2nd page F7 Base Menu
The previous menu before Body mark function menu is displayed.
2nd page F5 Mark Move
The body mark is moved on the screen. (Refer to (4) Mark move
menu)
2nd page F6 Mark Off
The body mark is erased on the screen.
(3) Mark selection menu
The following menu is displayed ifAbdomen *1 region is selected.
1st page:
2nd page:
Fig. 6.3.6-2 Mark Selection Menu
1st page F1 to F7, 2nd page F1 to F4
A body mark is selected and displayed on the screen. At that time,
Body mark function menu is closed automatically.
6-17
Q1E-EA0612
2nd page F5 Mark Move

The body mark is moved on the screen. (Refer to (4) Mark move
menu)
2nd page F6 Mark Off
The body mark is erased on the screen.
2nd page F7 Other Regions
It returns to Diagnostic region selection menu.
NOTICE *
If "Ob/Gyn" region is selected and one of F1 to F4

selected, then the sub menu is displayed. With this
menu, a Body mark is selected and displayed on the
screen.
(4) Mark move menu

If F5 Move is selected, then the Body mark can be moved on the
screen with Track ball If Move is selected again or ENTER key
is pressed, then the position is fixed. In moving, F6User Default
is selected, then the position is initialized as Application
setting.
Fig. 6.3.6-3 Mark Move Menu

(5) Registration to User function menus
Body mark function menu can be assigned to User function menus.
(Refer to "7.9 Setup Menu" for the detail)
6-18
Q1E-EA0612
6.4
Preset Operation function

Preset Operation function is a function to register comments and
body marks up to 32 steps at maximum and to use them by switching
over the display using a toggle switch of function menu.
6.4.1 The usage of a Preset Operation function

To utilize the Preset Operation function an advanced setting up
is necessary.
For further details refer to 6.4.2 Set up Preset Operation.
Here in we explain you about the start of Preset Operation function
on an assumption that it is assigned to F1 (Function menu 1) of
USER
[How to use]
(1) Press
USER
(2) Click down
.
. The body mark and comments registered in the step
1 are displayed.
When you want to change the display position of comment, use
a home position function of comment. For further details refer
to 6.1.1 Character input menu.
When you want to change the body mark display position, change
the initial display position of body mark with a set up menu
of application. For further details refer to 8.3.9 Body Mark.
(3) When you want to move to next step, click down again
To previous step
To next step
Fig. 6.4.1-1 The change of a step

(4) In case
is clicked down again in the final step, the step
returns to the step 1.
6-19
Q1E-EA0612
6.4.2 Set up Preset Operation

In order to utilize Preset Operation function 3 setting-ups as
mentioned below are required.
Registration of step
Setting up the start of Preset Operation
Selection of Operation
(1) Registration of step
Registration of step is carried out with Preset Operation Setup
Menu. Select [Preset Ope.] in Main Menu/Setup and start the Preset
Operation Setup Menu.
[Registration procedure]
(a) Enter an operation name into [Name].
(b) When you register the body mark, select Region and select the
body mark you intend to register.
(c) In case you want to change the position of probe mark on the
body mark, use [Move] and [Rotate] buttons.
(d) When you want to register the comment, enter it into [Comment]
column.
(e) Click [Register] button.
(f) For registering as many steps as you want repeat procedures
(b) ~ (e). It is possible to register up to 32 steps.
(g) When you want to register different operations, click a blank
column below the registered name in the operation list and repeat
procedure (a) ~ (f). It is possible to register 16 items.
(h) When the registration of step is finished, confirm the content
of registered step and click [OK] button.
6-20
Q1E-EA0612
Fig. 6.4.2-1 Set up Preset Operation dialog

(2) Setting up the start of Preset Operation
The start of Preset Operation can be assigned to function menu
of
USER
or
USER
. Here we explain you about the method to assign
it to F1 (function menu 1) of
USER
[Assignment]
(a) Select [User Keys...] in Main Menu/Setup to start User Function
Menu Setup dialog.
(b) Select [Other] in [Category].
(c) Select [Preset Ope.] in [Function].
(d) Click the position of User1/Freeze Off/F1* in assignment and
click [Assign] button.
(e) Click the position of User1/Freeze On/F1* in assignment and
click [Assign] button.
(f) Confirm the content of registration and click [OK] button.
6-21
Q1E-EA0612
Fig. 6.4.2-2 User Function Menu Setup dialog

NOTICE *:
Assign it to any position according to your intending

way of use.
(3) Selection of operation

It is possible to set up Preset Operation according to
Applications.
[Setting up]
(a) Select [Application...] in Main Menu/Setup to start Application
menu. After that select an Application and click [Edit Data]
button. For further details refer to 8.2 APPLICATION Function.
(b) Select [Others] from items list.
(c) Select a menu sheet from [Other Menu 4].
(d) In [Select] of Preset Operation select a preset operation meeting
to your intending application.
Even when already displayed on the selection list, please click
and choose a name from a list.
(e) When you want to display the step number while the preset operation
function is being used, enter a check mark in [No Display].
6-22
Q1E-EA0612
(f) Select [Prev. Command Menu] to return to the application command

menu, then click [Save] to save contents of setting so that
the application command menu is finished.
(g) Refer to 8.1 Switching over APPLICATION and execute the set
application. After that you can use the set preset operation.
Fig. 6.4.2-3 Edit Application dialog

6.4.3 Details of Preset Operation Setup Menu
If you select [Preset Ope.] in Main Menu/Setup, Setup Preset
Operation Menu is started.
(2) Registration contents
(1)Operation list
Body mark list
(3) Registration Item
Fig. 6.4.3-1 Set up Preset Operation dialog

(1) Operation List
Operation list Registered Preset Operation is displayed as
a list. It is possible to register 16 items
at maximum.
Duplicate
It is for duplicating Operations.
Delete
It is for deleting Operations.
6-23
Q1E-EA0612
(2) Registration contents

Name
It is for entering the name of Operation.
Body mark list It is for displaying registered body marks

as a list. It is possible to register up to
32 steps at maximum.
It is possible to change the position of the
mark by drag and drop. When comment is
registered to the mark, the comment is moved
together.
Comment
It is for displaying comments step by step.
Insert
It is for inserting the body mark of Mark Off

to selected steps.
Delete
It is for deleting selected steps.
Comment list
It is for displaying all comments of 32 steps.

It is possible to change the position of the
comment by drag and drop. The body mark is
moved together.
Fig. 6.4.3-2 Comment list dialog
6-24
Q1E-EA0612
(3) Registration Item

Region
It is a list of body mark classified by body
regions. The body mark meeting to selected
body region to be examined is displayed.
Move
It is for setting up to which part a probe

mark should be placed in the body mark. When
the button is clicked, it is possible to move
the probe mark using the trackball. After it
is moved, press [ENTER] key.
Rotate
It is for setting up to which direction the

probe mark should be placed. When the button
is clicked, it is possible to rotate the probe
mark using the trackball. After it is rotated,
press [ENTER] key.
Comment
It is for entering comments to display in the

, you can select
step. When you click
[Character Clear]. When [Character Clear] is
selected, the comment entered in previous step
is deleted.
Fig. 6.4.3-3 Select Character Clear

Register
: It is for registering the set body mark and

comment.
It is possible to register the body mark and
comment by double click on the body mark.
6-25
Q1E-EA0612
Chapter 7 Main Menu

The main menu allows any function having no exclusive key on the main
unit panel to be set and consists of multiple menus.
Items settable on the menu varies according to conditions of mode
and freeze.
Items displayed in gray on the menu can not be set under the current
condition of the equipment.
This Chapter describes functions other than US related menus described
in Chapter 5 and contents related to mainly system setting and display
function.
7.1
Starting Main Menu

Press the
MAIN
MENU
key to display the menu at the left side of screen.
Use the trackball to move the cursor to any item and press the ENTER
button to newly open the lower level window (Sub-window) of the relevant
item. (Refer to 5.1.4)
Fig.7.1-1 Sub-menu
7.2
Main Menu of each Ultrasound Mode

Refer to each ultrasound mode.
B Menu
M Menu
Dop. Menu
CFM Menu
Physiology Menu
:
:
:
:
:
5.2.11
5.3.10
5.4.14
5.7.12
5.8.4
7-1
Q1E-EA0612
7.3
Display Menu
Switches over settings of image
display related items.
MAIN
MENU
Fig. 7.3-1 Display Menu

(1) B-Color
(2) Gray Invert

Inverts
black/white of an
image.
Allows basic
colors to be set
for each mode.
GRAY INVERT
Also, items not

settable in the
mode at that time
are displayed in
gray (Refer to F7
of 5.2.9 MODE
DEPENDED (2nd
page)).
Fig. 7.3-2 B-Color
NEGATIVE
POSITIVE
Fig. 7.3-3 Gray Invert
(3) Background level

Switches over
bright-ness of
the background of
B image.
Fig. 7.3-4 Background level
7-2
Q1E-EA0612
7.4
Meas.Menu
Allows measurement functions to be selected.
Also, these functions are those to be selected after
Freeze; therefore, they cannot be selected when Freeze
Off.
Refer to the instruction manual of measurement for
details.
Fig. 7.4-1 Measurement Menu

7.5
Image Mem. Menu

A menu related
(1) B:B-Split
to the cine memory.
Normally
records
with
capacity of the cine memory as
for one screen. If checking
this box, the screen is split
into two parts and they are
recorded at the same time.
Fig.7.5-1 Image Memory Menu
(3) Review
(2) Frame No
Switches over the

auto playback
on/off and
playback speed.
Displays the frame number

cine memory by checking this
box.
.
Fig.7.5-2
Review
7-3
Q1E-EA0612
7.6
Image Data Transfer Menu

Transfer address of an image and format are switched.
Refer to 9.2.2 and 9.2.3 for the setting method of an item.
Because the USB memory has aimed at temporary use, it is possible
to set it with Image Data Transfer dialog.
Please select the USB memory with Image Data Transfer Menu when the
USB memory is connected or putting is substituted.
NOTICE: When it is a setup which cannot choose the input column,
it changes to a gray display.
<CAUTION>
1. "Transfer Address" is not updated, even if you connect the

USB Memory to the ultrasound scanner with "Set up Filing dialog"
opened. Please close "Set up Filing dialog" and open it again.
2. Keep in mind that "Transfer Address" setting of USB Memory
on "Set up Filing dialog" is released by removing of the USB
Memory or restarting of the ultrasound scanner system.
Fig. 7.6-1 Image Filing dialog
7-4
Q1E-EA0612
7.7
Recorder Menu
(1)VCR
A menu to set
the VCR/DVD
Video
recorder and
wait time for
video
printer.
Fig.7.7-1 Recorder Menu Fig.7.7-2

Switching
VCR
A menu for VCR Setups.

(a)Signal type
Switches over video signal
to S-VHS or VHS.
(b)Counter
Normally recording mark is
displayed on the screen when
recording. If checking this
box, the tape counter is
displayed instead.
(c)Pause Mode
method when pausing.
(The item of (b)and(c) is
available, if
HS-MD3000E/U(2) is
incorporated.)
(2)Printer
Switches over print waiting
time.
Set it according to the printer.
Fig.7.7-3 Switching over Printer
7-5
Q1E-EA0612
(3)DVD
Fig.7.7-4
DVD Menu
A menu for DVD video recorder

Setups.
(a)Pause Mode
method when pausing. (This
item is not available, if
LQ-MD800 is incorporated.)
(b)Title transfer
If checking this box, a
patient ID is set as an
recording image title
automatically.
(c)Status
The Recording mode, Disk
type and Recordable title
numbers are displayed.
You can record up to 99 titles
on one DVD-RAM/DVD-R disk or
49 titles on one DVD+RW disk.
The recording time is
displayed with a progress
bar.
The progress bar show a
recorded ratio on a disk.
Fig.7.7-5 Status
7-6
Q1E-EA0612
7.8
Physiology Menu
(Refer to 5.8.4 Main Menu.)
7.9
Setup Menu
A menu for various system setups
Fig.7.9-1 Setup Menu

(1) Application Menu
(Refer to Chapter 8 APPLICATION Function.)
During image transferring, it becomes a gray and cannot choose.
(2) System Menu
A menu for system setups of the ultrasound
scanner
Fig.7.9-2 System Menu
7-7
Q1E-EA0612
(2-1)
Date/Time
Set Date/Time
Sets Date, Time and Time zone
Date Format
Selects Date Format
Fig.7.9-3 Date/Time Menu

Date
Year:
Enter Year from the keyboard

or change it with "" or ""
on the screen.
Month: Press "" to display a List.

Use the trackball to specify
month.
Day:
Use the trackball to move the

cursor to any appropriate day.
Time
Fig.7.9-4 Date/Time
Use the cursor to specify each item of

"Hour", "Minute", "Second" and "AM/PM"
to highlight it and increment or
decrement with "" or "".
Time Zone
Click the Time Zone tag with the cursor
for Time Zone setting.
After setting, use the cursor to click
the OK button, or Cancel button if
previous setting is acceptable.
The system should be restarted after
changing Time Zone
NOTICE: Internet Time cannot be used.
Fig.7.9-5 Time Zone
7-8
Q1E-EA0612
(2-2)
Hosp. Name (Refer to 4.6 Entering Hospital Name.)
(2-3)
Character
a) Char. Clear
Sets if the comments entered on the screen should be cleared
or not in the following cases:
- When Freeze is set to off
- When Application is changed
b) Char. Move
Changes movement method of comment and annotation.
(2-4)
Pixel
Move with unit of pixel.
Grid
Move with unit of grid.
Key Click
Sets ON/OFF of the buzzer that beeps by pressing the keyboard

switches.
(2-5)
Logo Mark
Changes display/non display of
"HITACHI" logo.
Fig.7.9-6 Logo Mark

NOTICE: You cannot change what appears in the logotype.
(2-6)
Entry Opt.
Unprotect the software option.

CAUTION
Do not use this function if the system is started with the

System CD in an emergency.
(2-7)
Foot SW
The pedal of the twin foot switch marked as USER (hereafter

referred to as the USER pedal) can be allocated in the following
functions.
"Print"(record to a printing device)
7-9
Q1E-EA0612
"Capture Start Stop"(start/stop 3D image capture , wide view

image capture and HI Definition 3D image
capture and picture in picture CCD image
capture)
"Probe Select"(change between probe 1 and probe 2).
"VCR REC"(record to VCR)
"Single Image Transfer"(record Single Image)
"Multi Image Transfer"(record Multi Image)
"Analog Printer(B/W)"(print from Analog Printer(B/W))
"Analog Printer(Color)"(print from Analog Printer(Color))
"SCSI Printer"(print from SCSI Printer)
"USB Printer"(print from USB Printer)
"Image Printer"(print from Image Printer)
"DVD REC"(record to DVD Video Recorder)
"Plane Change"(Changing plane of biplane probe)
CAUTION
EZU-FS2 is needed for this function.
Fig.7.9-7 Foot SW
a) Print/Capture Start Stop
The USER pedal is assigned to "Print" function.
But, in 3D mode or Wide View mode, it is assigned to Start/Stop
image capture. In real-time 3D mode, it is assigned to the change
to HI Definition 3D mode or to Start/Cancel the swing of HI
Definition 3D. In PinP mode, it is assigned to Show/Hide optical
image or Start/Stop optical image capture.
When option 3D Display unit(Freehand)/3D Display unit(Magnetic
Sensor), WideView Software, 3D Display unit(Real-time) or Picture
in Picture Unit is not purchased, this item is not displayed.
b) Probe Select/Capture Start Stop
The USER pedal is assigned to "Probe Select" function.
7-10
Q1E-EA0612

c) Plane Change/Capture Start Stop
The USER pedal is assigned to "Plane change" function.
d) Only "Capture Start Stop"
The USER pedal is always assigned to "Capture Start Stop" function.
Except for 3D mode or Wide View mode, it is disabled. In PinP
mode, it is assigned to Show/Hide optical image or Start/Stop
optical image capture.
e) Only "Print"
The USER pedal is always assigned to "Print" function.
f) Only "Probe Select"
The USER pedal is always assigned to "Probe Select" function.
g) Only "Plane Change"
The USER pedal is assigned to "Plane change" function.
h) VCR REC
The USER pedal is assigned to Start/Stop VCR recording.
If the S-VHS VCR or the Digital VCR that are recommended by Hitachi
is not connected to the ultrasound scanner, this item does not
function.
i) Single Image Transfer
The USER pedal is assigned to Start/Stop Single Image recording.
7-11
Q1E-EA0612
j) Multi Image Transfer

The USER pedal is assigned to Start/Stop Multi Image Transfer.
k) Analog Printer(B/W)
The USER pedal is assigned to print from Analog Printer(B/W).
If the Black & White printer that is recommended by Hitachi is
not connected to the ultrasound scanner, this item does not
function.
l) Analog Printer(Color)
The USER pedal is assigned to print from Analog Printer(Color).
If the Color printer that is recommended by Hitachi is not connected
to the ultrasound scanner, this item does not function.
m) SCSI Printer
The USER pedal is assigned to print from SCSI Printer.
If the SCSI printer and SCSI interface function (available as
option EZU-Pi1) that are recommended by Hitachi are not connected
to the ultrasound scanner, this item is not displayed.
n) USB Printer
The USER pedal is assigned to print from USB Printer.
If the USB printer and USB HUB unit (available as option EZU-UH2)
that are recommended by Hitachi are not connected to the ultrasound
scanner, this item is not displayed.
o) Image Printer
The USER pedal is assigned to print from the printer set by
"Set Up Image Print".
This item is not displayed when not setting it by "Set Up Image
Print".(Refer to "Appendix I Using the PC Printer")
p) DVD REC
The USER pedal is assigned to Start/Stop DVD Video recording.
If the DVD Video Recorder that are recommended by Hitachi is
not connected to the ultrasound scanner, this item is not
displayed.
If you click the OK button, the change is saved. Clicking the Cancel
button restores the original setting.
7-12
Q1E-EA0612
(2-8)
ScreenSaver
Screen saver function can be set.

a) Setting screen saver function
Fig.7.9-8 ScreenSaver
Active: Changes over ON/OFF of the screen saver function.
Checking it OFF makes the screen saver function OFF
and disables time setting until starting the screen
saver and the Preview button for selection.
Wait (minutes):
Enter time until starting the screen saver (1~60
minutes) from the keyboard, or use the and buttons
on the screen to select time.
Preview: Starts the screen saver immediately. To end the screen
saver, press the UNDO key.
OK:
Saves contents edited on the ScreenSaver dialog.
Cancel: Ends the screen saver without saving contents edited.
b) Starting screen saver
To start the screen saver, set Active on the Screen Saver dialog
to ON. Then set time until starting the screen saver and use
the OK button to save contents edited. The screen saver starts
when no panel operation is performed within the set time after
pressing the Freeze button. Also, pressing the Preview button
starts the screen saver.
c) When starting screen saver
When the screen saver starts, the UNDO key only is lit and enabled.
Other panel operations are disabled.
d) Ending screen saver
When the screen saver starts, pressing the UNDO key ends it and
returns to the screen before starting the screen saver.
NOTICE:
In the following cases, the Screen saver function does not work
regardless of the setting screen saver function.
7-13
Q1E-EA0612
At VCR-mode
While measurement is operated
While 3D software is displayed (Option)
While DICOM Query/Retrieve Software is displayed (Option)
While Advanced Measurement Software is executed (Option)
(2-9)
Software option
The list of optional software installed in the system is

displayed.
Contents of the list of optional software:
Type
:
Type of optional software
Content :
Name of optional software
Software Version
:
Software version
(2-10) Trackball
a)
b)
Fig.7.9-9 Trackball Sensitivity

a) Trackball Sensitivity
It is possible to set up a trackball sensitivity to every
trackball priority.
The trackball sensitivity can be entered as a speed of trackball(1
~ 7) from keyboard for every trackball priority or it can be
changed using "" "" marks in the image.
[OK] button
:It is for recording contents edited by the

Trackball Sensitivity adjusting dialog.
[Cancel] button :No recording is done.
7-14
Q1E-EA0612
The trackball priority which trackball sensitivity adjustment

is allowed is as shown below.
M mode beam line
Doppler mode beam line
CFM-ROI
Measurement caliper
Probe Mark
Image memory playback
b) Trackball Button
It is possible to change the functions of left and right buttons.
: Set the left button to be UNDO and right one to be
ENTER.
: Set the right button to be UNDO and left one to be
ENTER.
(2-11) Depth Direction
The switch direction of display depth can be set up. However ,
it is not concerned with this setup but becomes operation as
usual at the time of zoom.
Fig. 7.9-10 Depth Direction

Forward:
It becomes operation as usual. (Upward :

Deeper display depth, Down : Shallower
display depth)
Reverse:
It becomes operation contrary to the former.

(Upward : Shallower display depth, Down :
Deeper display depth)
[OK] button:
It is for recording contents edited by the

Depth Direction dialog.
[Cancel] button: No recording is done.
7-15
Q1E-EA0612
(2-12) Zoom
The zoom function can be selected from two kinds, the usual zoom
and HI Zoom (High Density Zoom).
Fig.7.9-11 Zoom Menu

CAUTION
Zoom function cannot be switched when the zoom image is

displayed or stored on L screen or R screen.
(2-13) Biopsy
Marks of biopsy guide line and seed implant template can be
selected.
The mark of biopsy guide line can be selected from six kinds
(two colorsthree sizes) in total. The mark of the seed implant
template can be selected from two kinds (two colors).
Fig.7.9-12 Biopsy
7-16
Q1E-EA0612
(2-14) Bright.Type
This menu adjusts the brightness of characters and background
frame.
For each category(Character/Frame), there are four types for
selection.
Fig.7.9-13 Bright.Type
NOTICE
There are some characters on the screen whose brightness

cannot be adjusted with this function.
(2-15) Freq. Range

Changes display/non display of
Frequency Range.
Fig.7.9-14 Freq. Range

When Freq. Range check box is set ON, the displayed parameter
changes in some modes.
7-17
Q1E-EA0612
(Ex: B mode)
Fig.7.9-15(a)check box is set OFF
Frequency Range
Fig.7.9-15(b)check box is set ON

NOTICE
When Frequency Range is displayed,the notation of the

following parameter changes.
B-Dynamic Range DR:value
CFM Filter CF:Filter Name
7-18
Q1E-EA0612
(3)
Measurement Menu
(Refer to Chapter 1 in the instruction manual Measurement Edition
of the ultrasound diagnostic scanner.)
(4)
Annotation Menu (Refer to Chapter 6.)
(5)
Print / REC Key Menu

It is possible to set a function to each Key.
When print function is chosen, "Simultaneous Printing and Single
Image Transfer function" becomes effective by turning on "Simult"
check box at the right of each key setting. You can perform image
print and still image transfer at the same time when you push
the key which validated this function. The Single image transfer
is forwarded by setting same as S-Write key. Please refer to
"9.2.2 Set up Filing" about the setting of S-Write key.
Fig.7.9-14 Print REC Key Menu

NOTICE
When the function except printing is set to a Key, you

cannot validate Simultaneous Printing and Single Image
Transfer function.
You can not use Simultaneous Printing and Single Image
Transfer function in a state of Freeze OFF.
It is printed by a printer set by color mode when you
print a dialog and the patient menu, the filing dialog.
(6)
Image Filing Menu (Refer to 9.2 Image filing function.)
7-19
Q1E-EA0612
(7)
Peripherals Menu
Set connection with the network and so on.
For the dialog box shown in Fig. 7.9-16, set
each item as shown in Table 7.9-1. Ask your
network administrator for these values before
performing these settings.
After you specify values, click the OK button,
the restart message dialog box appears as shown
in Fig. 7.9-17.
In this dialog box, click Yes to restart the
system.
Fig.7.9-15
Peripherals Menu
Network : Set network connection.

(Available if the optional Network
Interface is installed.)
Printer (SCSI)
:
Set connection with
the SCSI printer.
(Available if the optional SCSI
interface unit EZU-Pi1 is installed.)
Printer (USB)
:
Set connection with
the USB printer.
(Available if optional USB printer is
connected.)
Video output
:It is a setting of an analog
video output signal. (PRINTER OUT,
C-VIDEO OUT, Y/C OUT, RGB OUT Refer to
"Chapter 11 11.5 Connection of
Peripheral devices")
For the dialog box shown in Fig.7.9-21
and Fig.7.9-22, set each item as shown
in Table7.9-2.
The setting is reflected when clicking
on OK button.
The setting is not reflected when
clicking on Cancel button.
It will be reset by setup at the time
of factory shipments if Cancel button
is clicked.
7-20
Q1E-EA0612
Fig. 7.9-16 Network dialog

Table 7.9-1
Item
Description
Computer Name
Specify the name of the ultrasound equipment.
You will need to change the ultrasound equipment
name for each case in which a name is duplicated.
Work Group
Change the work group name of the network
environment for the ultrasound equipment.
If you want to acquire an IP address from the
IP Address
DHCP server, select "Obtain an IP address from
(and its
specification method) a DHCP server".
Ask your network administrator for these values.
IP Address
(in dotted-decimal
notation)
Subnet Mask
Ask your network administrator for these values.
Default Gateway
Ask your network administrator as needed for
these values.
WINS address
Ask your network administrator as needed for
these values.
CAUTION
If "Obtain an IP address from a DHCP server" has been selected

in "IP Address (and its specification method)", when the
ultrasound equipment starts, it accesses the DHCP server
to acquire an IP address.
Before starting the ultrasound equipment, start the DHCP
server so that the server can be accessed.
If the ultrasound equipment cannot access the DHCP server,
startup of the equipment may fail.
7-21
Q1E-EA0612
Fig. 7.9-17 Restart message

Response check: Conduct a check on response from the destination
PC.
When you click the Response check button, the Check
Network Response window shown in Fig. 7.9-18
appears.
Specify the IP address of the destination PC, and
click the check button.
If connection succeeds, the Response Check
Succeeded message shown in Fig. 7.9-19 appears.
If connection fails, the Response Check Failed
message shown in Fig. 7.9-20 appears. If this
message appears, check and correct the network
connection and conduct a response check again.
Fig. 7.9-18 Check Network Response window
Fig. 7.9-19 Response Check Succeeded message
Fig. 7.9-20 Response Check Failed message

NOTICE: The check of a response cannot be done immediately after
a setup or change of IP address.
Please use it after rebooting equipment.
7-22
Q1E-EA0612
Fig.7.9-21 Video output dialog(NTSC)
Fig.7.9-22 Video output dialog(PAL)

Table 7.9-2
Item
Contrast
Brightness
Offset
Description
The contrast value of an
output signal is set up.
The brightness value of an
The offset level of an
(If it is set as ON, black
luminosity will go up.)
This item can be set up
only at NTSC.
7-23
Setting
range
Initial
value
-24 ~ 24
-15 ~ 15
ON/OFF
OFF
Q1E-EA0612
CAUTION
When an adjustment function is in a peripheral equipment

side, please use the adjustment function by the side
of peripheral equipment.
In using this function with the equipment which has
connected two or more peripheral equipment, please be
sure to perform a check of operation with all peripheral
equipment.
7-24
Q1E-EA0612
(8)
Backup data Menu

Use for system data management.
Save
: Saves current settings to the DVD-RAM/DVD+RW/CD-RW or
USB Memory.
Load
: Loads the backup data if saved in the DVD-RAM/DVD+RW/CD-RW
or USB Memory.
The drive for copying or installing can be selected on a Drive
Selection Dialog (Fig. 7.9-24).
Fig. 7.9-23 Backup Data Menu
Fig. 7.9-24 Drive Selection Dialog

CAUTION
Any data saved by this function will be helpful for

troubleshooting. Make backup copies at least once a
month and keep them for later use.
Please prepare one media per equipment for backup.
Please do not carry out the share between equipment.
USB memory is not suitable to save safely, because it
is in the state that can be removed at any time.
Please use it to save temporary.
If you save it safely, please use DVD-RAM.
7-25
Q1E-EA0612
NOTICE:
During data backup, a title bar may appear in the
ultrasound-image display area or image refreshing may
temporarily stop. If either of these phenomena occurs, wait
until the data copy or installation terminates.
Do not save backup data to DVD+R or CD-R.
(9)
Auto Freeze (Refer to 4.3 Setting Auto Freeze Function.)
(10) Image Print Menu

Set any format for multi image printer output.
(Refer to Appendix I)
(11) User keys
USER
USER
2
1
Two kinds of function menus (
,
) can be defined freely.
The definable menu is only one item in USER1 and USER2. It can
be set independently of each other in freeze off mode and freeze
on mode.The first, select the function, and then execute by
pressing Assign button.
Incase of un-selectable function, Assign button is ghost display.

Entry method
The function can be entered by
pressing
Assign
button
after
selecting a desired assignment
position to be defined, and then, a
desired sort and function to be
entered. The set condition is stored
into memory by pressing OK button.
After setting ,settled function menu
is displayed by pressing the
USER
USER
.
2
1
Also the entered function can be reset by Delete or Delete All
Fig. 7.9-25 User

function menu
defined
button.
How to set a measurement into User keys
At first ,select Measurement as Category and select
Measure.Region. After that the measurement list comes up as
per the selected Measure.Region in Function. Select any
measurement and press Assign button.
7-26
Q1E-EA0612
It is prohibited to set different Meas.Regions measurement

on a assignment menu.
Additionally, if Measure.Region is selected first after the
User function menu is displayed, the following confirmation
message is displayed.
Fig.7.9-26 Measurement Region confirmation message.

If the selected Meas.Region is different from the same of the
selected Application, then any measurement can not be selected
from the User function menu. The both Meas,.Region should be
same.
(12) Preset Ope. Refer to 6.4 Preset Operation function
7.10
Disk Menu
Disk Menu is used for starting various kinds of
function of memory disk connected to the main unit.
Fig. 7.10-1 Disk Menu

NOTICE:
Please do not eject a system CD when inserting it.
It is necessary to eject DVD-RAM/DVD+RW/CD-RW from Main Menu.
It is possible to make the equipment in instability when
ejecting with the eject button of drive. It is also possible
that data can not be appended to DVD-RAM/DVD+RW/CD-RW.
The title bar in display domain of US images is possible to
be showed or not with the reason of refreshing of images, or
key operation is stopped when accessing DVD-RAM, DVD+RW or
CD-RW. Please wait until the access is over.
7-27
Q1E-EA0612
CAUTION
It is possible that only DVD-RAM/DVD+RW/CD-RW can be used.

Please refer to "Appendix H 1.1 Usable Media" for details.
(1) DVD Eject

DVD-RAM/DVD+RW/CD-RW can be ejected.
It spends some time in ejecting DVD-RAM/DVD+RW/CD-RW.
(It is possible to be 10 seconds.)
It is possible that the following dialog will be showed when ejecting
DVD+RW.
It is possible to select the eject operation with DVD+RW. Please
select one and push OK button.
Fig. 7.10-2 DVD Eject

1)Eject as is.
It is possible that the media can not be read without the
equipment.
2)Make disc readable on DVD-ROM drive. (Rewritable)
Please select this when the media will be read without the
equipment.
(2) Disk View
This is to display files in the memory
disk.
a) When a disk name is clicked,
contents in sub level are
displayed.
b) If a folder is selected, data in
the folder are displayed.
Fig. 7.10-3 Disk View
7-28
Q1E-EA0612
(3) FD Format
This is for formatting a floppy disk.
Enter the name of floppy disk into
Volume Label.
Press Start button.
Fig. 7.10-4 FD Format

(4) DVD Format
Formats the DVD-RAM, DVD+RW and CD-RW.
(Refer to Appendix H Handling of DVD-RAM/DVD+RW/CD-RW Media.)
NOTICE: When you use commercially available DVD-RAM/DVD+RW/CD-RW
disks to record images and other data, be sure to use the
ones formatted for Windows. Format the DVD-RAM/DVD+RW/CD-RW
disk, following the instruction in Appendix H Handling of
DVD-RAM/DVD+RW/CD-RW Media.
NOTICE: During access to a DVD-RAM, DVD+RW, CD-RW drive, a title
bar may appear in the ultrasound-image display area or image
refreshing may temporarily stop. If either of these phenomena
occurs, wait until the access terminates.
(5) USB Memory Format
Format the USB Memory.
(Refer to Appendix K Handling of a USB Memory.)
(6) Status
The image preservation situation in a hard disk, DVD-RAM/DVD+RW/
CD-RW, USB Memory, etc. is displayed.
Moreover, the image number of sheets saved temporarily at the hard
disk is displayed on image printers such as PC printer and a DICOM
printer.
Availability (Images) displays how many numbers the still image
of a color can save about by the present format.
7-29
Q1E-EA0612
NOTICE:
When the format of images compressed such as JPEG (Lossy) and
TIFF (Pack Bitz) is chosen, the size of a picture is decided
after compression. Therefore, it is before and after transfer
and size may not change.
Information is not updated when DVD-RAM/DVD+RW/CD-RW, USB
Memory, etc. are replaced with status dialog displayed.
Once, please close status dialog and open again.
When media are not contained in the drive, it is not displayed
on disk status.
"Status" can be assigned to USER1 key and USER2 key.
In User defined function menu, please choose "Other" by Category,
choose "Status" by Function, and assign. Please refer to "7.9 Setup
Menu" about the User defined function menu.
Fig. 7.10-5 Status
7-30
Q1E-EA0612
Chapter 8 APPLICATION Function

APPLICATION is a function to register initial state of the equipment
in advance for easy use. Max 10 kinds of initial states may be registered.
Use the
8.1
PROBE
key to select it.
Switching over APPLICATION
First of all, press the
PROBE
key to display the Select Probe with
Application menu.
Fig. 8.1-1 Select Probe with Application

Even when starting for the first time, basic APPLICATION (see above)
has been already registered. When the diagnostic region is to be
changed, Click a corresponding item in the application selection
column.
8-1
Q1E-EA0612
8.2
Editing APPLICATION Function

APPLICATION functions may be edited, added and deleted in accordance
with diagnostic uses.
MAIN
MENU
Fig.8.2-1 APPLICATION Menu
Use the
MAIN
MENU
key to open the main menu and select APPLICATION of the
Set menu. APPLICATION Menu opens.

By selecting a probe to be edited from Probe menu ,the present entry
application is displayed in Application View.
For various operations, use the cursor to click the switch at the
right side. Some functions open its window or directly runs.
8-2
Q1E-EA0612
8.2.1
Current Condition
APPLICATION is made based on the
current conditions of equipment.
It is possible to overwrite on
existing APPLICATION or to make
a new APPLICATION. In case of
overwriting on the existing
APPLICATION
a
message
for
confirmation as shown in left
figure is displayed.
Max. 10 application items can be
newly added every probe.
Fig.8.2.1-1 Current Condition

8.2.2
Edit Data
Allows each mode and each item to be set in details (Refer to 8.3).
8.2.3
Copy & Paste

Allows already set items to be copied. By editing each APPLICATION
copied, more flexible APPLICATION may be used.
<CAUTION>
Cannot be performed paste between different probes.
(1) Copying items

Move the cursor to any item to
be copied (Ex: Adult Abdomen),
and click the Copy button in
the screen.
Contents
is
copied
and
temporally stored in the
memory in equipment.
(Until the item to be copied
is selected, Paste cannot be
selected).
Fig.8.2.3-1 Copy
8-3
Q1E-EA0612
Select a copy destination by

clicking
[
]
mark
in
Application View.
Then click Paste button.
Copied item is registered in
Application View.
As for item name, similar name
is automatically attached to
avoid duplication with the
item to be copied.
Fig.8.2.3-2 Paste
8.2.4
Delete
It is possible to delete APPLICATION data newly made or the group.
APPLICATION data registered at the delivery time from factory can
not be deleted.
Move the cursor to the target for deletion and click the Delete
button, then the deletion is conducted.
8.2.5
Edit Name
Move the cursor to any name to be edited and click the Edit Name
button. The name frame opens and characters are highlighted.
At this time, use the alphanumeric keys to edit the name.
8.2.6
Default application setting

Select APPLICATION to be executed when the power ON. Click Set
default Application button after selecting an application name from
Application View. The selected application name is displayed blue.
8.2.7
Export/Import
Export / Import APPLICATION. (Refer to 8.4)
8-4
Q1E-EA0612
8.2.8
Replacing APPLICATION order

In Application View, the display order of APPLICATION names can
be replaced by drag-and-drop.
When APPLICATION is chosen and dragged, an insertion mark will
be displayed.
Please drop in a position to insert.
Select the APPLICATION which will be replaced.
Pressing and holding down ENTER key, move the cursor upward
or downward by operating the trackball, then an insertion mark
appears.
After moving the cursor to the insertion position and release

ENTER key, then the relocation is completed.
8-5
Q1E-EA0612
8.2.9
Ending edit
(1) Save
Saves contents edited.
(2) Close
Ends (returns to the Setup menu) without recording.
Click the NO button in following dialog.
Fig. 8.2.9-1 Confirmation dialog
8-6
Q1E-EA0612
8.3
Edit Data <APPLICATION parameter setting menu>

Selecting "Edit Data" in the Application menu allows parameters to
be set in detail by diagnostic area or diagnostic region.
8.3.1
APPLICATION parameter setting menu
There are items which cannot be selected according to probes being

used. For TDI refer to [5.11 TDI Mode].
Fig. 8.3.1-1 Edit Application (Example: B Menu)

Current:
(At the left bottom of screen) Name of Probe and

Application being edited
Item View:
(At the left side of screen) Switches over items

that can be edited.
Move the cursor with the trackball to highlight
the item name, and then press the Enter key.
Sheet change:
Some items may be divided into several sheets.

Click any tag at the top of sheet to switch over
the sheet.
End of setting: Click the Prev. Command Menu button (at the right
bottom of screen) to return to the Command Menu
screen.
8-7
Q1E-EA0612
8.3.2
B-Mode Menu
(1) B Menu 1
Fig. 8.3.2-1 B Menu 1

Display Depth Size
Initial Display depth of B-mode in the probe
frequency
Frequency
Initial frequency setting
BW-PRF
PRF of B/W B-Mode image and M-Mode image setting

(High/Middle/Low)
View Angle
View angle of B-mode image in the probe (6 steps

of 1 ~ 6)
Vertical Shift Initial value of vertical display position on the

B-mode image (-20 ~ 310mm)
Focus
Position
Method to control focus setting of the B-mode image
Step
Number of steps for focus region (1 ~ 4)
Execute Stand-Off
Designates focus depth correction with the
observation coupler mounted to the linear probe
for body surface organ
Initial Focal Zone
Initial focus region in each probe (F1 ~ F8)
8-8
Q1E-EA0612
(2) B Menu 2
Fig. 8.3.2-2 B Menu 2

Scan Line Density
Initial setting of Scan line Density of B-mode
image.
IMAGE PROCESS
Dynamic Range
Dynamic range for B-mode image

Set-up of an initial frequency
HI REZ
Execute
Selection of HI REZ mode
Level
HI REZ On
Setting of HI REZ level (14)
HI REZ Off
Setting of image enhancement level (14)
Gray Map
Selects the gray map for B mode image
AGC (Auto Gain Control)

Grade of reducing high brightness echo level
(0 ~ 3)
Receiving Filter
Selection of image quality control function
(A ~ C)
Persistence
Grade of frame interpolation in mode image
(0 ~ 7)
8-9
Q1E-EA0612
Patient Depended Compensation

Function to adjust parameters due to difference
by patients. (1 ~ 7)
Region
Diagnostic region for IMAGE PROCESS
(3) B Menu 3
Fig. 8.3.2-3 B Menu 3

Initial Gain
Initial gain for B-mode (Fundamental)
Scan Orientation
Normal
BIPLANE-T
BIPLANE-L
Orientation
Orientation
the biplane
Orientation
the biplane
of B-mode image in the normal probe

of B-mode image in transaxial plane of
probe
of B-mode image in transaxial plane of
probe
Depth Gain Control

MODE
Control method (Fixed/Variable) on the DEPTH GAIN

CONTROL bar
Display Curve
Selects display of graphic curve for setting DGC
on the screen
Steering Mark Display

Selects display of steering mark showing scan range
when setting the normal display in the wide view
display probe.
8-10
Q1E-EA0612
Combine Mode
Selects execution of image connecting function to
intentionally obtain wide view with gap between
images eliminated in the B image dual screen display.
ECG Sync Delay Time
Setting to recognize SYNC1 and SYNC2
intentionally providing ECG delay time.
by
Initial Display Number of screen initially displayed in the

B-mode image
Thermal Index
8.3.3
Setting thermal index displaying.
M-Mode Menu
(1) M Menu 1
Image Split
Fig. 8.3.3-1 M Menu

Switches over display layout of B/M image.
L/R: Left/right layout, U/D: Up/down layout
Depth Range Control

Switches over display depth of M-mode image
Simultaneous: B+M, Independent: M
Sweep Speed
Screen sweep speed in the M-mode image
Image Process
Dynamic Range
Dynamic range for M-mode image
Enhance
Setting of enhancement for M-mode image
8-11
Q1E-EA0612
Gray Map
AGC
Selects the gray map for M-mode image

Grade of reduction of high brightness echo level
M Blanking
Setting of display width of M-mode image in the

vertical direction
Simultaneous Mode
Frame Rate
Setting of frame rate
(2) ODM Menu

(Refer to 5.10)
8.3.4
D-Mode Menu
(1) D Menu 1
Fig. 8.3.4-1 D Menu 1

Image Split
Switches over display layout B/D image.

L/R: Left/Right layout
U/D: Up/Down layout
Doppler Mode
Initial setting of PW or CW mode when pressing

the Doppler Mode Selection key
REF
Reference frequency to detect PW or CW Doppler

in each probe
PRF Control
Auto PRF
Initial
Sets repetitive frequency in the PW Doppler mode

(Auto/manual)
Doppler pulse repetitive frequency in the PW/CW
Doppler image or max detection frequency in the
8-12
Q1E-EA0612
PW/CW Doppler mode image

Sample Length Width (detection area) of Doppler sample points
Initial Gain
Initial gain value for D-mode (PW/CW)
B-Refresh
B-mode image refresh

mode(Simultaneous/Interval)
(2) D Menu 2
Fig. 8.3.4-2 D Menu 2

Image Process
Wall Filter (PW)
Initial setting for PW-mode of low pass filter
frequency
to
remove
unnecessary
Doppler
components due to wall motion and so on
Wall Filter (CW)
Initial setting for CW-mode of low pass filter
frequency
to
remove
unnecessary
Doppler
components due to wall motion and so on
ANALYSIS
Number of FFT analysis point in D-mode image
(Hi-Resolution/Hi-Response)
FFT-
Dynamic range for PW-mode and CW-mode
Doppler Expand
Displays D-mode image
Simultaneous scan
Interval Time ECG On
expanded
in
PW-mode
Refresh time in PW-mode B image refresh

scan mode when displaying ECG waveform
8-13
Q1E-EA0612
ECG Off Refresh time in PW-mode B image refresh

scan mode when not displaying ECG
waveform
Flow Invert
Angle Bar
Angle
Inverts waveform display in D-mode image
Angle to Doppler Line of the angle correction bar

in the Doppler mode (just after switchover)
Display
Designates on/off of displaying the angle
correction bar in the Doppler mode (Just after
switch over)
Oblique Scan Angle
Sets oblique scan angle of D-mode image in the
linear probe.
Scale
Designates displaying a (flow) marker in D-mode
image
(3)
D Menu 3
Fig. 8.3.4-3 D Menu 3

Unit
Angle On
Angle Off
Selects a unit for Doppler waveform display.

Selects a unit for Doppler waveform display when
displaying the angle correction bar in D-mode
image display from m/s and cm/s.
Selects a unit for Doppler waveform display when
not displaying the angle correction bar in D-mode
image display from m/s and cm/s.
Setting Cursor Selects output of Doppler sound while moving

Doppler sample point.
8-14
Q1E-EA0612
Base Line Position

Sets position to display the base line when
selecting Doppler mode.
CFM ROI
Moves CFM ROI following the Doppler sample point

in CFM mode.
Sweep Speed
Screen sweep speed in the D-mode image.
Dop. Cursor in changing to B mode

Selects if the Doppler Cursor is kept or not kept
on the screen in changing to B mode.
8-15
Q1E-EA0612
8.3.5
CFM-Mode Menu
(1)CFM-Mode Menu 1
Fig. 8.3.5-1 CFM Menu 1

Color Map
Region
Designates color map combination by diagnostic

region (Cardiac/Others) in CFM-mode image.
Cardiac Mode Selects to start which of CFI or CFA when starting
color map setting in Cardiac (when Cardiac is
selected in Region).
Others Mode
Selects which of CFI and CFA is to be started when
starting color map setting other than Cardiac (when
selecting Others in Region item).
Color Scale
Selects display of color scale in CFM-mode image

display.
Dual CFM (CFI/CFA)

A function to display dual screen simultaneous CFM
mode display.
Allows color map to be designated individually for
each L/R screen.
<CAUTION>
Don't set CFI the following combination.
Color Map Region is Cardiac: Map1-4,8 and Map5-7
Color Map Region is Others: Map1-7 and Map8
8-16
Q1E-EA0612
(2)CFM-Mode Menu 2
Fig. 8.3.5-2 CFM-Mode Menu 2

REF
Reference frequency in the CFI/CFA mode
PRF
Repetitive frequency of Doppler pulse in CFI/CFA

separate mode image
Priority
Frame Rate
Sensitivity
Priority is given to CFM frame rate

Priority is given to CFM sensitivity.
Restricts PRF of CFM not to exceed PRF set in
Max. Operating PRF when CFM B image scan.
With this, CFM sensitivity can be kept unchanged
even if shifting ROI up/down.
Scan Line Density
Scan line density of CFI/CFA separate mode image.
Color ROI
Marker
Shape
Box
Standard
Switches over display/non-display of frame showing

a range for CFM-mode image display
Switches over shapes of display frame (CFM ROI)
showing a range for CFM-mode image display.
Sector trapezoid for Convex and Sector, and
rectangle for Linear.
Sector from arc center for Convex and Sector, and
rectangle touching body surface for Linear
8-17
Q1E-EA0612
(3) CFM-Mode Menu 3

Color Box
Fixed-B
Width
Height
A function to acquire more precise CFM image by making

display angle of B/W image the same width as that
of CFM region.
Initial range of color display in CFM image display
(angle and width)
Initial range of color display in CFM image display
(Height)
Initial Gain
Initial gain value for CFM-mode (CFI/CFA)
8-18
Q1E-EA0612
(4)CFM-Mode Menu 4

Image Process Allows image details to be adjusted separately for
CFI and CFA
CFM Filter
Packet Size
A. Suppress.
Smoothing
Persistence
Variance
Dynamic Range
Level of low cut filter to remove frequency

components unnecessary for viewing in CFM-mode
image
Minimum unit size to detect color information
in CFM-mode image
Grade of removing body motion in CFM-mode image
display
Designates smoothing process level in CFM-mode
image display
Designates persistence (Color SCC) process
level in CFM-mode image display
Grade (emphasis) of velocity variance when
displaying CFM-mode image with the color map
as velocity-velocity variance or variance
Dynamic Range for CFA-mode image
8-19
Q1E-EA0612
(5)CFM-Mode Menu 5

B-Refresh
Sets refresh scan mode of B-mode image in dual screen

simultaneous display of CFM-mode image and M-mode
image or Doppler mode.
Preference
Mode
Sets CFI and CFA individually.

Designates method of preference to display color
display image or B/W display image (Auto/Manual)
Brightness level of B/W display image to be a reference
threshold when giving preference to display color
display image in executing PRIORITY function in the
CFM-mode.
Level
Peak Hold
Interval Time
ECG On
Time to add color display component in the peak hold
function when displays ECG waveform in the CFM-mode.
ECG Off
Time to add color display component in the peak hold
function when displays no ECG waveform in the CFM-mode.
CFM key
CFI/CFA
CFM off
Sets CFM-mode key behavior on CFM-mode.

CFM-mode (CFI/CFA) is changed alternately.
CFM-mode is off.
8-20
Q1E-EA0612
8.3.6
dTHI Menu
Fig.8.3.6-1 dTHI Menu

Initial mode
It is a setting up whether dTHI mode should be

first or not when the application is changed
over.
Initial Gain
dTHI Offset
B: Initial gain offset value for B-mode in executing dTHI.
M: Initial gain offset value for M-mode in executing dTHI.
Fundamental gain + dTHI offset value
Frequency
Selection of mode in dTHI
HdTHI
Selection of HdTHI mode
Image Process
Dynamic Range Dynamic range in dTHI mode
HI REZ
Execute
Selection of HI REZ mode
Level
HI REZ On Setting of HI REZ level (14)
HI REZ Off Setting of image enhancement level (14)
Gray map
Selection of gray map for dTHI mode
AGC
Decreasing rate of high brightness level
Persistence
Rate of frame interpolating process in dTHI
8-21
Q1E-EA0612
8.3.7
Display
(1) Display Menu 1
Fig. 8.3.6-1 Display Menu 1

Color Rejection
Lower limit to reject velocity in color display
velocity of CFM image
B Color
Execute
B Mode
M Mode
D Mode
Gray Invert
B Mode
MD Mode
Selects execution of pseudo color against B/W image

table map for pseudo color against B-mode image
table map for pseudo color against M-mode image
table map for pseudo color against D-mode image
Selects polarity of screen display of B-mode image
Selects polarity of screen display of M and D-mode
image
Background Level
Switches over brightness of background of B-mode
image.
8-22
Q1E-EA0612
(2) Display Menu 2
Fig. 8.3.6-2 Display Menu 2

B Post Processing
Curve
Shape of the correction curve in correction of
displayed image
coefficient in correction of displayed image

Sat.
Upper limit of brightness to be saturated in
correction of displayed image
Rej.
Lower limit of brightness to be rejected in correction
of displayed image
Cent.
Level of inflection point in correction of the S-shape
curve
M/D Post Processing
Curve
Shape of the correction curve in correction of
displayed image
coefficient in correction of displayed image

Sat.
Upper limit of brightness to be saturated in
correction of displayed image
Rej.
Lower limit of brightness to be rejected in correction
of displayed image
Cent.
Level of inflection point in correction of the S-shape
curve
-Curve
Display On
Designates to display curve on the image.
8-23
Q1E-EA0612
8.3.8
Annotation Menu
Fig. 8.3.7-1 Annotation Menu 1

Region
Designates a terminology set by diagnostic field

to be used in the annotation function
Ordering
Order to display terminology in the initial

terminology screen when starting the annotation
menu.
Alphabetical
Order of alphabet: Arranges terms in the spelled
order.
Purposeful Order of contents: Arranges terms in the order of
contents such as region or clinical terms in
respective diagnostic area.
Arrow Menu
Selects displaying the arrow menu.
8-24
Q1E-EA0612
8.3.9
Measurement menu
Set the measurement menu starting from the
MEAS MENU
key.
(1) Measurement Menu 1
Fig. 8.3.8-1 Measurement Menu 1

Behavior in Freeze-Off
Keep Locus
Specifies whether to automatically clear the

measurement
result
already
displayed
at
Freeze-Off.
ON :
Keeps locus in Freeze-Off.
OFF:
Clears locus in Freeze-Off.
If "Continue Calip, Trace in Freeze-Off"

(described later) is set to OFF, the caliper and
trace measurement stops and disappears, whether
this setting is ON or OFF.
For measurement other than caliper measurement
and trace measurement, if "Continues in freeze
off / review cine" is set to OFF in the property
of the measurement setup menu, the measurement
stops and disappears, whether this setting is ON
8-25
Q1E-EA0612
or OFF.
(For details on the "Continues in freeze off /
review cine" setting, refer to "2.2.2 Measurement
Type" in the instruction manual Measurement
Edition of the ultrasound diagnostic scanner.)
Continue Calip, Trace
Specifies whether to continue
measurement at Freeze-Off.
Calip,
Trace
ON :
The caliper and trace measurement does not

stop at Freeze-Off.
OFF:
The caliper and trace measurement stops

and disappears at Freeze-Off.
(The caliper and trace measurement stops
whether the "Keep Locus In Freeze-Off"
setting described above is set to ON or
OFF.)
NOTICE: "B Freeze ON/OFF" is treated as "Freeze ON/OFF".
8-26
Q1E-EA0612
(2) Measurement menu 2

You can assign the measurement functions you use frequently to
the Measurement Function Key of the Mode Dependent menu or the
Expanded function page.
Figure 8.3.8-2 Measurement Menu 2

Region
Used to select the region that can be measured when

this application is run. Factory settings allow you
to select from Abdo&Others/ Cardiac/ Vasucular. The
selection can be changed only when all of the fields
for the Measurement Function Key and the Expanded
page for measurement have been cleared.
Measurement
List of measurement names that can be performed and
measurement item names for the region that has been
selected.
Special Item
Special items that can be registered only on the
expanded page for measurement.
[Tool] Used to perform unique operations for
measurement rules, such as changing measurement
methods.
[Twins] Used to switch to twins for obstetrical
measurements.
[DGA] Used to display the DGA data entry dialog
for obstetrical measurements.
8-27
Q1E-EA0612
Measurement Function Key

Lists of measurement names and measurement item
names for each mode, displayed for the measurement
keys (F5/F6/F7) on the Mode Dependent menu.
This key cannot be used when "Use expanded page for
measurement" is selected.
Use expanded page for measurement
Select this setting on when you want to use the
expanded page for measurement.
Expanded page for measurement
Lists of measurement names, measurement item names,
and special items for each mode, to be displayed
on the expanded page for measurement.
These fields cannot be used when "Use expanded page
for measurement" is not selected.
Assign button
Used to assign the items selected in the Measurement
list and Special Item to the Measurement Function
Key and Expanded page for measurement.
Delete button
Used to delete the items selected for Measurement
Function Key and Expanded page for measurement.
Delete All button
Used to delete all items assigned to Measurement
Function Key and Expanded page for measurement.
Name of measurements and measurement items which fill the
conditions below are able to assign to the function key.
- The measurement tool of the measurement item is one of
B-Distance, Circumference or B-Area.
- The display property of the measurement item is not 'Appear'.
- The measurement item is in a measurement. (Not in a item group.)
- The Automatic execution property is OFF.
- The measurement type is not LR type.
Only the measurement item name is displayed when the measurement
item is registered. Then it is difficult to distinct only by
the displayed name when the measurement items of the same name
are registered.
In this case, we recommend the name of the measurement item to
be changed by the measurement setup menu.
8-28
Q1E-EA0612
Note:
Following items are able to assign to Function key.
- Measurement items of OB-STD/FetalPara
- Measurement items of OB-STD/AFI
- Measurement items of OB-Todai/FetalPara
(Additional settings)
- Measurement items of OB-OsakaU/FetalPara
- Measurement items of OB-JSUM/FetalPara
(3) Measurement Menu 3
Fig. 8.3.8-3 Measurement Menu 3

Result Frame Lines
Switches over longitudinal length (number of lines) of
display area. If the display area at the bottom of screen
is switched over, number of lines corresponding to it
is displayed.
Initial Location of Result Frame
Sets location to display the Result Frame on image split
(L/R).
The result on Result Frame is displayed at top alignment
or bottom alignment according to the height and position
of the Result Frame. When the "Result" on the Result
8-29
Q1E-EA0612
Frame of this dialog is top alignment, the result is

displayed by top alignment. And when it is bottom
alignment, the result is displayed by bottom alignment.
The position is able to set by each mode. Press the mode
and change the color inside the result frame on the dialog.
Move the position of the result frame by trackball and
click Enter again. So the position is decided.
B/B
B/M
B/D
Fig.8.3.8-4 Moving Result Area

Sets location to display the Result Frame in the B/B
mode image.
Sets location to display the Result Frame in the B/M
mode image. And this setting is used also in dual ODM
mode.
Sets location to display the Result Frame in the B/D
mode image.
8-30
Q1E-EA0612
8.3.10 Body Mark

Sets the Body mark being switched by
button
(1) Body Mark menu 1
Fig. 8.3.9-1 Body Mark Menu 1

Body Mark Region
Menu of Body Mark to be selected by region. Select
to highlight any of them for displaying the mark
corresponding to the Body Mark menu to the right.
Body Mark Menu
Displays marks registered for a diagnostic region.
These may be displayed and selected in the Body Mark
menu of function menu.
If there are more body
marks, clicking the
triangles at the lower
right corner to scroll
pages, next body marks
are displayed.
Fig. 8.3.9-2 Next Page Menu
8-31
Q1E-EA0612
Rotation
Press the center of
button to display Body
Mark in the order of Rotation

Set Probe Mark
Move
Sets the Probe Mark (arrow mark) on Body Mark

to be displayed for each Rotation. The mark
selected with a black dot in Rotation is
displayed.
Sets where the Probe Mark is to be located.
Click the button and use the trackball to move
it. As soon as pressing
ENTER
key after
COLOR
POSI/SIZE
setting, display is changed and selection moves

to the next mark.
When the body mark supporting radial scan is
selected, once the probe mark is moved with
trackball, operation of the probe mark will
become the existing one.
When the UNDO key is pressed,operation of the
probe mark supports radial scan again.
Rotate
Sets in which direction the Probe Mark is to

be rotated. Click Rotate button and use the
trackball to rotate it. As soon as pressing
ENTER
COLOR
POSI/SIZE
key after setting, display is changed
and selection moves to the next mark.

When the body mark supporting radial scan is
selected, rotation of the probe mark supports
radial scan.
Initial
Display On
Switches over setting of the Body Mark when

starting the system or changing Application.
Displays the Body Mark when starting the scanner
(not displayed if not selected).
8-32
Q1E-EA0612
(2) Body Mark Menu 2
Fig. 8.3.9-3 Initial Location of Body mark

Initial Location of Body Mark
Sets location to display the Body Mark.
B
B/B-L
B/B-R
B/MD
Sets location to display the Body Mark in the B-mode

image 1 screen.
Sets location to display the Body Mark at the L screen
side in the B-mode image 2 screen.
Sets location to display the Body Mark at the R side
screen in the B-mode image 2 screen.
Sets location to display the Body Mark in the
simultaneous dual screen display of B-mode image
and M(D)-mode image.
8-33
Q1E-EA0612
8.3.11 Others Menu

(1) Others Menu 1
Fig. 8.3.10-1 Others Menu 1

Cine Memory
Memory Allocation
Designates recording mode of the cine memory
function.
B Mode
B:B-Split
Sets cine memories left/right
independent in the B image dual screen display
Frame No. Display
Displays frame No. at the right side of screen.
8-34
Q1E-EA0612
(2) Others Menu 2

(This menu is displayed when EZU-EK25 is installed.)

Physiology
Sweep Speed
Sets sweep speed of various physiological signal

waveforms.
ECG
Display
Displays ECG waveform.
Position
Vertical position to display waveform

L/R: Left/Right layout
U/D: Up/Down layout
Gain
Amplitude of waveform
HPF
Designates level of the High Pass Filter (DC

variance filter) in the ECG waveform display
function
8-35
Q1E-EA0612
(3) Others Menu 3

Trackball Priority
Track ball priority for Real time, Freeze (B/W)
and Freeze (CFM) is set respectively.
Realtime
Freeze OFF
Freeze (B/W)
Freeze ON with B/W-mode
Freeze (CFM)
Freeze ON with CFM-mode
V.SHIFT
Steering
Probe Mark
Cine
No Select
Sets it to the function for moving an image

vertically
Sets it to the function for steering an image
Sets it to the function for moving a probe mark.
Sets it to the function for playing back of image
memory
Sets it to the no selection
Function Menu
Select Menu
OFF
Mode Depended
Image Process
Physio
Selects the initial display menu of function

menu.
Displays no function menu.
Mode depended menu
Image Process menu
The menu for ECG functions is displayed.
8-36
Q1E-EA0612
3D
The menu for 3D function or real-time 3D function

is displayed. (In case that the 3D Display
unit(Freehand)/3D Display unit(Magnetic
Sensor) or the 3D Display unit(Real-time) has
been installed)
Option
Displays the menu for optional functions (only

when the WideView Software is installed).
User1
The function key that user define.
User2
The function key that user define.
Assign Option Key
Select the functions to be assigned to the
Function Menu displayed when the Options key
is pressed (only when the WideView Software is
installed).
Base
The menu (base menu) for selection of option

is displayed.
Wide View
Displays the Wide View function menu.

Only after the system boots up, it does not
automatically go to Wide View mode.
PinP
Displays the Picture in Picture Unit function

menu.
If the option that is not allowed to use is selected by Assign

Option key, the Base menu is displayed.
US Power
Ultrasound power can be switched over in three

levels.
High : H
Middle : M
Low : L
(See 4.8 Controls Affecting the Acoustic Output)
8-37
Q1E-EA0612
(4) Others Menu 4

New Patient
Execute Application
Designates whether to execute calling the
Application set item when New Patient key ON
or not
Save Measurement Result Automatically
This sets whether the measurement result is
saved or not with New Patient key pressed.
Speaker
Volume
Sets functions of the Speaker

Initial setting of Speaker Volume
Preset Operation
Select
No. Display
Preset Operation is set up.

Preset Operation to be used is chosen.
It is a setup of whether to display a step number.
NOTICE: When the application menu of pencil CW probe is setup, The preset
operation which registered Body Mark can be chosen. However,
it is not displayed on a screen.
8-38
Q1E-EA0612
End Exam key

Clear measurement results, LMP and DGA
It is possible to select whether the measured
result, LMP and DGA should be eliminated or not
when the examination end key is pressed.
<CAUTION>
When this setting pressed the End Exam key with a state of ON,
a measurement result is erased. Therefore, please do not measure
it again after having pressed the End Exam key. The measurement
result that user stored before pressing the End Exam key is deleted
when user stored a measurement result after a re-measurement.
When user measure it again after having pressed the End Exam
key, please press the New Patient button before measuring it,
and input patient information again.
Image Filing
Preset
Preset used with this application is chosen.
Information
Display the set information about the selected

preset.
8-39
Q1E-EA0612
8.4
Export/Import Menu
By using Export/Import function, APPLICATION can be saved in the
external memory medium or read from the external memory medium.
8.4.1
Opening Export/Import Menu
Pressing "Export/Import" in the Application menu displays the

Export/Import Menu.
8.4.2
Details of Menu
Fig.8.4.2-1 Export/Import Menu

Probe View:
Names of Probes in the system are displayed.
Application View:
Applications of selected Probe are displayed.
Media:
Select the memory medium for export/import. It
can be selected from the following two kinds of
media.
DVD(CD)
USB Memory
"Export":
"Import":
Rename:
Delete:
Save to Media:
Close:
Export the application selected from the scanner

unit to the memory medium.
Import the application selected from the memory
medium to the scanner unit.
The name of selected application is renamed.
The selected application is deleted.
The edited result is saved in the memory media.
Until this button is pressed, the edited result
is not saved to the medium.
The dialog is closed.
8-40
Q1E-EA0612
NOTICE:
- If Close button is pressed, dialog like Fig. 8.4.2-2 will
be displayed.
Fig.8.4.2-2 Confirmation of reboot dialog

Please reboot the system, after pressing [OK] button, when
the application data that was exported by the following software
version is imported.
software version (V05-)
- Please use DVD-RAM for preserving it safely.
8.4.3
Export Application
By selecting the application to be saved in the memory medium from

Application View and pressing "Export" button, the application is
exported to memory medium.
<CAUTION>
When there is no application data in the media, message like

Fig.8.4.3-1 will be displayed. Please press OK button.
Fig.8.4.3-1 No Application Data in Media

When there is application data of different version in the media,
message like Fig.8.4.3-2 will be displayed. Please press OK
button and use a new memory medium.
8-41
Q1E-EA0612
Fig.8.4.3-2 Application Data of Different Version

When there is application in the media which has the same Probe
name and application name as the one to be exported, a similar
name will be attached to the exported application. After that,
the name can be edited by pressing "Rename" button.
The application data will not be saved to the medium until "Save
to Media" button is pressed. Please press "Save to Media" when
saving application to the medium.
When press "Close" button without saving application to the
medium, message like Fig.8.4.3-3 will be displayed.
Fig.8.4.3-3 Close without Saving

Press "Yes" to save the application to medium and return to
Application Menu.
Press "No" to return to Application Menu without saving
application to medium.
Press "Cancel" to return to Export/Import Menu.
8.4.4
Import Application
By selecting the application to be saved to the scanner unit from

the medium and pressing "Import" button, the application is imported
to the scanner unit.
<CAUTION>
When there is application of higher version in the medium, or

the model is different, or the language is different, the
application can not be imported to the scanner unit. Message
like Fig.8.4.4-1 will be displayed.
8-42
Q1E-EA0612
Fig.8.4.4-1 Different Model or Language

When the imported application has the same ID with the default
one in the system, message like Fig.8.4.4-2 will be displayed.
Fig.8.4.4-2 Overwrite Default Application

Press "Yes" to overwrite the default application of scanner
unit.
Press "No" to append the application to scanner unit.
Press "Cancel" to return to the Export/Import Menu.
When there are ten applications of users defined in one Probe,
"Import" button will be ghost. Application cannot be imported
to that Probe.
When there is application in the scanner unit which has the same
Probe name and application name as the one to be imported, a
similar name will be attached to the imported application. After
that, the name can be edited by pressing "Rename" button.
Imported application cannot be saved to scanner unit "Save"
button of Application Menu is pressed.
8-43
Q1E-EA0612
Chapter 9 Image memory unit

9.1
Image memory
As a large capacity image memory unit is incorporated in the scanner,
it is possible to store and replay easily image information acquired
during the examination without distortion of image quality.
(1) Cine-memory function

This is for storing live images and it is possible to store images
of designated mode.
Continuous record mode
With this mode live images can be recorded continuously without
any gap. In the time of replay it is possible to replay all the
recorded images in continuous loop (speed variable), in forward
or reverse frame by frame.
Automatic heart beat detection mode (ECG on).
ECG wave is recorded together with live images.
In replaying time the continuous loop between the first R-wave
and the last wave is replayed. So, it is possible to observe
replay images with good continuity between both ends of loop.
In addition forward feed or reverse feed of every frame is allowed
so that all the recorded images can be displayed.
M (D) image record mode
M-mode image and D-mode image can record.
(2) Image filing function
Store to Hard Disk function
It is possible to store images being displayed on the monitor as
BMP (bit map) images up to 20GB. Retrieve of stored images is easy
so that this is best suited for a temporal record during the
examination. This mode can be used in B/M, B/D, 1 image of M-mode
and D-mode, and 2 display images (one freeze image or two live images).
Image Transfer function
Images are converted into single image in BMP, TIFF and JPEG, or
live images of AVI format, and those can be transferred in DVD MULTI
Drive or Floppy Disk Drive. It is also possible to convert and
transfer the image stored at the hard disk.
9-1
Q1E-EA0612
Filing function
This function is to retrieve and manage image and it functions to
read stored images freely and to delete unnecessary images and
replace them with new ones.
NOTICE:
To insert a DVD-RAM/DVD+RW/CD-RW, press the eject button to open
the tray, and place the disk on the tray.
<CAUTION>
1. There is a limit in the capacity of the Hard Disk when you
preserve images on the Hard Disk. Moreover, there is a
possibility to influence the movement of the system according
to the capacity, and delete images of the Hard Disk, please
in that case. Delete it after confirming the backup to more
than two kinds of media without fail when you delete important
images. After deleting it, perform "DB Repair".
2. Hitachi cannot be held responsible for any data loss due to
an accident, malfunction, or erroneous operation, so be sure
to backup any important data.
3. In the time of image retrieve, do not remove the probe being
selected from the probe connector. If it is removed, there
may be a case that scanner unit may function erroneously.
4. Do not eject the media while DVD MULTI Drive or FD is
transferring image data, in addition to the device
malfunctioning, the media may become corrupted, and therefore
unusable.
5. To eject a DVD-RAM, DVD+RW, CD-RW, be sure to use a menu,
not the Eject button on the DVD MULTI Drive. If you use the
Eject button to eject a DVD-RAM, DVD+RW, CD-RW, the DVD-RAM,
DVD+RW, CD-RW may become non-rewritable.
6. Please do not set the broken media. Equipment may not operate
normally.
9-2
Q1E-EA0612
9.2
9.2.1
Store to Hard Disk function
(1) Record of image

When
is pressed, an ultrasound image at that moment is recorded

S-WRITE
in the Hard Disk.

NOTICE:
Max. 20GB can be stored in the Hard Disk.
Recorded data is the ultrasound image including "Main menu",
"Annotation menu", etc. and a part of dialog.
The dialog and the screen that can be recorded are the following.
- Various setting dialogs
- Patient Menu dialog
- 1-image display at retrieved
- Measurement Report
- Graph for OB measurement
The dialog and the screen that cannot be recorded are the following.
- Various message dialogs
- APPLICATION Menu
- Filing dialog
- Multi-image display at retrieved
- Print preview dialog
- Measurement Result Filing
- Anther patients Measurement Report
As for the retrieved image, Patient information in the image is
recorded.
The patient information for the recorded dialog of the
measurement("Measurement Report" and "Graph for Fetal Age") is
the current patient information.
Memory is hold even if the power is put off.
While image is being recorded,
position in the display.
9-3
mark is displayed at upper right
Q1E-EA0612
<CAUTION>
When attempting to record images exceeding 20GB, the following
message appears and the images cannot be stored in the Hard
Disk. Delete files in the Hard Disk or transfer them to the
other media.
Fig. 9.2.1-1 Hard Disk full message

If the remaining capacity of a hard disk decreases, the message
shown below will be displayed at the time of equipment starting.
Please delete the file in a hard disk or transfer to media etc.
Fig. 9.2.1-2 Hard Disk space shortage message

The following message is displayed, when ID or name of Patient
is not inputted and being stored. Please choose [Yes], when
you store then. Please choose [No], when you store after
inputting ID or Name.
Fig. 9.2.1-3 Nopatient name message

NOTICE:
You cannot transmit freeze images when Freeze OFF.
The dialog and the Patient menu, the filing dialog are
recorded by setting of the Color Image.
Please refer to "9.2.2 (3)Details of filing (b)Color select
for filing Image" for setting.
When dialog is displayed, mark
is not displayed.
In this case, please check the LED status of key. When dialog
is disappeared, the mark
9-4
comes to be displayed.
Q1E-EA0612
(2) Filing dialog

When
is pressed during freeze ON, Filing dialog for retrieving

READ
recorded images is displayed.
Selected (blue frame)
Fig. 9.2.1-4 Filing dialog

NOTICE:
If the amount of recorded data is large, a title bar may

appear in the ultrasound-image display area or image
refreshing may temporarily stop. If either of these
phenomena occurs, wait until the data loading terminates.
<CAUTION>
It is possible that preview images( thumb nail) can not be

refreshed or images can not be displayed if the total size
of searched data is more than 1GB. If it happens, please restrict
the conditions and search again. Please refer to "9.2.4 Filing
dialog (2)" for details.
When the USB memory other than recommended are connected the
system, the Filing dialog might not be displayed. At that time,
please pull out the USB memory.
9-5
Q1E-EA0612
(a) Selection of image

In the center of Filing dialog reduced images (thumbnail) of
recorded images are displayed. In case there are more than 10
images, operate """" at right side or a cursor (scroll bar)
to switch images.
When the image to be replayed is clicked, it is surrounded by
blue frame.
Next, if another thumbnail is clicked, the selected thumbnail
is surrounded with blue frame. If click it again, the blue frame
is erased and the selection is released.
If Select all button at lower left is clicked, all images are
selected.
(b) Image retrieve
When the Retrieve button is clicked, only the selected images
are displayed (refer to 9.2.6).
9-6
Q1E-EA0612
9.2.2
Set up Filing
The address of the image transferring by the S-WRITE key or the M-WRITE
key, a file format, etc. are set up.
Image Filing in Main Menu/Set up is chosen and "Set up Filing" dialog
is started.
(1) S-Write assignment (Single Image Transfer)
Fig. 9.2.2-1 Set Up Filing dialog(S-WRITE)

With
key the address of image record is set.

S-WRITE
a) Hard Disk
Images are recorded in the incorporated Hard Disk.
As for the file format, "BMP" or "Same as External Device" can
be selected.
b) External Device
This is to set up a recording format of single image and address
of recording drive.
File format: When "" is clicked, a selection window is opened
and it is possible to convert data into BMP, TIFF, JPEG. In
TIFF format the compressing method are selectable among None
(no-compression) and Pack Bitz.
NOTICE1
Files saved in JPEG format can only be displayed on

the same model as the equipment that saved the files.
9-7
Q1E-EA0612
NOTICE2
Saving images in JPEG format will result in some

degradation of image quality. Keep this in mind, and
use this format as long as the loss in quality does
not affect your diagnosis.
Address (Destination):
With this it is possible to record single images to DVD MULTI
Drive, Floppy Disk Drive and USB Memory. Only a selectable
drive unit is displayed in the window. Because the USB memory
has aimed at temporary use, it is displayed in the gray on
the filing dialog. Please specify the transfer address with
"7.6 Image Data Transfer Menu".
<CAUTION>
"Transfer Address" is not updated, even if you connect the USB Memory
to the ultrasound scanner with "Set up Filing dialog" opened. Please
close "Set up Filing dialog" and open it again.
(2) M-WRITE assignment(Multi Image transfer)
Fig. 9.2.2-2 Set Up Filing dialog(M-WRITE)

This is to set up a recording format of live images and address
of recording device.
9-8
Q1E-EA0612
NOTICE
About the items which can be set up only at the time

of Real-time Archiving software option, there are gray
display.
One of the 8 record conditions can be connected with an application

or several ones.
Record is executed with the record condition which is set in the
Preset that connected to applications.
Make the record set according to the diagnoses domain and use.
When you change correlation of application and preset, please carry
out from "8.3.10 (4) Others Menu 4".
Probe1
Preset1(Abdo&Others)
Application1(Abdomen
Mode: F-Fout
Application2(Cardiac
Tool: Manual
Format: AVI
Application3Abdomen
Application4(Abdomen
Preset2(Cardiac)
Application5Circulate
Mode: R-Rout
Tool: Auto 3beat
Format: AVI
Probe2
Application1Cardiac
Preset3(Cardiac2)
Mode: All
Application2Other
Format: AVI
Application3Cardiac
Application4Other
Preset4(User1)
Mode: All
Format: AVI
Fig. 9.2.2-3 Connection of Application and Preset
9-9
Q1E-EA0612
Preset It is possible to select Preset to edit or change the

name of Preset.
Open the Combo box and the following will be showed
(Shipment from manufacturer).
1) Abdo&Others
2) Cardiac
3) Cardiac2
4) User1
5) User2
6) User3
7) User4
8) User5
Please select the Preset to edit. If the preset is changed,
the set value from (2) to (4) will be changed too according
to the Preset automatically.
And, if adapt the cursor to the name of preset then click,
the name of current preset can be changed. Change the
name if necessary.
Mode: When "" is clicked, a selection window is opened and
it is possible to select a mode among F-Fout, R-Rout and All.
F-F out set up is effective only in the cine memory mode and
R-R out set up is effective only in the ECG mode.
F-F out Function to transfer frame: This is to record
a series of continued frames selected in
discretion as one file.
R-R out Function to transfer heart beat: This is to
record a series of frames in R-wave time phase
selected in discretion as one file.
All Function to transfer all of cine memory: This
is to record all the cine image as one file.
Items tool and Number can not be selected.
Tool: This is to change over the start end setting of live
image.
Auto Frames selected in next item, number, are
automatically recorded.
Manual Designate starting and ending points for
transferring images in the cine memory.
9-10
Q1E-EA0612
In the case of R-R out, the image is created

by R wave from R wave containing the frame chosen
arbitrarily.
Number:
In F-F out This is to record as same numbers of frame as
images selected.
(All/10/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100)
In R-R out This is to record as same numbers of images as
heart beats selected.
(All/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10)
File Format: When "" is clicked, a selection window is opened
and it is possible to convert data into AVI,
AVI(Compression).
Address (designation of recording device): Only the drive which
can be selected is displayed in the window.
NOTICE1:
Files recorded in AVI format (compressed using

Microsoft Video 1 compression) can only be played on
the same model as the equipment that recorded the files.
NOTICE2:
Recording files in AVI format (compressed using

Microsoft Video 1 compression) will result in some
degradation of image quality. Keep this in mind, and
use this format as long as the loss in quality does
not affect your diagnosis.
<CAUTION>
"Transfer Address" is not updated, even if you connect the USB Memory
to the ultrasound scanner with "Set up Filing dialog" opened. Please
close "Set up Filing dialog" and open it again.
9-11
Q1E-EA0612
(3) Details of filing

If a [Details of filing] button is clicked, Set Up details of filing
will open. Here, a setup about filing other than Set Up Filing dialog
is possible.
Fig. 9.2.2-4 Set Up details of filing

a) Timing of Transfer
It switches whether it transferring or printing for image printer
for every image, or it transferring or printing for every patient.
- Every image(film)
It is transferring for every image.
It prints by the image printer for
every film.
- Every patient
It transferring or printing for
every patient.
The image data will not be
transferred until you perform one
of following operations;
- Pressing the END Exam key
- Clicking the New Patient button
by Patient Menu
NOTICE:
When using a DVD-RAM/DVD+RW/CD-RW, always select a transfer
method for Every patient.
9-12
Q1E-EA0612
When you transferring or printing an image for every patient,

please refer to 9.2.8.
When you have selected a transfer method for Every patient, make
sure to perform one of the following operations after the
examination finishes;
- Pressing the END Exam key
- Clicking the New Patient button by Patient Menu
The image data will not be transferred until you perform one of
these operations.
b) Color select for filing Image
Color set up at the time of image output is changed.
- B/W Image
For B-mode, M-mode and Doppler-mode
image
- Color Image
For image in color mode, and B-color
mode.
Images can be recorded either by B/W mode or Color mode.
NOTICE:
The dialog and the Patient menu, the filing dialog are recorded
by setting of the Color Image.
c) Slide show
Time for automatic change of image display is set in retrieving
time of image file.
d) Compatible writing mode
The transfer method of a image is changed.
At V03 on and after version, the image is transferred with the
folder structure divided into the hierarchy.
When you read the image created with V03 on and after version
equipment by old version equipment, please make it Check On.
Both the image created with V03 on and after version equipment
and the image created with old version equipment can be read with
V03 on and after version equipment.
<CAUTION>
When you read the image created with this equipment by old version
equipment, it is not possible to read normally, and re-create
DB by Utility dialog.
9-13
Q1E-EA0612
e) Masking area
The image can be copied without personal information when copying
it from the filing dialog.
The masking copy paints out a set part in the image and deletes
patient information (Name, Birth date etc.). The following 4
settings can be done in the painting out area. Please refer to
Fig.9.2.2-5 for the masking area.
- ID, Name
- Hospital Name
- Examination date
- Added info in basic area
Hospital Name
Added info in basic area
ID, Name
Examination date
Fig. 9.2.2-5 Masking area

(f) Display of Move button on Filing Dialog
When you want to display of Move button on Filing Dialog, please
make it Check On.
9-14
Q1E-EA0612
(4) Network Folder

When Network Folder button is clicked, Network Folder dialog
window is opened. (This can be set when the optionally available
Network Interface is loading.)
Choose the folder of a transferring place and click the Register
button.
Then, a click of the OK button displays the folder name registered
into Address of Filing Setup Dialog.
When you delete the registered folder, click the Delete button.
When you cancel the changed contents, click Cancel button.
Fig. 9.2.2-6 Network Folder dialog

(5) DICOM
DICOM Server: When DICOM Server button is clicked, DICOM server
set up Dialog is opened.
(This can be set when the optionally available
Network Interface and DICOM Transfer Software
are loading.)
Modality WorkList: Clicking Modality WorkList button opens the
DICOM Modality
WorkList Setup menu. (This can be set in the system
loading with the DICOM WorkList Software in
addition to the option to set up the above DICOM
Server.)
9-15
Q1E-EA0612
Details of DICOM: When Details of DICOM button clicked, Set

Up details of DICOM dialog is opened.
Network Interface and DICOM Transfer software
are loading.)
Storage Commitment: When Storage Commitment button clicked,
Setup Storage Commitment dialog is opened.
DICOM Transfer Software are loading.)
(6) Set up Log file
This is a set up menu for Log File which records the history of
image transfer.
It works to set up, edit and delete the Log File. If Log information
is not selected, the display of this menu can not be opened.
Refer to Appendix D for details.
Fig. 9.2.2-7 Log File set up menu
9-16
Q1E-EA0612
9.2.3
Transfer of Image
(1) Single Image Transfer

Set up the Transferring place of the S-WRITE key with reference to
9.2.2 Set up Filing. When the S-WRITE key is pressed, a display image
is transferred to the set-up place.
(2) Multi Image Transfer
Set up the Transferring place of the M-WRITE key with reference to
9.2.2 Set up Filing. When the M-WRITE key is pressed, Multi Image
Transfer starts.
<CAUTION>
High load is applied to CPU during AVI creation. When this state
continues, keep in mind that time may be overdue. In addition, the
delay of this time is automatically corrected, when equipment is
rebooted.
When the destination to save is network folder, it may become a
transferring error if transferring is immediately started after
equipment is rebooted.
When the destination to transferring is DVD+RW/CD-RW and compatible
writing mode is on in SetUp details of filing dialog, over 1,000
images cannot be transferred. Even if compatible writing mode is
off, when ID and name of the images which is on same examinations
date is same or is not set up, over 1,000 images cannot be transferred.
Please use DVD-RAM to transferring of image.
USB memory is not suitable to save safely, because it is in the
state that can be removed at any time. Please use it to save temporary.
NOTICE:
If the transfer destination is a network folder, and you attempt
transfer immediately after the device is started, a transfer error
may occur. In this case, wait two minutes, and perform transfer
again.
If no transfer destination is selected, or the transfer destination
and file format do not match, the S-WRITE key and the M-WRITE
key will be disabled. In this case, check the settings for the
transfer destination and file format.
9-17
Q1E-EA0612
(3) Change temporarily address of transferring

Image Filing just below Main Menu can change temporarily address of
transferring. This address is held until it turns off system or Setup
Filing menu performs a re-setup. Refer to 9.2.2 Set up Filing for
the change method of an item.
In the Image Filing dialog, when you click the [OK] button, the transfer
destination will change momentarily, and the changes will be reflected
by the S-WRITE key and the M-WRITE key.
For more information on performing changes, refer to 9.2.2 Set up
Filing.
Fig. 9.2.3-1 Image Filing dialog

<CAUTION>
The following message is displayed, when ID or name of Patient is not
inputted and being stored. Please choose [Yes], when you store then.
Please choose [No], when you store after inputting ID or Name.
Fig. 9.2.3-2 No patient name message

<CAUTION>
To eject a DVD-RAM/DVD+RW/CD-RW, be sure to use a menu.
Refer to 7.10 Disk Menu
9-18
Q1E-EA0612
9.2.4
Filing dialog
When
is pressed during freeze ON, Filing dialog for retrieving
recorded images is displayed.
READ
<CAUTION>
If the READ key is pressed for the first time after a power supply
injection when a setup of the S-WRITE key is a network folder,
connection may go wrong. This phenomenon occurs by the performance
of PC of a connection place, and setup. Once, Close a filing dialog
and press the READ key again.
It is possible that preview images (thumb nail) can not be refreshed
or images can not be displayed if the total size of searched data
is more than 1GB. If it happens, please restrict the conditions
and search again.
When the USB memory other than recommended are connected the system,
the Filing dialog might not be displayed. At that time, please pull
out the USB memory.
NOTICE
If there are many images to be displayed, it may take some

time to display their thumbnails.
If there are many images to be displayed, a title bar may appear
in the ultrasound-image display area or image refreshing may
temporarily stop. If either of these phenomena occurs, wait
until the data loading terminates.
Fig. 9.2.4-1 Filing dialog
9-19
Q1E-EA0612
(1) Drive
Fig. 9.2.4-2 Drive

NOTICE:
This switches the read drive of the

image. When "" button is clicked, a
sub-window is opened to show the drive
from which images can be read at
present.
While you are loading, transferring, or deleting a large amount

of image data, if you change the image loading destination,
a title bar may appear in the ultrasound-image display area
or image refreshing may temporarily stop.
Wait until the processing terminates. The normal status will
be recovered when the processing terminates.
"Drive"(reading address) is not updated, even if you connect
the USB Memory to the ultrasound scanner with "Filing dialog"
opened. Please close "Filing dialog" and open it again.
<CAUTION>
It is possible that preview images( thumb nail) can not be
refreshed or images can not be displayed if the total size of
searched data is more than 1GB. If it happens, please restrict
the conditions and search again. Please refer to "9.2.4 Filing
dialog (2)" for details.
(2) Search
This is to retrieve recorded image by a patient information
or date.
a) Auto search
When "Current patient" or "Date (Today)"
is chosen by Search Item, it searches
automatically.
Fig.9.2.4-3 Search Item

Current patient: Current patient images are displayed.
Date(Today)
: Todays images are displayed.
9-20
Q1E-EA0612
b) Keyword search
A keyword is inputted and searched with search item when "ID,
Name", "Date (YYYYMMDD)", "Keyword", "Application", and
"Arbitrary keyword" are chosen.
ID,Name
: Search by the patient ID, Name
Date(YYYYMMDD) : Search by the date(YYYYMMDD)
Keyword
: Search by the keyword (*1)
Application
: Search by the application (*1)
Arbitrary keyword: Search by the patient ID and Name and so on
Transfer Status : Search by the status
The image corresponding to the condition can
be narrowed by selecting the following by the
keyword.
Successful : Image in which transfer
succeeds.
Failed
: Image in which transfer fails.
Wait
: Image preserved only on hard
disk.
Temporary : Image temporarily preserved on
hard disk by every patient
transfer.
(*1)DICOM image cannot do search by application and arbitrary
keyword.
Result of the search displays only the image the character
sequence of a keyword and whose character sequence for reference
correspond from a head. When you search the character sequence
in the middle of for reference, please put * into a keyword.
(The example of search)
Keyword
Result of search
OKA
OKADA, OKAYAMA
*OKA*
OKADA, OKAYAMA, YAMAOKA
After inputting a keyword, when the Search button is clicked,
the search in the designated drive in started. Corresponding
search data are displayed on right side of dialog and at same
time thumbnails are also displayed.
9-21
Q1E-EA0612
Fig.9.2.4-4 Search of Images

This search narrows down. When you research from the beginning,
click the Search Clear button.
c) Show all
If "show all" is chosen by search item and the search button
is clicked, all the images in a drive will be displayed.
<CAUTION>
It is possible that preview images(thumb nail) can not be refreshed
or images can not be displayed if the total size of searched
data is more than 1GB. If it happens, please restrict the
conditions and search again.
NOTICE : When displaying all the images in a drive,
if there are many images, a display will take time.
When there are no corresponding data, a message as shown below
is displayed.(Fig.9.2.4-5). Try to search again.
Fig.9.2.4-5 Search no match message
9-22
Q1E-EA0612
(3) Search Clear

Search conditions are cleared.
When you research from the beginning, click the Search Clear
button.
(4) Browse on Net
This can be operated when the optionally available Network
Interface is loading. When an image file on the network is
temporarily to be retrieved, click this button to select the
display folder.
(5) Select all/Select clear
This is to select all thumbnails being displayed (including other
ones not displayed than 10 images displayed) and to release the
selection of selected thumbnails.
(6) Retrieve
Images data of selected thumbnails are retrieved.
When tow or more images are selected at the same time, the display
is different according to the selected number.
2~4 images selected: 4-image display
5~9 images selected: 9-image display
More than 10 images selected: 16-image display
(7) Merge
This is to copy selected thumbnails image to Merge Folder.
If it is necessary in editing image data, hold the data temporarily
in Merge Folder.
(8) Copy
This is to copy image data to another disk. Refer to "9.2.5 Copy
and Move".
(9) Move
This is to move image data to another disk. Refer to "9.2.5 Copy
and Move".
This button is non-display by default. Refer to "9.2.2 Set up
Filing" when you want to display this button.
9-23
Q1E-EA0612
(10) Log Info

This function is used for recording information regarding devices
for data transfer as a Log file.
After the Log Info. button is clicked, by operating according
to the messages, Fig.9.2.4-6 Log search menu is displayed.
Refer to Appendix D for details.
Fig.9.2.4-6 Log search menu

(a) Drive
This switches the read drive of the Log file.
(b) Search
This is to search Log information by patient name and so
on.
(b-1) Item
This is to change the search item.
(b-2) Keyword
This is to input the Keyword for search from the keyboard.
When the Search button is clicked after inputting the Keyword,
the search in the designated drive is started.
(c) Show all Log file
This is to display all Log information.
(11) Delete
Images of selected thumbnails can be deleted.
If the Delete button is clicked after clicking the Select All
button, it can all delete.
9-24
Q1E-EA0612
(12) Modify ID
Modify ID and Name of Patient.
[The procedure of modification]
-
Choose Patient to modification by ID and Name list.

Click the Modify ID button.
Make modification of ID or name on ID Modify ID dialog.
Do not enter the following characters:
"=" "." "\" "|"
Click the Update button.
Fig.9.2.4-7 Modify ID dialog

NOTICE:
When correction of ID or Name is made, the save folder name
or file name of image data are not corrected. When this image
is copied or moved, the save folder name and file name are
created by corrected ID and name.
(13) Image print
The selected image is printed to PC printer or a DICOM printer.
In order to print to PC printer, refer to Appendix I Using the
PC Printer.
DICOM Image Printing Software of an option is required in order
to print to a DICOM printer.
(14) Status
(a) The situation of the availability of a selection drive is
displayed.
The following information is displayed.
- Availability (Images)
- Free space
- The total capacity of the selected images
Availability (Images) displays how many numbers the still
image of a color can save about by the present format.
9-25
Q1E-EA0612
NOTICE:
When the format of images compressed such as JPEG (Lossy)
and TIFF (Pack Bitz) is chosen, the size of a picture is
decided after compression. Therefore, it is before and after
transfer and size may not change.
Free space
Availability (Images)
The total capacity of the selected images
Fig.9.2.4-8 Status
(b) The progress report of the operation(Merge, Copy, Move and
Delete) is displayed.
The running process *1 changes respectively and the progress
of each process is displayed.(Refer to the following)
Merge
: "Converting..." "Merging..." "Update DB..."
Copy
: "Checking..." "Converting..." "Transferring

..." "Update DB..."
Move
: "Checking..." "Converting..." "Transferring

..." "Deleting..." "Update DB..."
Delete : "Deleting..." "Update DB..."

NOTICE*1 The running process
Checking
: Checking transfer place's condition.
Converting
: Converting format of images.
Transferring : Transferring images.

Deleting
: Deleting images.
Update DB
: Updating records of the database.
(15) Q/R
The image transferred to the DICOM server is searched and
displayed.
(This can be use when the optionally available DICOM Transfer
Software and DICOM Query/Retrieve Software are loading.)
9-26
Q1E-EA0612
(16) Utility
The function which is not used is performed in usual.
Fig.9.2.4-9 Utility dialog

DB Repair
DB of a transfer drive is re-created.
In the following case, please re-create DB.
When the image which must have been sent is not displayed
-
When thumbnail without the image is displayed

When the same image is displayed on two or more thumbnail
When Read key is pressed and the message of Fig. 9.2.4-10
is displayed
When the message of "A sharing violation occurred ~" is
displayed.
Fig.9.2.4-10 DB access error message

Please appoint the re-created drive and click [DB Repair] button.
The message of Fig.9.2.4-11 is displayed.
Please check the contents of a message, and if satisfactory,
click the [Yes] button.
Fig.9.2.4-11 The message of DB re-creation
9-27
Q1E-EA0612
NOTICE:
"DB" is the database file which manages an image file.
It takes DB Repair about 5 minutes per 10,000 images.
<CAUTION>
Please do not access the drive during DB creation. DB may break.
(17) Close
Filing dialog is closed and returns to the original display.
(18) The expansion display of an image
When UNDO key is pressed on thumbnail, an expansion image appears.
Fig.9.2.4-12 The expansion display of an image
9-28
Q1E-EA0612
9.2.5
Copy and Move

When the Copy button of Filing dialog is clicked, Copy dialog
can start and can copy the selected image to other drives.
When the Move button of Filing dialog is clicked, Move dialog
can start and can move the selected image to other drives. Since
this movement, the original image is deleted.
The image chosen when the OK button was clicked is copied or
moved to a designated drive.
When the media is CD-RW/DVD+RW:

A message as Fig.9.2.5-3 is displayed when the OK button was clicked.
Key operation cannot be used during transferring image data to
CD-RW/DVD+RW. The image chosen when the OK button of Fig.9.2.5-3
was clicked is copied or moved to a designated CD-RW/DVD+RW. It
returns to Filing dialog when the Cancel button of Fig.9.2.5-3
was clicked.
Fig.9.2.5-1 Copy dialog
Fig.9.2.5-2 Move dialog
9-29
Q1E-EA0612
Fig.9.2.5-3 Confirmation dialog

Drive:
This switches the transferring drive of the image.
When "" is clicked, recording devices to which

images can be transferred are displayed.
File Convert:
With this function it is possible to transfer data
by converting them into other formats than BMP and
AVI. For that click "" , then below mentioned
converting formats column is displayed.
From BMP to: TIFF format or JPEG format is selectable other
than BMP format. In case of TIFF format 2 kinds
of data compressing methods, NON (no-compression)
or Pack Bitz are selectable.
From AVI to: AVI [No compression] and AVI (Compression)
[Microsoft Video 1 system] can be chosen.
From AVIm to: DICOM JPEG (MJPEG) can be chosen when the
optionally available DICOM Transfer Software is
loading.
Browse on Net: This can be operated when the optionally
available Network Interface is loading.
When an image is temporarily to be transferred to
the network server, the destination to be
transferred can be set by selecting this button.
without personal information:
Please click "" when you copy masking. When OK
clicks on a button on the copy dialog, the message
in Fig.9.2.5-4 is displayed. Please confirm the
copied image, and click the yes button. The image
preserved by DICOM format and the image to which
dialog is displayed cannot be copied without
personal information. Please select the image after
9-30
Q1E-EA0612
confirming the thumbnail image and the format.

The masking copy paints out a set part in the image
and deletes patient information (Name, Birth date
etc.). Moreover, Patient ID is changed to "M_[Date
when masking was done]".
Fig.9.2.5-4 Masking copy message

NOTICE:
It is possible to transfer it by converting it into the DICOM
image by using the file convert function if it is an image
of the BMP, AVI or AVIm format. However, because Patient ID
is changed, transferring to the DICOM server cannot be
recommended.
The TIF(PackBitz) format is converted into the TIFF image of
non-compression.
There are a change in the size of the file and deterioration
in the image because a nonreciprocal compressed image(JPEG,
AVIc fromat) makes the image again.
The AVIm format changes to the AVIc format, and there are a
change in the size of the file and deterioration in the image.
If the total size of the selected graphics files is large,
it may take some time to transfer them. For example, if the
total size is 580 MB, it may take about 15 minutes to transfer
the files.
Do not press the ON/STANDBY switch while images are being
transferred. If you do it, the images will not be recorded.
During transfer, a title bar may appear in the ultrasound-image
display area or image refreshing may temporarily stop. Wait
until the transfer terminates. The normal status will be
recovered when the transfer terminates.
When DVD+RW(CD-RW), etc. are replaced with a copy dialog and
a move dialog opened, the information on a Free space is not
updated. Please rechoose the drive of DVD+RW(CD-RW), etc.
again.
9-31
Q1E-EA0612
"Drive"(transfer address) is not updated, even if you connect

the USB Memory to the ultrasound scanner with a "copy dialog"
and a "move dialog" opened. Please close the dialog and open
it again.
The calculation methods of the capacity of images and the
availability a drive differ a little. Please use the
availability of a drive as a standard.
As for the DICOM JPEG image converted from the AVIm image,
brightness may look highly rather than AVIm by the difference
in data development method.
NOTICE:
When images are transferred to external device and network folders,
Folders forwarded by setting the Compatible writing mode (ON/OFF)
is different. Please refer to "9.2.2 (3)Details of filing" for
the Compatible writing mode.
[Compatible writing mode] : OFF
Folders are made by the hierarchy of [Last Name_First
Name_MI_ID]-[Examination date] under the destination
folder(*). And, images are transferred to the [Examination
date] folder.
(*)EUBImages folder in case of the external device
Folders are named based

on [Examination date].
Images are named based on

[Last Name_First Name_MI_Creation Date].
Folders are named based on

[Last Name_First Name_MI_ID].
[Compatible writing mode] : ON

Images are transferred to the destination folder(*).
(*)EUBImages folder in case of the external device
9-32
Q1E-EA0612
Images are named based on

[Last Name_First Name_MI_Creation Date].
<CAUTION>
When the destination to transferring is DVD+RW/CD-RW and
compatible writing mode is on in SetUp details of filing dialog,
over 1,000 images cannot be transferred. Even if compatible
writing mode is off, when ID and name of the images which is
on same examinations date is same or is not set up, over 1,000
images cannot be transferred.
USB memory is not suitable to save safely, because it is in
the state that can be removed at any time. Please use it to
save temporary. If you save it safely, please use DVD-RAM.
9-33
Q1E-EA0612
9.2.6
Retrieve of Images
If thumbnail images are selected in Filing dialog and click
[Retrieve] button, it will be in an image retrieve state.
If a thumbnail picture is chosen by Filing dialog and the [Retrieve]
button is clicked, it will be in a Retrieve state.
(To return to Filing dialog, select F4 Home menu of Function menu
(page 1)).
In case a single image is selected and in case multi images are
selected at the same time, the display style and function menu
display are different respectively.
Single image selected:
1-image display
2~4 images selected :
4-image display
5~9 images selected :
9-image display
Selected of 10 or more images: 16-image display.
1-image
4-image
9-image
16-image
Fig. 9.2.6-1 Multi-image display

NOTICE: The display position of the function menu may differ from
another model. Therefore, when the image stored by another
model on storage media is displayed, two may be displayed
near the function menu.
As for retrieve of images, the total of the selection images

are possible up to 1GB or 100 files.
9-34
Q1E-EA0612
Transferring mark display position and Additional information

display position do masking for the convenience of the operation
at 1- image display. When the full screen image recorded by
HI VISION 900 is retrieved at this device, the image preserved
with full screen looks the masking position as shown in the
Fig. below.
Mask part
Fig.9.2.6-2 Masking of retrieved image

The number of the reproduction image is displayed under the
left. Lap over might be done to "W" of "PW" and "m" of "mm"
and it display it.
Number display
Fig.9.2.6-3 Number display

Additional information display position and Number display
can be non-displayed by pushing [Ctrl] Key and [D] key at the
same time. Again, when [Ctrl] key and [D] key are pushed at
the same time, Additional information display position and
Number display are displayed.
9-35
Q1E-EA0612
(1) Function menu

a) 4~16-image display
(Page 1)
(Page 2)
b) 1-image display
(Page 1)
(Page 2) F1 Slide show off selection
(Page 2) F1 Slide show on selection
Fig. 9.2.6-4 Function menu
(a) Review
Select F1 in Page 1 of a function menu
This is started only when live image file is selected. Live
file is reviewed.
When the review of live images suspended, it is possible to
select the track ball priority of
mark. Then it is possible
to retrieve images either in feed-frame-forward or backward
mode by operating the track ball right- or leftward, or by
key operation.
Select F2(speed) in page 2 of a function menu to change Review
speed.
NOTICE:
In the case frame rate is high in review of images, some
error in review speed may be caused due to CPU power.
The error of review speed may also be caused by live
image of 200 or more frames in color image and 600 or
more frame in B/W image.
When the review of live images suspended, the image is
smoothly displayed. The image is displayed rough at live
images review.
9-36
Q1E-EA0612
(b) To Mulit/To Single(Selection in display image mode)

Multi image display can be changed to single image display.
When multi images are selected and retrieved, select one image
with yellow frame, after that by pushing the
toggle switch,
2
the display turns to a single image display.

In the single image display in multi images selection mode
mark is displayed at upper right position of display,
then the single image displayed can be changed to another one
by operating the track ball right-or-leftward.
(c) Page shift
1step Backward
3
1step Forward
3
1step Backward
1step Backward
1step Forward
In single image display in case of

multi images selection it is
possible to change the image for
display to another one by operating
F3. When the toggle switch is up,
the frame is reversed. When it is
down, the frame is forwarded and
it is renewed to next image. Also,
it is possible to reverse or renew
the image by the trackball or
,
on the alphanumeric
keyboard.
Furthermore, images that could not
displayed in the time of multi
image display can be displayed with
this Page shift.
1step Forward
Fig. 9.2.6-5 Page Shift
(d) Home menu

This is to return to Filing dialog.
9-37
Q1E-EA0612
(e) Delete
The image of the yellow frame line is deleted. When deleting
it, the figure below displays it. Please confirm the deleted
image, and click the [Yes] button.
Fig.9.2.6-6 Deletion confirmation message

(f) Images
4~16-image display: Select F6 in Page 1 of a function menu
16 image displays, 9 image displays, and 4 image displays are
switched.
Fig. 9.2.6-7 Select of display

(g) Copy
4~16-image display : Select F7 in Page 1 of a function menu
1- image display : Select F7 in Page 2 of a function menu
This is to copy images selected with a yellow frame in the
case of 4~16-image display to recording device outside of the
Hard Disk (refer to 9.2.5 Copy and Move).
This is to copy selected image in the case of 1-image display
to recording device outside of the Hard Disk.
NOTICE: When
File
When
copy
the image of an AVI format is chosen here,

Convert function cannot be used.
you change a file and you copy a image, please
on a Filing dialog.
9-38
Q1E-EA0612
(h) Division
Select F5 in Page 2 of a function menu.
A live image is divided into multiple freeze images and
displayed.
Division becomes effective only when live image is chosen.
Fig. 9.2.6-8 Division display of live image

(i) Slide show(Automatic changing function of image display)
1- image display : Select F1 in Page 2 of a function menu
In single image display in multi image selection mode, a display
images can be changed to another one at intervals of fixed
time.
Select F2(update) in page 2 of a function menu to change update
time.
9-39
Q1E-EA0612
(j) Select start/Select end

1-image display : Select F3/F4 in Page 2 of a function menu
It is the function to review only
the required portion of live image.
Display live image as single image

display. By operating the
trackball the frame can be switched
in order to search the necessary
one.
Click the first frame (Start
frame)of necessary frames with
toggle.
Fig. 9.2.6-9
Select Start/Select End
Click the last frames (End frame)

of necessary frames with
toggle.
With F1 (Review) in page 1 in function menu only the designated
section is repeatedly replayed.
NOTICE:
Either Start or End can be selected first for setting order.
It is impossible to select the setting such that Start frame
comes after the End frame.
It is also impossible to select the same frame as Start and
End image.
(k) Trimming
Cut edition of recorded clip.
When the first frame and the last frame are designated with
F3/F4 (Select start/Select end) in page 2 in function menu
this menu is selectable.
When the Trimming menu is selected, Trimming Transfer dialog
can start and can trim the designated section of the selected
image to other drives.
9-40
Q1E-EA0612
The trimmed image when the OK button was clicked is transferred

to a designated drive.
Fig. 9.2.6-10 Trimming Transfer dialog

Drive:
This switches the transferring drive of the

image.
When "" is clicked, recording devices to
which images can be transferred are displayed.
Browse on Net: When an image is temporarily to be transferred

to the network server, the destination to be
transferred can be set by selecting this
button.
<CAUTION>
When the destination to transferring is DVD+RW/CD-RW and
compatible writing mode is on in SetUp details of filing dialog,
over 1,000 images cannot be transferred. Even if compatible
writing mode is off, when ID and name of the images which is
on same examinations date is same or is not set up, over 1,000
images cannot be transferred.
USB memory is not suitable to save safely, because it is in
the state that can be removed at any time. Please use it to
save temporary. If you save it safely, please use DVD-RAM.
9-41
Q1E-EA0612
NOTICE:
If the total size of the selected graphics files is large, it
may take some time to transfer them. For example, if the total
size is 580 MB, it may take about 30 minutes to transfer the
files.
During transfer, a title bar may appear in the ultrasound-image
display area or image refreshing may temporarily stop. Wait until
the transfer terminates. The normal status will be recovered
when the transfer terminates.
When DVD-RAM/DVD+RW/CD-RW, etc. are replaced with a copy dialog
and a move dialog opened, the information on a Free space is
not updated. Please reechoes the drive of DVD-RAM/DVD+RW/CD-RW,
etc. again.
"Drive"(transfer address) is not updated, even if you connect
the USB Memory to the ultrasound scanner with a "Trimming Transfer
dialog" opened. Please close the dialog and open it again.
The calculation methods of the capacity of images and the
availability of a drive differ a little. Please use the
availability of a drive as a standard.
9-42
Q1E-EA0612
(2) Measurement with retrieved images

In a single image display mode it is possible to perform various
kinds of measurement.
(a) Measuring method
Performing the measurement
[1] Start the measurement as done in the case of routine examination.
<CAUTION>
Under some conditions setups as mentioned below are required or
there are items as mentioned below can not be implemented.
1) Mode registration of images for retrieve (Mode Adj.)
Under below mentioned cases menu as shown in item 10.2.2 is
displayed at starting time of measurement by which it may be
required to register the mode of retrieved images. Regarding
the registration method refer to 10.2.2.
A case where images written with other scanners are to be
retrieved.
A case where images written by a deleted measurement region
is to be retrieved.
A case where images saved in EUB-6000 is to be retrieved.
2) Measurements unable to perform on retrieved images
It is impossible to perform following measurements: D-Profile,
CFM-Velo, Histogram and MVG-M.
3) Exceptional items which are unable to perform the calculation.
In VASC1 and VASC2 measurements it is impossible to calculate
items of %W (%WINDOWS) and Sys-W(SYSTOLIC WINDOWS).
Auto-trace of Doppler waveform in Doppler measurement cannot
be executed.
The PISA measurement in MV Regurg and TV Regurg measurement
is impossible to calculate.
[2] In performing the measurement on Doppler images set 0m/s line
and Doppler incident angle as required. Regarding the setting
method refer to 10.2.1(5)(6).
(b) Mode registration of images for retrieve
Regarding the registration method refer to 10.2.2.
NOTICE: Entered mode information is cleared in below mentioned
cases.
A case where the image displayed is to be changed.
A case where the mode is switched from a single image
display to multi image display.
9-43
Q1E-EA0612
(c) Automatic reading of a measurement result

At the time of image retrieve, the measurement result saved by the
same examination is automatic, and can be read.
(i) Automatic reading of a measurement result
At the time of image retrieve, if a REPORT key is pressed, the
measurement result saved by the same examination can be read.
(ii) The addition of a measurement result
When measurement is started on a retrieve image, the measurement
before saving a measurement result can be continued and measured.
Then, if a REPORT key is pressed, it will be added and will
display.
When you save the added measurement result, please click "Save"
button in a Measurement Report dialog.
<CAUTION>
When image is retrieved, the measurement result is retrieved
automatically. Please do not change a destination drive then.
The "OK" button of the confirm dialog can not press when there
is the report of the same examination for a changed destination
drive. Because the overwrite save of the report is not possible.
Please move the same report of the destination with a measurement
result filing function. Thereafter, please store a report.
NOTICE:
The function of (i) and (ii) is looked for from the save point
which set up the measurement result which is in agreement with
ID, a name, and examination date.
Refer to "2.4 Special menu" in the instruction manual Measurement
Edition of the ultrasound diagnostic scanner for a setup of the
save point of a measurement result. When ID or a name is corrected,
it is automatic and it becomes impossible to read a measurement
result.
It takes time immediately after the system is begun until reading
becomes possible when DVD-RAM, DVD+RW, CD-RW and the network folder,
etc. are set the preservation of the measurement result ahead.
Therefore, it is likely to start it from pushing the key related
to the measurement to execution for a few seconds.
9-44
Q1E-EA0612
The file format of the measurement report to store in the function

of (ii) is the same as a report read in the function of (i). Therefore,
in the file format that a user set, there is the case that is
not stored. Refer to "2.4 Special menu" in the instruction manual
Measurement Edition of the ultrasound diagnostic scanner for the
setting of the file format of the report.
(3) Other functions
(a) Re-write function for retrieve image
Measurement is made on the retrieved image and graphic data such
as comments are input, and then to transfer the image with graphic
data to DVD-RAM, DVD+RW, CD-RW or others, press [S-WRITE] key for
a single image display.
However, because the image is transferred to the preset address
(for setting procedures refer to 9.2.2), if the transferring
destination is to be temporarily changed, change it by selecting
Main Menu Image Filing (refer to 9.2.3).
(b) Simultaneous review function of two or more live images
In the case two or more live images are reviewed by Retrieved function,
double click on the same image to select all imaged in image selection
operation (with all images selected, all images are displayed in
a blue frame). And then, by selecting [Review] on the Function
menu, two or more live images are simultaneously reviewed.
NOTICE: Under some conditions a live image review may be delayed.
The review speed of live image may become slow depending
on conditions.
In this case, please Review after copying live image to a
merge folder.
(c) Modify patient information
When image is retrieved on one screen, the input of LMP etc. is
possible at Patient Menu which presses and displays the PATIENT
key.
The contents changed by Patient Menu update to the file of a retrieve
image.
9-45
Q1E-EA0612
<CAUTION>
y ID or Name is changed, it is not in agreement with other images
and a measurement result.
y Only patient information in the retrieve image is changed. Patient
Information during examination is not changed. Please end the image
display to input patient information for the next examination. It
returns to the usual exam. screen. Afterwards, please input patient
information renewing the Patient key pressing.
9.2.7
Edit of image file: Merged Folder

There is an item "Merged Folder" among the selection tree of Drive
in Filing window. This is a recording area to retreat temporarily
image data for editing.
Fig. 9.2.7-1 Merged Folder

(1) Data record
In order to record data in the Merged Folder select the image
in the Filing dialog and click [Merge] button.
(2) Data delete
Select the image in the Filing dialog and click [Delete] button.
(3) Example of data edit
There is a case that a series of image of a patient was recorded
in DVD MULTI Drive in the past and other images of the same patient
have been obtained and recorded in the Hard Disk in this month.
If necessary, such image data can be recorded in total in DVD
MULTI Drive exclusive for that patient.
In this case all the data are once transferred to the Merged
Folder.
After that total data of that patient are recorded
in a single or multiple DVD-RAM(s).
9-46
Q1E-EA0612
Media 1 *
Hard Disk
Media n *
Media for Patient *

Merged Folder
NOTICE*: Media indicates DVD-RAM/DVD+RW/CD-RW

Fig. 9.2.7-2 Example of Editing Data
(4) Ending display
Merged Folder can be closed by clicking Close button, but if
there left data, even a single image, in the Folder, a window
for confirmation as shown below is displayed.
Fig. 9.2.7-3 Confirmation message of image file delete

In case you want to leave data in the Folder, click No button.
If you want to delete data in the Folder, click Yes button.
NOTICE:
If ON/STAND BY switch is put off while displaying a

retrieval image out of image file, an error massage
may be displayed.
After a while the dialogue is automatically closed
and the power is shut off normally.
9-47
Q1E-EA0612
9.2.8
Batch transferring / printing for every patient

Images can be transferred or printed for every patient.
(1) Set up
Image Filing in Main Menu / Set up is chosen and "Set up Filing"
dialog is started. Please click the [Details of filing] button
of this dialog. Set Up details of filing dialog starts.
Please choose "Every patient" in Timing of Transfer.
Fig.9.2.8-1 Set Up details of filing

(2) Transferring
If S-Write key and M-Write key is pressed during Examination,
the image is temporarily saved in a hard disk.
Even if it chooses "Every patient", when assignment of S-Write
key is a hard disk, it is saved directly at a hard disk.
When saving the image temporarily in a hard disk,
displayed on the screen upper right.
mark is
If assignment of the S-write key is except a hard disk and the

S-write key will be pushed at the time of retrieve when "Every
patient" is chosen, image is temporarily saved in a hard disk.
When either of the following is operated, the image saved in
the hard disk temporarily is transferred.
- [New Patient] button is clicked by Patient Menu.
- Pressing the End Exam key. But, when VCR playback screen or
3D software is displayed, it is impossible to output forcedly
images to PC printer by the End Exam key.
- Starting the ultrasound system (Any of images saved when
previously using the system remain not printed).
9-48
Q1E-EA0612
(3) Printing
When Image Printer is set up in the Print/REC Key Assignment
dialog, if Print key is pushed during examination, an image is
temporarily saved in a hard disk.
When saving the image temporarily in a hard disk,
mark is
displayed on the screen upper right.
When there is an image temporarily saved in the hard disk, an
mark is displayed on the screen upper right.
When either of the following is operated, the image saved in
the hard disk temporarily is printed to an image printer.
- [New Patient] button is clicked by Patient Menu.
- Pressing the End Exam key. But, when VCR playback screen or
3D software is displayed, it is impossible to output forcedly
images to PC printer by the End Exam key.
- Starting the ultrasound system (Any of images saved when
NOTICE: When the [New Patient] button is clicked by Patient Menu,
since a CPU power is used for printing, even if it inputs
a character on Patient menu, it may not be reflected
immediately.
After an Examination end should press End Exam key, and
should print an image.
If turning off the system power when any of saved images remain,
a message shown in Fig.9.2.8-2 appears when the [OK] button is
clicked by Set Up Filing dialog.
Click the [Yes] button. If transfer or print is to be canceled,
select the [No] button for the message.
Fig.9.2.8-2 Forced Output Message
9-49
Q1E-EA0612
NOTICE:
- If selecting the [No] button, saved images are deleted and
they cannot be transferred and outputted to the printer any
more.
- If you changed contents of the settings, saved images are
printed in the setting conditions after the changes.
- The End Exam key cannot be pressed at the time of retrieve.
9.2.9
Temporary save at the time of transferring error

When an error occurs at the time of transferring, the message of
Fig.9.2.9-1 is displayed and an image is saved to a hard disk.
Fig.9.2.9-1 Saved temporarily message

An image is saved to a hard disk until it clicks the [New
Patient]button by Patient Menu, or it presses END Exam key.
At this time, the status of the images becomes "NG".
After the END Exam key is pressed or the [New Patient]button is
clicked with Patient menu, the image is transferred to the set
place.
The single image file is a format selected as a file format of
the hard disk in Setup Filing dialog. The multi image file is a
selected format in Setup Filing dialog.
Please narrow by the status "NG" and copy the images on the image
filing dialog after solving the problem of transferring.
Please refer to 9.2.4(2)Search for the retrieval of status.
9-50
Q1E-EA0612
9.2.10 Temporary save at the time of printing error

When an error occurs at the time of printing for PC printer, the
message of Fig.9.2.10-1 is displayed and an image is saved
temporarily to a hard disk.
Fig.9.2.10-1 Saved temporarily message
An image is temporarily saved at a hard disk until it clicks the

[New Patient] button by Patient Menu, or it presses END Exam key,
even when "Every image (film)" is chosen by Timing of Transfer
of Set Up details of filing dialog.
Please press an END Exam key after solving the problem of printing.
NOTICE:
There is a limit in the domain saved temporarily in

a hard disk. If the message of Fig.9.2.10-1 is displayed,
please interrupt printing and solve the problem of
an error of printing. In the case of printing without
solving the problem of an error of printing, when the
domain saved temporarily in a hard disk remains and
it is set to 500MB, the message of Fig.9.2.10-2 is
displayed.
Moreover, when the domain saved temporarily in a hard
disk is lost, the message of Fig.9.2.10-3 is displayed
and printing becomes impossible.
Fig.9.2.10-2 Limit capacity of Hard disk message
9-51
Q1E-EA0612
Fig.9.2.10-3 No availability of a hard disk message

NOTICE:
When a transferring error occurs during option

starting, an error message is not displayed on the
front but will be stopped by the screen of ultrasound
equipment.
In this case, please carry out the following operations
according to an option, and escape from an error message
with the [OK] button.
3D Display Unit(Freehand) or 3D Display Unit(Magnetic
Sensor)
:Press ENTER key.
Press the Enter key of an alpha-numeric keyboard.
WideView Software
:Press Alt key.
Press the Enter key of an alpha-numeric keyboard.
9-52
Q1E-EA0612
9.2.11 About the DB repair when the equipment terminates abnormally

last time while it was running
In the case that the equipment terminates abnormally last time
while it was running, the following messages are displayed when
the equipment starts next time.
Fig.9.2.11-1
message
DB repair when the equipment terminates abnormally
The case of which the equipment terminated abnormally when you

had recorded the image immediately before
There is a possibility that a part of administrative information
of image filing is lost when the image.
Please restore the administrative information clicking [DB
Repair] button. It takes DB Repair about 5 minutes per 10,000
images.
When [DB Repair] button is clicked, Utility dialog is displayed.
Please restore all drives that were the image transferring
destinations and confirm the image is recorded after the
administrative information is restored.
Other cases
The equipment can be used continuously when [Cancel] button
is clicked. In that case, the image filing might not function
normally, and restore the administrative information from the
filing dialog promptly.
9-53
Q1E-EA0612
9.3
9.3.1
Cine memory mode

Record of image
(l) Recording into Cine memory

Images displayed on the monitor are always recorded in Cine memory
without a special designation. In case imaging conditions like
display depth and display angle are changed, information in the
memory are once cleared off and restarts the recording under changed
conditions. Therefore, contents of record are always image
information under the same conditions. When FREEZE key is put
ON, the record is interrupted.
(2) Image quantity in recording
Image quantity to be recorded in the memory is different according
to the display angle (display width).
When the display angle becomes narrower, the quantity of record
increases.
Also when different probe is used, the quantity of record is
different.
Image memory area

Display angle: Wide
Display angle: Narrow
Fig. 9.3.1-1 Difference in recording quantity
9-54
Q1E-EA0612
9.3.2
Memory capacity setting
According to the purpose, you can switch the cine memory division ratio
in equipment.
(1)
No memory split mode

You can record one B mode image
continuously for a long time.
According to the purpose, you can
switch the cine memory division ratio
in equipment.
(2)
B:B-Split
You can record two independent B mode
images in divided cine memory.
L Freeze
R Freeze
To select no memory split mode, dont

check "B:B-Split" in Main Menu.
mode,
To
select
B:B-split
"B:B-Split" in Main Menu
check
Fig.9.3.2-1 B:B-Split
When a picture is recorded on the conditions from which the

following differs at the time of B:B-Split mode, it becomes
impossible to review the cine memory image of the direction
which is not chosen.
- When the sweep speeds of ECG differ.
The images recorded on the cine memory is cleared when it switches

to the following modes
- When it switches to Dual CFM mode.
- When it switches to the B/* mode (B/M, B/PW, etc.).
9-55
Q1E-EA0612
9.3.3
Continuous record mode and continuous record of heart beat

automatic detection mode
Continuous replay mode : In case of regular image record (ECG wave
not displayed) it is possible to replay
continuously all the frame in the Cine
memory with continuous record mode.
Continuous replay and hear beat automatic detection mode:
In case ECG wave is displayed in the image,
the replay mode is automatically changed
to Continuous reply and heart beat
detection mode.
In this case the first and the last R-wave
time phase frame are automatically
detected so that well continued images
between R-waves can be replayed.
NOTICE: Even if ECG wave is displayed, there may be a case that
R wave on ECG wave is not recognized by the scanner. In
that case the mode is changed to the continuous record
mode. For the correct recognition of the R wave adjust
the shape of ECG wave and so on.
9-56
Q1E-EA0612
9.3.4
Image replay
At the time
FREEZE
is pushed, the mode enters to the image replay
mode. In the replay time, it is possible to control the display

of recorded image as mentioned below.
(1) Continuous loop replay
When "Review" is selected by
toggle switch, images in the cine
memory are displayed repeatedly.

At this time, if it is in the continuous replay mode, all the images
in the memory are replayed in loop, and if it is in the continuous
replay of heart beat automatic detection mode, only images in which
the first R wave and the last R wave are connected are replayed
in loop.
Replay speed can be changed with
"SPEED (SPD)" by selecting
toggle switch. Also, the replay

speed is displayed at lower right
corner of the image.
Replay speed
Fig. 9.3.4-1 Replay speed
When
toggle switch is pushed again, the continuous replay of loop
is interrupted.
(2) Replay by feeding the frame forward or backward
In a normal freezing condition (no continuous loop replay selected),
the recorded image can be advanced or reversed one frame by one
frame by operating the trackball left or right, or
,
keys.
In case the image with ECG wave display is recorded (continuous
record of heart beat automatic detection mode), a time phase bar
showing the time phase at recording time is displayed on the ECG
wave. It can be a reference for image observation.
9-57
Q1E-EA0612
The caution of relationship between Image and time phase bar on

ECG.
Hitachi ultrasound scanner display the time phase bar on ECG to
identify the time phase of image from cine memory.
The each time phase bar is displayed at each imaging start
time.(Refer to Fig.9.3.4-2)
And general ultrasound scanner system needs "1/Frame rate (sec)"
to acquire a ultrasound image.
Therefore time phase of image No.1 is area which is indicate as
heavy line.
Also set the sweeping speed of ECG waveform as fast as possible.
If the speed is too slow, there may be a case that a positional
accuracy of time phase bar of cine memory can not be kept.
Fig. 9.3.4-2
9-58
Q1E-EA0612
(3) Display of image number

When the image replay speed is "0" speed (Freeze condition), the
number of image is displayed. The number is fit in the order of
record of B-mode image into the image memory. When the recording
is finished, the last image is fit with the largest number. It
can be a reference for image observation. Image number display/no
display is set either by Main Menu or Application.
(4) Frame replaying operation by gain encoder
The recorded image can be advanced or reversed by operating the
B gain encoder.
9-59
Q1E-EA0612
Chapter 10 VCR / DVD video recorder (option)

10.1 Remote control of VCR
The VCR connected to the scanner unit can be remotely controlled
from the operation panel of the scanner unit. The remote control
cable (EZU-RO1) is necessary, if HS-MD3000E/U is incorporated.
And the USB HUB unit EZU-UH2 is necessary, if HS-MD3000E/U(2) is
incorporated.
10.1.1 Image recording

Pressing
REC
or
REC
key starts image recording.*1)
Pressing
REC
or
REC
key again pauses image recording.*1)
When recording is normally begun, the image recording status

and the counter are displayed. (The counter is displayed, if
HS-MD3000E/U(2) is incorporated.)
image recording status
counter
Fig.10.1.1-1 Image recording status and Counter

NOTICE: When recording is begun, the counter is renewed.
The image recording status and the counter disappear
after a few seconds when recording is not begun.
When dialog is displayed, the image recording status
and the counter mark are not displayed. In this case,
please check the LED status of key. When dialog is
displayed, the mark comes to be displayed.
Every time this key is pressed, starting and pausing image
recording are alternately selected.
When the pause status of image recording remains more than the
specified period, the image recording status is automatically
canceled.
To forcibly cancel the image recording status, press the stop
key on the VCR unit.
10-1
Q1E-EA0612
By pressing
or
REC
key, the data necessary for playback
REC
measurement on image reviewed from VCR are recorded together

with the image on tape.*1)
If the VCR is controlled for image recording on the control
panel of the VCR, these data are not recorded on tape.
Be sure to control the image recording operation from the
keyboard panel of the scanner.
NOTICE:
*1)
When a remote control cable is not used, perform the

recording operation at VCR side.
Assignment of
REC
or
keys can be changed by
REC
Print/REC key setting menu.
10.1.2 Selection of VCR/EXT mode and remote control of VCR

Using
VCR
ORIG
key located at the main keyboard, VCR-mode or
ORIG-mode can be selected.

When ORIG-mode is selected, the key light green and ultrasound
image is displayed.
(1)
VCR REVIEW mode

By pressing
VCR
ORIG
in ORIG-mode, VCR REVIEW mode is selected and
the key lights orange.

In this VCR-mode, the toggle switches for the following
FUNCTION menu can be used to remotely control VCR.
STOP
REWIND
REWIND
REVIEW
QUICK
FORWAD
PAUSE
COUNTER
PREV
NEXT
Brightness
(0255
Contrast
(0127)
HUE
(0255)
Saturation
0127
Horizontal Position Vertical Position

-55
010
Reset
Fig.10.1.2-1 FUNCTION menu for VCR REVIEW mode
10-2
Q1E-EA0612
By using the remote controller supplied together with the

VCR, instant access to a specific image is possible. For
detailed operation procedures, refer to Instruction Manual
of the VCR.
By clicking F6
toggle switch, the counter setup dialogue

6
is displayed.
(The counter setup is available, if HS-MD3000E/U(2) is
incorporated.)
Counter:
Selecting this item, its value can be changed by operating
numeric keys. The value can be adjusted in a range from
-9:59:59 to 9:59:59.
Search:
When this button is clicked, it retrieves to the tape
position set by the counter item and it enters PAUSE state.
Preset:
When this button is clicked, it changes tape counter of
VCR into the value set by the counter item.
(2)
ORIG-mode: Normal image display

By pressing
VCR
ORIG
key after the operation of (1)
VCR
REVIEW mode, operation mode returns to the mode to display

normal ultrasound image. The key lights green.
10-3
Q1E-EA0612
NOTICE: When clicking F7
toggle switch on 2nd page and reset,

7
press a little long.

CAUTION
During pause or review at slow speed, body mark and

physiological signal, if displayed, may appear interrupted,
however, this is not a sign of equipment malfunction.
When display of VCR review image is paused by remote control

from the operation panel of the scanner unit, some response
delay until the image comes to still display may be produced.
In case a faster response is required, do pause operation

using the remote controller supplied with VCR unit.
If much faster response is required, it is recommended to
review VCR image at slow speed and pause image display.
Immediately after review, it may take time to come to stable

image.
REC status and REC-PAUSE status may not agree each other
between display on the screen and VCR panel. Therefore,
confirm the VCR operation status referring to the status
on the VCR panel.
There may be cases where the image being displayed on the

monitor is distorted when the scanner unit is set to VCR
Replay mode with the VCR not set to Replay mode, but it is
not a trouble.
The END EXAM Key does not work during VCR playback.
When operating at VCR(if HS-MD3000E/U(2) is incorporated.),
the delay is somewhat caused the display of function menu
and operation panel of the scanner unit.
10-4
Q1E-EA0612
10.2 Remote control of DVD video recorder

The DVD video recorder connected to the scanner unit can be remotely
controlled from the operation panel of the scanner unit. The USB
cable is necessary.
10.2.1 Image recording
Pressing
REC
or
REC
key starts image recording.*1)
Pressing
REC
or
REC
key again pauses image recording.*1)
When recording is normally begun, the image recording status

and the counter are displayed.
image recording status
counter
Fig.10.2.1-1 Image recording status and Counter

NOTICE: When recording is begun, the counter is renewed.
The image recording status and the counter disappear
after a few seconds when recording is not begun.
When dialog is displayed, the image recording status
and the counter mark are not displayed. In this case,
please check the LED status of key. When dialog is
displayed, the mark comes to be displayed.
Every time this key is pressed, starting and pausing image recording
are alternately selected.
To forcibly cancel the image recording status, press the stop key
on the DVD video recorder unit.
By pressing
REC
or
REC
key, the data necessary for playback
measurement on image reviewed from DVD video recorder are recorded

together with the image on disk.*1)
If the DVD video recorder is controlled for image recording on the
control panel of the DVD video recorder, these data are not recorded
on tape.
10-5
Q1E-EA0612
Be sure to control the image recording operation from the keyboard

panel of the scanner.
NOTICE:
*1)

recording operation at DVD video recorder side.
Assignment of
REC
or
REC
keys can be changed by Print/REC
key setting menu.
10-6
Q1E-EA0612
10.2.2 Selection of VCR/EXT mode and remote control of DVD video

recorder
Using
VCR
ORIG
key at the keyboard, VCR-mode or ORIG-mode can be
selected.
When ORIG-mode is selected, the key is lit green and ultrasound
image is displayed.
(1)
VCR-mode
By pressing
in ORIG-mode, VCR-mode is selected and the
VCR
ORIG
key is lit orange.

In this VCR-mode, the toggle switches for the following
FUNCTION menu can be used to remotely control DVD video
recorder.
STOP
REWIND
REWIND
REVIEW
QUICK
FORWARD
MENU
TITLE LIST
SKIP
PREV
NEXT
Brightness
(0255
Contrast
(0127)
HUE
(0255)
Saturation
0127
Horizontal Position Vertical Position

010
-55
Reset
Fig.10.2.2-1 FUNCTION MENU for VCR-mode

(a) Control of LQ-MD800
toggle switch while stopped, the menu of
By clicking F5
5
DVD video recorder is displayed.

NOTICE: The menu of DVD video recorder can be set from the
Alpha-numeric keyboard of the scanner unit with
upper/lower/right/left arrow key and Enter key. And
the BackSpace key of the keyboard corresponds to the
RETURN button of the screen display.
10-7
Q1E-EA0612
1) Clock Settings
1. Use the arrow key to select the "SETUP" and press
ENTER key.
2.Use the upper and lower arrow key to select the
"Settings" and press the right and left arrow key.
3.Use the upper and lower arrow key to select the "Clock"
and press ENTER key.
4.Use the right and left arrow key to select the item
you want to change and use the upper and lower arrow
key to change the setting and press ENTER key.
5.Press BackSpace key to close the menu.
2) Rec Mode
1.Use the arrow key to select the "SETUP" and press
ENTER key.
"Picture" and press the right and left arrow key.
3.Use the upper and lower arrow key to select the "Rec
Mode" and press ENTER key.
recording mode and press ENTER key.
Table 10.2.2-1 Recording modes and approximate
recordable times
Rec Mode
Recordable times
Single-sided 4.7GB
XPHigh quality
1 hours
SPNormal
2 hours
LPLong play
4 hours
NOTICE: You can record up to 99 titles on one disk.
10-8
Q1E-EA0612
Table 10.2.2-2 Recommended disk

Panasonic DVD-RAM
Single-sided 4.7GB /
Double-sided 9.4GB
Panasonic DVD-R
4.7GB
3) FormatDVD-RAM disk
Some DVD-RAM are unformatted. You must format these disks
before you can use them. Formatting also allows you to erase
the entire contents of a disk.
1.Use the arrow key to select the DISC INFORMATION
2.Use the upper and lower arrow key to select theFormat
3.Use the left arrow key to select the Yes and press
ENTER key.
4.Use the left arrow key to select the Start and
press ENTER key.
5.Formatting starts. The message Formatting is
complete appears when formatting is finished. Then
press ENTER key.
CAUTION
All recordings are irretrievably erased when a disk is
formatted. Check the disk carefully before formatting to
ensure it doesnt contain any titles you want to keep.
4) FinalizeDVD-R disk
You can play DVD-R on compatible DVD players by finalizing
them.
1.Use the arrow key to select the "DISC INFORMATION"
10-9
Q1E-EA0612

"Finalize" and press ENTER key.
3.Use the left arrow key to select the "Yes" and press
ENTER key.
4.Use the left arrow key to select the "Start" and press
ENTER key.
5.Finalizing starts. The message "Finalizing is
finished" appears when finalizing is finished. Then
press ENTER key.
CAUTION
You cannot record on DVD-R that have been finalized.
You must be sure you want to finalize the disk because
once it has been finalized it cannot be retrieved.
By clicking F6
toggle switch while stopped or paused, the

6
title list of DVD video recorder is displayed.

1.Use the upper and lower arrow key to select the title
you want to watch and press ENTER key.
2.The selected title is played.
NOTICE: The patient ID can be automatically registered as
a title. (See 7.7)
While played, by clicking F7
toggle switch upward you can

7
skip to previous title, and by clicking F7
toggle switch
7
downward you can skip to next title.

CAUTION
This function is invalid when the title list of the
finalized DVD-R disk is displayed.
10-10
Q1E-EA0612
(b) Control of DVO-1000MD

By clicking F5
toggle switch while stopped, the menu of

5
DVD video recorder is displayed.

NOTICE: The menu of DVD video recorder can be set from the
Alpha-numeric keyboard of the scanner unit with
upper/lower/right/left arrow key and Enter key.
1) Clock Settings
1.Use the arrow key to select the "SETUP MENU" and press
the right arrow key.
"DATE/TIME PRESET" and press the right arrow key.
3.Use the right and left arrow key to select the item
you want to change and use the upper and lower arrow
key to change the setting and press ENTER key.
2) Rec Mode
1.Use the arrow key to select the "SETUP MENU" and press
2.Use the upper and lower arrow key to select the "REC
MODE" and press the right arrow key.
recording mode and press ENTER key.
Table 10.2.2-3 Recording modes and approximate
recordable times
Rec Mode
Recordable times4.7GB
HQHigh quality
1 hours
SPNormal
2 hours
LPLong play
3 hours
NOTICE: You can record up to 49 titles on one disk.

Table 10.2.2-4 Recommended disk
Sony DVD+RW
4.7GB (4 x )
10-11
Q1E-EA0612
3) FormatDVD+RW disk
An unused disk requires no formatting operation. The disk
is automatically formatted when loaded into the DVD video
recorder.
When you use the disks formatted by other DVD equipment,
you must format these disks before you can use them. Formatting
also allows you to erase the entire contents of a disk.
1.Use the arrow key to select the "DISC INFO" and press
2.Use the upper and lower arrow key to select the "FORMAT"
and press the right arrow key.
3.Use the upper and lower arrow key to select the "EXEC"
and press the ENTER key.
4. The message "READY?" appears, so press the ENTER
key.
5.The message "FORMATTING THE DISC. PLEASE WAIT."
appears and formatting is started. When formatting
is completed, the message changes to "COMPLETE!".
CAUTION
All recordings are irretrievably erased when a disk is
formatted. Check the disk carefully before formatting to
ensure it doesnt contain any titles you want to keep.
4) FinalizeDVD+RW disk
There is a case where a disk recorded on DVD video recorder
must be finalized to play it on other equipment compatible
with DVD+RW equipment. Process as follows to finalize the
disk. The disk can be recorded on again even if it is finalized.
1.Use the arrow key to select the "DISC INFO" and press
"FINALIZE" and press the right arrow key.
3.Use the upper and lower arrow key to select the "EXEC"
10-12
Q1E-EA0612
and press the ENTER key.

4.The message "READY?" appears, so press the ENTER key.
5.The message FINALIZING THE DISC. PLEASE WAIT."
appears and finalization is started. When
finalization is completed, the message changes to
"COMPLETE!".
By clicking F6
toggle switch while stopped or paused, the

6
title list of DVD video recorder is displayed.

1.Use the upper and lower arrow key to select the title
you want to watch and press ENTER key.
2.Use the upper and lower arrow key to select the "PLAY"
and press the right arrow key.
3.Use the upper and lower arrow key to select the chapter
you want to watch and press the ENTER key.
4.The selected chapter is played.
NOTICE: The patient ID can be automatically registered as
a title. (See 7.7)
While played, by clicking F7
toggle switch upward you can

7
toggle switch
skip to previous title, and by clicking F7

7
downward you can skip to next title.

(2)
ORIG-mode: Normal image display

By pressing
VCR
ORIG
key after the operation of (1) VCR-mode,
operation mode returns to the mode to display normal ultrasound

image. The key lights green, then the ORIG-mode is selected.
NOTICE: When clicking F7
toggle switch on 2nd page and reset,

7
press a little long.
10-13
Q1E-EA0612
CAUTION
The disk recorded with the DVD video recorder cannot be used
by the DVD drive of the scanner unit.
When changing a patient ID by New Patient while recording,

recording is stopped once and restarted automatically. In
this case, the delay is somewhat caused through it restarts.
When changing a patient ID by Edit Data while recording,

a title becomes a patient ID before it changes.
So, when changing a title, please change a patient ID by
New Patient.
When inserting the finalized DVD-R disk, the title list is

displayed automatically.
When DVO-1000MD is turned on, the message "Recovering..."

may sometimes appears on the front panel of the recorder.
This is not a sign of the equipment malfunction.
The title is divided or the message "Recording..." may

sometimes appears on the front panel of the DVO-1000MD, when
switching to 3D Display function while recording.
If other than alphanumeric character(A-Z, a-z, 0-9) is used

as the patient ID, the recorder cannot display a title list
properly.
During pause or review at slow speed, body mark and

physiological signal, if displayed, may appear interrupted,
however, this is not a sign of equipment malfunction.
When display of DVD review image is paused by remote control
from the operation panel of the scanner unit, some response
delay until the image comes to still display may be produced.
There may be cases where the image being displayed on the

monitor is distorted when the scanner unit is set to DVD
Replay mode with the DVD not set to Replay mode, but it is
not a trouble.
The ENDEXAM Key does not work during VCR playback.
When operating at DVD video recorder, the delay is somewhat

caused the display of function menu and operation panel of
the scanner unit.
10-14
Q1E-EA0612
10.3 Measurement on review image

Various measurements can be carried out on review image from VCR/DVD.
NOTICE: Note that measurement may not be carried out depending on
type of VCR.
CAUTION
The playback measurement information included in the recorded
image does not have the compatibility of the playback measurement
information on the equipment of the old software version of
EUB-6500(~V02-**) and EUB-6000. Since you cannot obtain the right
measurement result, please do not carry out playback measurement.
10.3.1 Measurement procedure
(1) Review of VCR/DVD video recorder image
Pressing
VCR
ORIG
key sets VCR REVIEW mode.
(2) Image freeze

By pressing "" of the
toggle switch, VCR/DVD video

3
recorder image can be reviewed.

toggle switch or the remote controller
Using "" of the

5
of the VCR, freeze the image to be measured.

(3) Selection of NEW PATIENT.
Even if VCR REVIEW mode is selected by using
VCR
ORIG
key, measured
data such as report function are saved.

When patient ID to be measured is changed on VCR/DVD video
recorder image, press Patient
key to clear the measurement data.
(4) Execution of measurement
(c) Carry out measurements in the same procedures as those in
usual examination.
NOTICE:

recording operation at VCR side.
10-15
Q1E-EA0612
1)
2)
3)
4)
CAUTION
In the following cases, a menu as shown in Fig. 10.3.2-1
is displayed on the right of the screen when the
measurement function is started and registration of
VCR/DVD REVIEW image display mode is required.
For registration procedure, refer to Paragraph 10.3.2
Registration of review image mode.
No data for Measurements has been written on image
Data codes cannot be read due to the reasons such
as unstable image or noise in image.
D-Profile,CFM-Velo, Histgram, MVG-M and IMT
measurements cannot be executed.
Exceptional items which are unable to perform the
calculation.
In VASC1 and VASC2 measurements it is impossible
to calculate items of %W (%WINDOWS) and
Sys-W(SYSTOLIC WINDOWS).
Auto-trace of Doppler waveform in Doppler
measurement cannot be executed.
The PISA measurement in MV and TV measurement is
impossible to calculate.
When you want to replay images stored in VCR/DVD for
performing any measurement without using a remote
control cable, set the base line and angle of Doppler
image without fail after starting the measurement.
(b) When measurement is made on Doppler-mode image, set a base

line and Doppler incident angle following the procedures
(5) and (6).
(c) Carry out measurement in the same procedure as that for
usual examination.
10-16
Q1E-EA0612
(5) Adjustment of baseline (only for Doppler-mode)

When the measurement function is
started on the Doppler-mode image
screen, a base line is displayed on the
Doppler-mode image. Operating the
BASELINE control, overlap the
displayed base line on the base line
of the Doppler waveform in the review
Doppler-mode
image
SHIFT LINE
Base line in VCR

replay image
image by using
.
BASELINE
Base line displayed

VCR replay image.
on
Fig.10.3.1-1 Setting base line
(6) Adjustment of Doppler entry angle (only for Doppler-mode)
Doppler sampling point
Caliper " + "
In measurement on Doppler-mode image,

if Doppler entry angle has not been set
on the review image or information data
have not been written in the image, the
Doppler entry angle is recognized as
0.
If setting Doppler entry angle is
necessary, do it following the next
steps.
Fig.10.3.1-2 Adjustment
of Doppler entry angle
10-17
Q1E-EA0612
[In B/PW and B/CW-mode display]

(a) Start the measurement function.
(b) Turning
displays a message "Set angle bar in the flow
direction ", and the "+" mark appears on the B-mode image.
Operating the trackball, move the "+" mark to the center
of the Doppler sampling point and press ENTER key.
(c) Then, a message "Set angle bar in the flow
direction" isdisplayed and a bar for setting
Beam Line Alignment Bar
a beam line is displayed. Operating the

ANGLE ROTATION control, set the beam line
setting bar in the direction of the Doppler
beam line and press ENTER key.
(d) Finally, "Set angle bar in the flow

Fig.10.3.1-3
direction" message is displayed and the
Operating the ANGLE
entry angle measurement bar is displayed.
ROTATION control
Operating the ANGLE ROTATION control, set
the entry angle measurement bar in the blood
flow direction.
[In PW, M/PW and CW-mode display]
Calibration Angle
Readout
(a) Start the measurement function.

(b) Turning
displays ": 0" on the right
bottom of the screen.

Operating the ANGLE ROTATION control, set
the displayed value to the value of the
: 0
VCR review image.
: 30
Incidence Angle for

Reproduced Image
Fig.10.3.1-4
Operating the ANGLE
ROTATION control
10-18
Q1E-EA0612
10.3.2 Registration of review image mode

If information data in the review image cannot be accurately
recognized when the measurement function is started, the mode
must be registered before starting the measurement. According
to the menu displayed on the center of the screen, enter each
mode data. Finally, click the OK button.
MAIN
MENU
Fig.10.3.2-1 Mode Adjust

NOTICE: The entered mode data is cleared when the following
operation is done:
In case the VCR is connected:
When PAUSE status is switched off.

(1) Entry of display mode (Mode)
In case of setting Mode, click ""
in Mode item and select a correct
Mode from displayed menu, then push
ENTER
key.
COLOR
POSI/SIZE
Fig.10.3.2-2 Mode setting
10-19
Q1E-EA0612
NOTICE:
The "WideView" and "Wide V./Cine" should only be used for

the playback image which is recorded by "Wide View Software"
option.
The "2D-3D", "MPR-4" and "MPR-1" should only be used for

the playback image which is recorded by the option "3D Display
unit(Real-time)".
(2) Entry of Split type(Split)

In case of setting Image splitting
method, click "" in Split item and
select a correct splitting method,
Fig.10.3.2-3
Split setting
then push
ENTER
key. (Selectable
COLOR
POSI/SIZE
in B/M, B/PW or B/CW mode)
(3) Entry of division ratio (Split Rate)

In case of setting Split Rate,
click "" in Split Rate item and
select a correct Split Rate, then
push
Fig.10.3.2-4
Split Rate Setting
ENTER
key.
COLOR
POSI/SIZE
(Selectable in U/D split)
(4) Entry of sweep speed (Sweep Speed)

In case of setting Sweep speed,
click "" in Sweep Speed item and
select a correct Sweep Speed, then
push
ENTER
key. (Refer to Table
COLOR
POSI/SIZE
Fig.10.3.2-5
Sweep Speed
10.3.2-1)
(Selectable in M, PW, CW, B/M, B/PW
or B/CW mode)
10-20
Q1E-EA0612
Table 10.3.2-1 VCR Review Image and Sweep Speed
10-21
Q1E-EA0612
(5) Entry of repetitive frequency (PRF)

In case of setting PRF, click ""
in PRF item and select a correct PRF,
then push
ENTER
key.
COLOR
POSI/SIZE
(Selectable in
PW,CW,B/PW or B/CW mode)
Fig.10.3.2-6 PRF setting
(6) Entry REF

In case of setting REF, click ""
in REF item and select a correct REF,
then push
ENTER
key. (Selectable
COLOR
POSI/SIZE
in
PW, CW, B/PW or B/CW mode)
Fig.10.3.2-7
REF setting
10-22
Q1E-EA0612
(7) Entry of Doppler-image display polarity (POLARITY)
Fig.10.3.2-8
Polarity setting
In case of setting Polarity of

Doppler, click "" in Polarity item
and select a correct Polarity, then
push
ENTER
key. (Selectable in
COLOR
POSI/SIZE
PW, CW, B/PW or B/CW mode)

Direction of POSITIVE or NEGATIVE can be known from the sign
of the maximum detectable flow velocity display shown at the
left edge of the VCR review Doppler-image.
When the upper end is + and the lower end is -, the polarity
is POSITIVE, while the opposite polarity is NEGATIVE.
(8) Entry of unit of flow velocity (UNIT)

In case of setting DopplerUnit,
click "" in Doppler Unit item and
select a correct Unit, then push
Fig.10.3.2-9
Doppler Unit setting
NOTICE:
ENTER
key. (Selectable in
COLOR
POSI/SIZE
PW,CW or B/PW mode)
In case the adjustment of Doppler entry angle

has been made, "kHz" is not displayed on the
menu.
(9) Entry of Doppler-image display mode (DOP. EXPAND)

In case of setting Doppler Expand,
click "" in doppler Expand item and
select a correct method, then push
ENTER
key. (Selectable in
COLOR
POSI/SIZE
Fig.10.3.2-10
Doppler Expand
setting
PW,CW or B/PW mode)
10-23
Q1E-EA0612
(10) Combine
Fig.10.3.2-11
Combine setting
(11) Entry of Annotation Region
In replay mode of VCR, Character and Annotation can be input
similar to the usual examination. For detail refer to
Paragraph 6.1 and 6.2.
Clicking the "" of the Annotation
Region index, Opened sub-window.
Read the display region of image,
and select the region to read the
display.
Then, press
ENTER
COLOR
POSI/SIZE
Fig.10.3.2-12
Annotation Region setting
(12) Entry of Measurement Region
Fig.10.3.2-13
Measurement Region
setting
Clicking the "" of the Measurement

Region index, Opened sub-window.
Read the display region of image,
and select the region to read the
display.
Then, press
ENTER
COLOR
POSI/SIZE
10-24
Q1E-EA0612
(13) Entry of display depth (display range)

When letters of "Adjust" on the
button (for Range R/U or Range
L/D )are written clearly , input the
depth range(display range) of the
VCR image in the following
procedures.
1 Click Adjust button on the Mode
Adjust window by operating the
trackball, and Ruler window are
opened.
Fig.10.3.2-14 Setting RANGE-1
2 Input the base length between two

points. Bring the yellow cursor
to the first point, and press
ENTER key. And once again the
same action to the second point.
(In this example, two points are
based on the scale of right side
on VCR image).
3 The index of the bottom of the
Ruler window changes to white
(able to input number). In this
case, the distance between two
points are 100mm. Bring it to the
second point and input "100"
(distance value of two points)to
the index.
Fig.10.3.2-15 Setting RANGE-2
10-25
4 Press Register button, return to

Mode adjust window, and
displayed the distance below the
Adjust button.
Q1E-EA0612
NOTICE:
It may not display beside scale at the time of Ruler Window
starting.
Please use it, moving to the place which is easy to use a ruler.
By the image recorded on videotape, with Meas. Menu and Main
Menu displayed, a scale may hide and may not appear. When you
use a ruler, please measure by the image as which the measurement
menu etc. is not displayed.
The mode adjust dialog will be displayed when playbacking
measurement with images of archiving captured. It is possible
to measure according to setting the value. But, the mode adjust
dialog will be displayed again because the images changed
according to the frame replay. It is necessary to set the value
again.
10.3.3 Mode adjustment function

Greatest attention has been paid to recognition of information
data and not to make incorrect recognition by applying the special
calculation. However, there may be a case that the scanner unit
takes in erroneous information data due to incidental noise or
deterioration of the tape quality. The MODE ADJUST is the
function to correct such case.
Press
MAIN
MENU
key to display MAIN MENU, and operating the trackball
move the cursor to "MODE ADJ.". Then, press ENTER key.

The menu for registration of display mode is displayed at the
right side of the VCR review image.
Enter the VCR review image information in accordance with
"10.3.2 Registration of review image mode".
10.3.4 Entering the comment

In VCR playback mode , entering the comment is available.
(Refer to 6.1)
10-26
Q1E-EA0612
Chapter 11 Precaution in Combination with Peripheral Devices

This chapter describes recording equipment and their connection method
with the ultrasound scanner system.
11.1 Peripheral equipment
To use this equipment more effectively, use of the peripheral
devices listed in the Table 11.1-1 are recommended. Of the device
listed in the Table 11.1-1, one each of the black-and-white printer,
color printer, and S-VHS VCR/DVD video recorder can be connected
to the scanner system. Furhter, contact Hitachi or our
authorized dealer about latest recommendable peripheral devices
list.
Table 11.1-1 Peripheral Devices
Peripheral device
Manufacturers model, type

NTSC (EIA)*
PAL (CCIR)**
UP-895MD
UP-895CE
UP-897MD
P90U
P90E
P91E
P93E
UP-1800MD
UP-1800EPM
UP-2800P/UP-2850P
UP-2900MD/UP-2950MD
UP-21MD
UP-D23MD
CP700U
CP700E
CP900E
CP910E
CP900DW
CP30DW
CP770DW with SB770(SCSI IF)
TX1300SE
Manufacturer
SONY
Black & white

printer
MITSUBISHI
SONY
Color printer
MITSUBISHI
Polaroid (UK) Ltd.

SONY
SVO-9500MD
SVO-9500MDP
PANASONIC
SONY
AG-MD835
HS-MD3000U
with R-3003
HS-MD3000U(2)
-
AG-MD835E
HS-MD3000E
with R-3003
HS-MD3000E(2)
DSR-20MDP
Datavideo Corporation
VDR-3000 (PAL)
S-VHS VCR
MITSUBISHI
Digital VCR
DVD Video Disk
Recorder
DVD Video
Recorder
*
**
PANASONIC
SONY
LQ-MD800
DVO-1000MD
for the scaner unit of NTSC (EIA) TV display system

for the scaner unit of PAL (CCIR) TV display system
11-1
Q1E-EA0612
NOTICE:
These devices meet IEC60601-1 compliance.
To use CP770DW, EZU-Pi1 is required.
To use CP900DW, CP30DW, UP-D23MD, HS-MD3000U(2), HS-MD3000E(2),
LQ-MD800 and DVO-1000MD, EZU-UH2 is required.
WARNING
1) Other than the devices listed in Table 11.1-1 are not Allowed
to use.
2) Use peripheral devices as fixed with the scanner unit. Using
the peripheral devices without fixing with the scanner unit
may cause dropping the peripheral device due to vibration
or inclination of the mobile cart during carrying around the
system.
For fixing method of the peripheral device, contact Hitachi
11.2 Precautions in connection of peripheral devices
To supply the power to each peripheral device, use the 4 power supply
outlets in the secondary side located on the lower front of the mobile
cart for safety of the composition system and centralization of the
power ON/OFF.
The power capacity of the power supply outlets in the secondary side
of this equipment excluding the power supply outlet for the TV monitor
is 400VA. (About connectable peripheral devices, refer to 11.1.)
CAUTION
1) Do not connect peripheral device other than recommended
device to the power supply outlets in the secondary side
of this equipment.
Do not connect an additional multiple socket-outlet or
extension cord.
2) If peripheral devices of which total power requirements is
more than 400AV are connected, the fuse in the primary side
of the scanner unit may be blown out, the breaker in the
power supply unit may be actuated or it may cause equipment
trouble.
3) The power supply outlet on the lower rear of equipment is
only for the monitor.
Never connect other peripherals.
11-2
Q1E-EA0612
LINE OUTPUT
400VA MAX
230V
Fig.11.2-1 Power supply outlets for peripherals

100V 120VA MAX
Fig.11.2-2 Power supply outlet only for the monitor

11.3 Peripheral devices possible to use on outside commercial power
supply outlet
Peripheral devices listed in Table 11.3-1 are possible to use in
combination with the ultrasound diagnostic apparatus by connecting
with commercial power supply outlet. These devices have been
certified with IEC60601-1 requirements.
Table 11.3-1
Peripheral devices to use on outside commercial

power supply
Peripheral devices
Manufacturer
Manufacturers model, type
Computer
Acer Computer GmbH
AcerPower 8000MD
Computer
Acer Computer GmbH
AcerPower 4100MD
NOTICE:Hitachi will not have any responsibility for their

application software and adverse incidence which would be
caused by using them.
WARNING
Other than the devices listed in Table 11.3-1 are not allowed
to use.
11.4 Operation of peripheral devices
For detailed operation of each peripheral device, refer to the
instruction manual of the device supplied from its manufacturer.
11-3
Q1E-EA0612
11.5 Connection of Peripheral devices

Peripheral devices are connected to the terminal as shown below. Cable
connections must be made while the power switch is turned off. For
connection of the peripheral device, contact Hitachi or Our authorized
dealer.
Fig. 11.5-1 Option Connector Panel

NOTICE: Only connect IEC 60601-1 Complied units or specified units
by Hitachi here.
11-4
Q1E-EA0612
Option connector panel:

1
Printer Out
VIDEO signal output terminal for VIDEO Printer
B/W Printer Remote

Remote terminal for B/W VIDEO Printer
Color Printer Remote

Remote terminal for color VIDEO Printer
FOOT SW
Foot switch terminal
Fujinon probe interface unit

Terminal for fujinon probe interface unit
VCR CONT
Control signal terminal for VCR
The control cable for operation of VCR on the operation
Panel is connected.
C-VIDEO IN
Composite video signal input terminal for VHS VCR
C-VIDEO OUT
Composite video signal output terminal for VHS VCR
Y/C OUT
Video signal output terminal for S-VHS VCR
10
Y/C IN
Video signal input terminal for S-VHS VCR
11
DOP OUT R
Audio signal output terminal for VCR(Reverse Side)
12
DOP OUT F
Audio signal output terminal for VCR(Forward Side)
13
DOP IN R
Audio signal input terminal for VCR(Reverse Side)
14
DOP IN F
Audio signal input terminal for VCR(Forward Side)
11-5
Q1E-EA0612
* This connector is
installed inside scanner
unit.
Fig. 11.5-2 RGB Connector Panel*

RGB connector panel:
15
SYNC OUT
Video synchronizing signal output terminal for RGB
16
RGB OUT
Video signal output terminal for RGB
11-6
Q1E-EA0612
11.6 Connection of PC printer and the HUB for Network function

(1) Setting place of PC printer and the HUB for Network
When connecting PC printer or the HUB for Network with EUB-5500,
these equipments must be placed out side of the Patient
Environment to avoid an electrical shock. Regarding the
Patient Environment, IEC 60601-1-1 Safety requirements for
medical electrical systems describes for the area which is shown
in Fig. 11.6-1.
2.5m
1.5m
Fig. 11.6-1 Patient Environment
11-7
Q1E-EA0612
CAUTION
Make sure to use PC printer and the HUB which complies with
IEC Publication 60950 Standard (Safety of information
processing equipment including the equipment for office use)
or IEC Publication 60601-1 Standard (Safety of medical
electrical equipment).
WARNING
To avoid a danger of electrical shock, never place PC printer
and the HUB to be connected with EUB-5500 within the area of
the Patient Environment.
(2) Recommended peripherals
Please use described the confirmed operation peripherals for
the following table when you use the PC printer.
Table 11.6-1
Peripheral device
PC Printer
Manufacturer, model, type

Epson
Remark
It connects it with the printer cable.
Stylus Color / Photo series*

HP
It connects it with the USB cable.
Laserjet 1012
Printer cable
commercial item
Shape uses DB25/centronics 36 for the

printer cable.
NOTICE*
These printers have suited the IEC60950 standard

(safety of information processing equipment including
the office use).
To use PC Printer with the USB cable, EZU-UH2 is
required.
WARNING
To avoid a danger of electrical shock, the operator can not
touch parts enclosures of PC printer and the patient
simultaneously.
11-8
Q1E-EA0612
Chapter 12 Movement
12.1 Movement of equipment
To safely transport the equipment, observe the following
precautions.
12.1.1 Preparation before movement
Disconnect all the cables of the peripheral devices which
are not built in the scanner unit.
(1)
Make sure that any obstacle is not in the pathway for

movement. If any obstacle is present, remove it before
movement. Dismount the peripheral devices connected to
but not fixed on the scanner unit, and transport it
separately from the scanner unit.
(2)
Turn off the power switch of the scanner unit and wind
up the power cable on the cable holder located on the
rear panel of the scanner unit.
(3)
Hang the probe cable on the probe hanger so that the cable
cannot be ridden over or caught with the casters. Put
the probe not connected to the probe connector in the
probe case and carry it separately from the ultrasound
scanner unit.
(4)
Turn the LCD Monitor to the below so as not to be hit by

the probes.
12.1.2 Precautions in movement

(1)
Before moving the equipment, make sure that all stoppers

of the casters are unlocked. Step on"Lock off pedal"
of each caster, the wheel lock is Released. If "STOP"
pedal (right side) is licked up, the wheel lock is Released.
Smooth movement is impossible even if any of the casters
is locked.
If "Green pedal" (left side) is stepped down, "Swivel Lock"
is locked. The direction of the caster become straight,
the caster is fixed to straight forward for smooth
transportation. The figure of Fig. 12.1.2-1 shows "Swivel
lock is On". For "Swivel Lock", lock the caster of
"right-back" only.
12-1
Q1E-EA0612
Lock Off Pedal
Wheel Lock
Swivel Lock
(Green Pedal)
Fig. 12.1.2-1 Lock Caster off

(2)
When moving the equipment, be sure to hold the handle

attached to the rear part of the scanner unit. Moving
the equipment by holding the other part of the equipment
may apply an abnormal force to the equipment, resulting
in damage of parts.
Handle Bar
Fig. 12.1.2-2 Handle Bar
12-2
Q1E-EA0612
(3)
Do not bump the equipment against hard object or do not

give it any excessive vibration.
(4)
Do not incline the equipment more than 10 degree from the

horizontal level.
(5)
When transporting the equipment on the slope, move it by

more than two persons. When moving it on the slope, a
larger force than the actual weight of the equipment is
required as compared with movement on the flat floor.
Be careful not have your foot be caught by the caster
when transporting the equipment by more than two persons.
(6)
When moving over uneven floor such as elevator door guide

or the place where a fire door is installed, great care
should be exercised not to subject the equipment to shock
or vibrations.
(7)
Be sure to securely lock the wheel locks of the casters

after the equipment has been positioned at the desired
place.
12.2 Transportation of equipment

When moving the equipment on truck, special attention must be given
to the transportation in addition to the precautions described in
Paragraph 12.1 Movement of equipment. Be sure to contact Hitachi
or our authorized dealer before transportation. Please note that
responsibility for transportation shall rest on the party who carries
out the transportation.
12-3
Q1E-EA0612
Chapter 13 Maintenance and Checkup

When using this equipment, carry out the checkup before use,
maintenance after use, periodical checkup arid cleaning as follows.
13.1
Check before use

Daily Weekly Monthly Other
Check up the following before turning on the power switch.

(1)
Check to see if the power cable cover is damaged or worn out.

If the cable is used as been damaged, an electric shock may
happen.
(2)
Check to see if the probe cable cover is damaged or worn out,

and also if the contact surface of the probe is scratched or
damaged. If it is used as been damaged, an electric shock may
happen.
(3)
Make sure that cable connections of peripheral devices such

as VCR and printer are correctly made as follows.
- If any device other than the one specified by Hitachi is
connected or not.
- If the power supply to the peripheral device is connected
from the auxiliary power output from the scanner unit or not.
- If the total power requirements of all the connected peripheral
devices are within the allowable power capacity of the
auxiliary power output from the scanner unit or not.
- If any abnormality is found, contact Hitachi Service Dept.
(4)
Check to see if the ECG cable cover is damaged or worn off,

if the cable is used as been damaged, an electric shock may
happen.
13-1
Q1E-EA0612
13.2
Checkup while using the scanner unit

Check up the following after turning on the power switch.

(1)
Check to see if any abnormal sound or smell is generated or

not. If any abnormality is found, immediately turn off the power
and disconnect the power cable from the power outlet. Then,
contact Hitachi Service Dept. or our authorized dealer.
(2)
Make sure that date and time are correctly displayed on the
upper right of the monitor. If date and time are not correct,
the backup battery for time display in the scanner unit may
have been expired. In such case, contact Hitachi Service Dept.
or our authorized dealer. The replaced old battery should be
disposed according to the local government rule.
13.3
Periodical checkup
Carry out the following checkup every month.

-
If any abnormality is found on the probe connector and connector

or not.
If any abnormality is found on the power cable and other cables

or not.
If any abnormality is found on the control panel and keyboard

or not.
If the stopper for the cart caster functions normally or not.
If any abnormality is found or it malfunctions, stop operation of

the equipment, turn off the power and disconnect the power cable
from the power outlet, then contact Hitachi Service Dept. or our
authorized dealer.
For the detail periodical checkup, consult with Hitachi service Dept.
13-2
Q1E-EA0612
13.4
Backup of system setting data

Should the hard disk incorporated on this system be damaged, the

registered application data will be lost. Backing up the system
setting data at least once a month is suggested.
[Refer to 7.9(8) Backup data Menu.]
13.5
Periodical test of system safety

The system shall be subjected to the periodical inspection for safety

of the system at least once a year. The details of the required
inspection will be provided as requested. Contact Hitachi Technical
Service office or our authorized representative.
13.6
Periodical inspection of system performance

The system should be subjected to the periodical inspection with

regard to its performance at least once a year. The details of the
required inspection will be provided as requested. Contact Hitachi
Technical Service office or our authorized representative.
13.7
Checkup after storage for a long time

When the scanner unit which have not been used for a long time is
going to be used, make sure that the equipment can be operated
normally and safely.
13-3
Q1E-EA0612
13.8
Cleaning of equipment
(1)
Cleaning of probe
- After use of the equipment, completely wipe off jelly on the
probe with tissue paper or soft cloth. If the probe would
be left with jelly on it, it will cause color change or
deterioration of the probe function.
- Do not use hard paper or cloth to wipe the probe, otherwise
the acoustic lens on the surface of the probe may be scraped,
causing electric shock.
- Keep probe in the probe holder or case for careful storage.
Be careful not to give any shock to the probe or drop it.
- After use of the probe, it must be disinfected.
For disinfection and sterilization of the probe, read the
instructions supplied with each probe.
(2)
Cleaning of operation panel

- After use of the equipment, turn off the power switch and
completely wipe off jelly stuck on the surface of the operation
panel. If it is left as stuck, it will cause color change
or deterioration of the panel.
When cleaning the keyboard panel, clean it with the cloth
moistened with neutral detergent and then wipe it with dry
cloth.
The alcohol use is not recommended because the alcohol use
has the possibility of causing deterioration in the character
of the operation panel and damage of the surface of the
operation panel. However, when unavoidably using the alcohol,
soak the cutting cotton or gauze with the alcohol and squeeze
hard, and then wipe it lightly. Additionally, do not use the
alcohol other than the following.
<Alcohol that can be used>
Ethyl alcohol purity 80vol% or less
Isopropyl alcohol purity 80vol% or less
If the alcohol is used frequently or keyboard panel is wiped
down with the alcohol strongly, deterioration in the character
of the operation panel and damage of the surface of the
operation panel are caused.
13-4
Q1E-EA0612
When cleaning the keyboard panel, be careful not to slop liquid

over the keyboard and equipment.
(3)
Cleaning of system cabinet

- Before cleaning the system cabinet, turn off the power
switch and disconnect the power cable from the power outlet.
- Clean the cabinet with the cloth moistened with neutral
detergent and then wipe it with dry cloth.
NOTICE: Never use organic solvent such as thinner.
Take care not to dispose the equipment directly
to liquid such as detergent. When cleaning the
equipment, be careful not to slop liquid inside
the equipment, over the probe connector or the
operation panel.
(4)
Cleaning of monitor / LCD monitor

- Clean the monitor / LCD monitor after turning off the power
switch.
- Clean the surface of the monitor with the supplied cloth.
Wipe off the sticky dirt with glass cleaner and soft cloth.
- Clean the surface of the LCD monitor with the soft cloth.
If necessary, sticky dirt can be removed by moistening part
of the cloth with water to enhance its cleaning power.
- Clean the top and side covers of the monitor with cloth
moistened with neutral detergent and then wipe them with dry
cloth.
NOTICE: Never use organic solvent such as thinner.
Take care not to dispose the equipment directly
to liquid such as detergent.
Do not use glass cleaner of hydrocarbon compound.
If this kind of the cleaner is used for a long
period, the reflection preventive shield on the
monitor surface will be damaged.
13-5
Q1E-EA0612
(5)
Cleaning of VCR/DVD video recorder

(6)
- Clean the VCR/DVD video recorder after turning off the power
switch.
- Clean the surface of the VCR/DVD video recorder with dry,
soft cloth. Do not use wet cloth or detergent, otherwise water
or detergent may leak into the VCR/DVD video recorder, causing
trouble.
- Clean the record and playback heads using the specified cleaning
kit according to the instruction manual of the manufacturer.
For details, refer to the instruction manual of the VCR.
- Clean the unit's lenses using the specified cleaning kit
according to the instruction manual of the manufacturer. For
details, refer to the instruction manual of the DVD video
recorder.
Cleaning of video printer
- Clean the video printer after turning off the power switch.
- Clean the surface of the video printer with dry, soft cloth.
- Clean the printer head by flowing the cleaning sheet
specified by the printer manufacturer on the printer head.
For details, refer to the instruction manual of the video
printer.
(7)
Cleaning of filter in power supply unit

- Clean the air cleaning filter at the air inlet window of the
power supply unit located at the bottom of the scanner unit
once a month. If the air filter gets clogged, the circuit
breaker may be actuated or the power supply unit may be damaged.
- Use the vacuum cleaner to suck the dust on the filter or wash
neutral detergent or water. In case of washing the filter,
dry it sufficiently before attachment.
13-6
Q1E-EA0612
Be sure to detach or attach the filter or to clean the filter

after turning off the power switch.
Do not turn on the power switch without mounting the filter,
otherwise dust in the room or cotton dust may cone in the power
supply unit, causing fire trouble.
When washing the filter, do not use acid or alkaline detergent

and thinner which may damage the filter material.
Never attach the filter as far as moisture being left on the
filter.
The damp filter may possibly cause the damage of the system.
Also, do not being the filter close to fire or heat source
for drying.
Filters in the Power Supply Unit
Fig.13.8-1 Location of Filters

(8)
Cleaning of the trackball

- Before you clean the trackball, turn off the unit and unplug
the power cable from the outlet.
- Do not use wet cloth or detergent. If it gets into the trackball
unit, it may cause damage.
- You can clean the track ball by turning the ring around the
13-7
Q1E-EA0612
ball to remove the ring, ball holder, and ball from the
trackball unit.
When garbage or dust stick to the ball holder and the housing,
the roller, the shaft, please wipe it off with dry soft cloth
and cotton bud.
grip
ring
ball holder
cotton bud
roller
housing
shaft
Fig.13.8-2 Cleaning of the trackball

(9)
Cleaning of the DVD/CD media

When you use the DVD MULTI Drive, please clean regularly with the
cleaning kit corresponding to media.
13-8
Q1E-EA0612
13.9
Functional Checkup
The table below shows basic function check list. Carry out the check
as occasion requires. If the function is incorrect, the apparatus
may possibly be defective. In such case, contact Hitachi Service
Dept. or our authorized dealer.
Table.13.9-1 Functional Checkup
No.
Item
FREEZE check
Image check
Gain control
check
5
6
7
8
9
10
Content
Remark
By using FREEZE key Image

freezing and its release are
possible.
When applying Acoustic Jerry
onto the probe and contacting
with tissue mimicking thing
such as a phantom, tomographic
image can be displayed on the
monitor.
Gain adjustment of B mode image
is possible by using B gain
controller (knob).
Depth gain adjustment of B mode

image is possible by using Depth
Gain controller (slide type
volume controller).
Changeover of image depth is
Depth
possible by using DEPTH/MAG
changeovercheck
key.
By using M mode key, the mode
M mode check
becomes M mode and scroll image
can be displayed.
Depth Gain
controlcheck
Refer to
5.2.2 for
detailed
operation.
Refer to
5.2.2 for
detailed
operation.
Refer to
5.2.2 for
details.
Refer to
5.3.1 for
details.
Gain adjustment of M mode image

M Gain control
is possible by using M gain
check
controller (knob).
By using PW key, PW mode is
PW mode check
established and scroll image
can be displayed.
Refer to
5.3.1 for
details.
Refer to
5.3.2 for
details.
Refer to
5.4.1 for
details.
Beam line and Doppler sampling

gate can be moved by using the
track ball.
Refer to
5.4.1 for
details.
M mode check
PW mode check
Beam line can be moved with by

using the track ball.
13-9
Q1E-EA0612
No.
11
12
13
14
Item
Content
Gain adjustment of PW mode image

PW Gain control
is possible by using PW gain
check
controller (knob).
By using Color key, Color
Color
Doppler Doppler mode can be established
modecheck
and gain adjustment is possible
by gain controller (knob).
Display region and display size
Color
Doppler
can be changed by using the track
modecheck
ball.
Peripherals
devices check
Connected Color Printer, B/W

Printer, VCR etc. correctly
function.
Remark
Refer to
5.4.3 for
details.
Refer to
5.7.1 and
5.7.4 for
detailed.
Refer to
5.7.2 for
details.
Refer to
each
Instruction
Manual for
the device.
13.10 Waste Products

Risks associated with the disposal of waste products,residuals,etc:
In case plastic case or cover become obsolete and unless,it can
beprocessed and wasted as a general plastic material,for that you
are requested to strictly observe local regulations and laws.
13-10
Q1E-EA0612
Chapter 14 Repair, readjustment and disposal

(1)
Whenever repair or adjustment is required, contact Hitachi or

our authorized dealer.
NOTICE: that the responsibility for repair and adjustment shall
rest on the party who carried out the repair or
readjustment.
(2)
Service call
If any abnormality occurs on the equipment, immediately turn
off the power switch, and contact Hitachi or our authorized
dealer for assistance, giving him information on the trouble
as much as you can. Our service engineer will call on you for
the soonest troubleshooting.
(3)
Disposal
About the disposal of the equipment and accessories at the end
of their useful lives, contact Hitachi or our authorized dealer.
14-1
Q1E-EA0612
Chapter 15 Specifications
15.1 Ultrasound Transmitter/Receiver
15.1.1 Type of Probes
(1) Convex Type Probes:
1.0 ~ 10 MHz
(2) Linear Type Probes:
3.0 ~ 14 MHz
(3) Sector Type Probe:
2.0 ~ 7.5 MHz
15.1.2 Image Examination Modes

(1) Standard Configuration:
B, B/B, B/M, M
B/PW, PW, CW
CFM-B, CFM-B/B,
CFM-B/M, CFM-M,
CFM-B/PW,
B/CW, CFM-B/CW,
TDI-B, TDI-B/B,
TDI-B/M, TDI-M,
TDI-B/PW, TDI-PW
(2) With Biplane Probe:
Realtime B/B
(realtime biplane)
15.1.3 Probe connection

(1) The number of Probes is simultaneously possible to
connect:
3
(2) The switching method of Probes:
Probe Oriented
Application Menu
(Change with menu)
15.1.4 Dynamic Range
Selectable from 45 to 90dB range in 5 dB step
15.1.5 Gain Adjustment
(1) Depth Gain Controls:
8 points, 0 ~ 30dB
(2) B-Mode Gain Adjustment:
60dB
(3) M-Mode Gain Adjustment:
60dB
(4) CFM Gain Adjustment:
60dB
(5) PW Gain Adjustment:
60dB
(6) AGC (Auto Gain Control) Function:

3 steps and off are
15-1
Q1E-EA0612
selectable for B-mode

and M-mode images.
15.1.6 Focusing
(1) Transmitting Focus:
8-step electronic
focusing
(2) Receiving Focus:
Continuous dynamic
focusing with variable
aperture control
15.1.7 Acoustic Power Level Control

3 levels are selectable
15.1.8 Count of newly added application
Max 10 applications with one probe
15.2 Digital Scan Converter
15.2.1 B-mode Image Display
Single image and dual images
TV synchronized display method
15.2.2 Field of View
(1) Depth Range:
2 ~ 36cm (Depend on
Probes)
(2) View Angle or Width:
6 values are selectable

Maximum
360
in
EUP-R54AW-19-33
Fujinon probe has 360
display only.
(3) Steering of View Angle:
Adjustable
(4) Pan/Zoom Function:
Up to 8 times
15.2.3 Image Orientation/Rotation

(1) Orientation:
Up/down inversion In
B-mode and
Forward/reverse
inversion in PW mode
Right/left inversion
in B-mode
(2) Rotation:
90 step in B-mode image
15-2
Q1E-EA0612
15.2.4 M-mode Image Display

(1) Display Method:
Survey
(2) Sweep Speed:
1.25, 2.5, 5, and 10

s/screen
15.2.5 Image Processing

(1) Digital Enhancement:
4 levels are selectable
(2) Adaptive imaging:
HI REZ function, ON/OFF
(3) Scan Correlation:
8 steps are selectable
(4) Automatic Image Optimization: Possible(HI Support

Function)
(5) Post-Processing for Gray shades:
(6) Black/White inversion:
-correction,
rejection, and
saturation
Possible
(7) Gray map:
8 steps
15.2.6 Measurement Functions

(1) Measurements in B-mode:
15-3
Distance, Area,
Circumference
(Distance method,
Trace method, Ellipse
method, and Rectangle
method), Volume
(Area-length method,
Ellipse method, and
Biplane method), Area
ratio, Distance ratio,
Histogram, Cardiac
Function (SV: Stroke
Volume, CO:Cardiac
Output, EF:Ejection
Fraction),
BPD(Biparietal
Diameter) FA(Fetal
Age), EFBW(Estimated
Fetal Body Weight),
Obstetric Report,
Angle
Q1E-EA0612
(2) Measurement in M-mode:
15.2.7 Character Display
Distance, Time,
Velocity, Distance
ratio, Time ratio,
HR(Heart Rate),
Schema-Guided(LV:Left
Ventricular,
MV:Mitral Valve,
AO(Aortic Valve,
PV:Pulmonary Valve,
TV:Tricuspid Valve),
Cardiac Function
(1) Comments:
45 characters 24 lines
In case of entering
numeric 46characters
13linesat Font size
is 4
Quadruple size
characters can be
displayed.
Characters Style
(Regular/Bold/Italic/
Bold-italic)
(2) ID Name:
Regular 15 characters
(3) Patient Name:
(4) Hospital Name:
(5) Automatically Displayed Items: Data and time (year,

month, day, hour,
minute, and second),
Operating frequency of
the probes, Gain
settings, Acoustic
power level,
Post-processing,
Dynamic range(DYN),
Enhancement (ENH),
Delay times from R-wave,
Heart rate, Values of
each measuremnts,
Doppler function
display, Transmitting
15-4
Q1E-EA0612
focus point
indications, View of
depths display
(6) Annotation:
253 annotations
(abbreviated medical
terms) are
preregistered.
Up to 20 user-defined
terms can be registered
in each application
15.2.8 Body Marks

(1) Cardiac Region:
10 types
(2) Abdominal Region:
11 types
(3) Vascular Region:
11 types
(4) Obstetric/Gynecology Region:
22 types
(5) Urology Region:
10 types
(6) Thyroid/Breast Region:
10 types
(7) Other regions:
10 types
15.2.9 Application
Function:
Up to 27 sets of
operating parameters
can be registered
(Including 10 personal
settings by every
probe)
15.2.10 VCR Control
VCR operations can be

remote- controlled
from control panel of
scanner with
recommended VCR.
15.2.11 Storage Devices
(1) Floppy Disk:
3.5in 1.44 MB
(2) DVD MULTI Drive:
4.7 GB
(3) USB Memory
15-5
Q1E-EA0612
15.3 Doppler
(1) Display Modes:
B/PW, PW, CW, B/CW,

TDI-B/PW, TDI-PW
(2) FFT Analysis Mode:
Fast Fourier Transform

(FFT)
Selectable from
followings
- High-response mode
- High-resolution mode
(3) Pulse Repetition Frequencies (PRF):

400, 500, 650, 800, 1k,
2k, 2.5k, 3k, 3.5k, 4k,
4.5k, 5k, 6k, 8k, 10k,
12k, 16k, and 20k (Hz)
(4) Reference Frequencies (REF):
Depend on the probes
(5) Wall filter:
50, 100, 150, 200, 300,

400, 500, 600, 800, 1000,
1200, and 1600 Hz
TDI-PW: Fixed(Not
selectable)
(6) Baseline Shifting:
Available
(7) Depth Range:
0 ~ 36 cm
(8) Sampling Gate Lengths:
Selectable in 0.5 mm
steps from 0.5 to 5.0 mm
range and in 1 mm steps
from 5.0 mm to 15.0 mm
range
(9) Measuring Functions:

(a) Real Time Measurement
Instantaneous peak or
mean flow velocity
(b) Measurements in Freeze
Velocity
Acceleration
Systolic window
%-window
Pressure gradient
Flow volume
Time-mean velocity
Ratio of time
Ratio of velocity
Mean velocity
15-6
Q1E-EA0612
Pressure half-time
Heart rate
Velocity integral
Pulsatility
index/Resistance
index
These measurements are available in Freeze.
(10) Acoustic Input and Output:
2 channel speakers
built-in
(Forward/backward
Doppler sound can be
separated);
VCR input/output
terminals
(Forward/backward
Doppler sound can be
separated)
(11) Maximum Detectable Velocity:
PW: 3.56 m/s

(2.0MHz 20kHz)
CW: 8.91 m/s
(2.0MHz 50kHz)
(12) B/D Simultaneous realtime display mode:

PRF 12 kHz
Maximum
(13) Display Method:
Servey
(14) Sweep Speed:
1.25, 2.5, 5, and 10

s/screen
(15) Angle adjustment:
Possible
(16) FFT- Values:
15-7
Q1E-EA0612
15.4 Color Flow Mapping

(1)
Display Mode:
(2)
CFM-B Mode
(3)
(4)
CFM-B, CFM-M,
CFM-B/CFM-M, CFM-B/D,
TDI-B, TDI-B/B, TDI-M,
TDI-B/M, TDI-B/PW
(a) Image Depth Range:
Display depth of CFM

image can shift
continuously in the B/W
image field
(b) Color View Angle or Width:
Display Angle or width

of CFM image can shift
continuously in the B/W
image field
(c) CFM ROI Settings:
Color Box/Sector modes

selectable
(d) Oblique scan:
linear probe
0, 10, 15, 20
CFM-M Mode
(a) Display Method:
Survey
(b) Sweep Speed:
1.25, 2.5, 5, and 10

s/screen
Color Presentation Modes

(a) Velocity/Velocity Variance Mode:
Velocity is displayed
at different levels
of red and blue
brightness, while
velocity variance is
emphasized by adding
different levels of
green brightness.
(b) Velocity Mode:
Direction and velocity

of flow are displayed in
red and blue families
with shades of colors.
15-8
Q1E-EA0612
(c) Intensity Mode:
Toward-flow is
displayed in red, while
the away-flow in blue,
and reflection
intensity is displayed
with different levels
of brightness.
(d) Color Flow Angiography (CFM) Mode:

Reflection intensity
is displayed with
different levels of
brightness.
CFA mode has no velocity
information.
(e) Directional CFA Mode:
Indicate the direction

of flow with CFA
(f) Velocity Variance Mode:
Extent of velocity
variance is
displayed with
different levels of
yellow brightness.
(g) Color Map:
Color display is
selectable after
frozen
(5)
Pulse Repetition Frequencies (PRF):
120, 250, 350, 400, 500,

650, 800, 1k, 2k, 2.5k,
3k, 3.5k, 4k, 4.5k, 5k,
6k, 8k, 10k, 12k, 16k
and 20k (Hz)
(6)
Persistence:
(7)
Motion Artifact Suppressing Function: 3 steps and off are

selectable
(Fixed (Not selectable
) in TDI mode)
(8)
Density:
(9)
Preference

) in TDI mode)
(10) Peak Hold Mode:
CFM images are over

lapped real-timely for
selected refresh time.
15-9
Q1E-EA0612
Refresh time; 4 steps

and infinite are
selectable
(11) Enhanced Velocity (Velocity tagging) Display:
Available
(12) CFM Filter:

) in TDI mode)
(13) Packet Size:
B: 3 steps are
selectable
M: Fixed (Not
selectable)
15.5 Image Filling Software

(1)
Image Transfer Method:
Digital
(2)
Transferring Image:
Multi Image/Single
Image
(3)
Live Image Transfer Method:
Frame to Frame
(F-F)/R-wave to
R-wave(R-R)/All
(4)
Image Format:
BMP, TIF, Jpeg*, AVI,

AVI(Compression) *
(5)
TIFF Compress:
None, Pack Bits (LZW

method is not supported
because need Unisys Ltd
License)
(6)
AVI Compress:
Microsoft Video 1
NOTICE : Jpeg and AVI compressed files can not be Previewed

by other equipment for Ex. EUB-6000
(7)
Storage to Hard Disk:
20GB
(8)
Retrieve Method:
1,4,9,16 - image
display, Review,
Variable speed review
(9)
Measurement with retrieved images
possible(However,
D-Profile, CFM-Velo,
Histogram, %Window,
Systolic Window,
15-10
Q1E-EA0612
Auto Trace,
the PISA measurement is
impossible to
calculate.)
(10) Transfer Method
Every image(film),
Every patient
(11) Masking of personal information
Possible(At
transferring to the
external device)
15.6 Cine Memory

(1)
Frame Storage Capacity:
Maximum
aprox.4000 frames
(10R,14,Black/White)
(2)
Recording mode:
Continuous recording
mode
(Cine memory, Long
M-mode, B/B split
record mode)
(3)
Play-Back Mode:
Continuous/Single
play-back Image frame
searching by trackball
forward/backward
frame scrolling
variable play back
speed
(4)
Long M-Mode:
Continuous play-back
Forward/backward
searching with
trackball
(5)
Play-back
Cine mode 1/1, 1/2,

1/4, 1/8, 0, Long
M-mode same, double
speed
15-11
Q1E-EA0612
15.7 Option
15.7.1 BIO Unit EZU-EK25
(1) Signal Display:
ECG
(2) Display Method:
Survey
(3) ECG Synchronization:
2 points of timing can

be set independently.
Timing for
synchronization is
displayed in the from of
a vertical line
superimposed on an ECG
waveform.
(4) M-mode Image Partial Blanking: 3 steps and off are

selectable
(5) Accessories
ECG cord
(CP-103US)
1pcs
ECG clamps
(TE-43A,43B)
pcs
15.7.2 Omni-Directional M mode display software EZU-OD2

(1) Probe Components (Displaying enable):
Phased Array probe
EUP-C321T, EUP-C511,
EUP-C514, EUP-C524,
EUP-C516, EUP-C715,
EUP-CV524, EUP-L53S,
EUP-L54MA, EUP-L74M,
EUP-L52, EUP-L65,
EUP-L73S, EUP-O54J
(2) Display Mode
Real-time ODM mode:
B(Real)/ODM
B(Real)/ODM/ODM
Cine ODM mode:
B(Cine)/ODM
B(Cine)/ODM/ODM
Real time display time
available:
Approximately 10s
15-12
Q1E-EA0612
Preview speed is 1:1

only
Record time: Max. 217s
Long ODM mode:

(3) Setting
Number of ODM Beam Line
1 beam line/2 beam lines
ODM Beam Line Center Control Common center mode

Independent center mode
Angle Rotation:
Center Position Moving:
Sweep Method:
Sweep Speed:
0 ~ 359 : 1 Step
Step 1 pixel
Survey
4 steps
(1.25,2.5,5,10s/screen)
1(fixed)
6 steps
Scan Density
View Angle
(4) Image process
ODM-
5 steps
ODM Enhance
4 steps
(5) Measurement
Enable M mode
(6) Other
Not use DOP and CFM mode at the same time.
And use not ECG SYNC mode.
15.7.3 SCSI Card Interface unit EZU-Pi1
(1) General
This unit print the image to SCSI printer.
(2) Specification
Fast SCSI-2
Transfer Speed
10MB/s
15.7.4 Network Interface EZU-Pi6

(1) General
This unit make connecting the Ultrasound Scanner to
Network.
(2) Specification
LAN interface
10Base-T/
100Base-Tx(IEEE802.3)
15-13
Q1E-EA0612
15.7.5 Digital Capture card unit EZU-Pi11

(1) General
Setting this unit enable the connection of Real-time
Archiving software EZU-RA3.
(2) Content
Digital capture card
(3) Specification
Digital capture card
Data width:32bit
15.7.6 Steerable CW doppler unit EZU-ST5
(including the pencil CW function)
Display mode
CW, B/CW (In Steerable CW mode only),
CFM-B/CW (In Steerable CW mode only)
Analysis method
FFT method
PRF
4k,4.5k,5k,6k,8k,10k,12k,
16k,20k,25k,35k,50k(Hz) 12 Steps
Reference frequency Depend on probe
Wall filter
50, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600,
800, 1000, 1200, 1600(Hz)
12 steps
Base line shift
Available
Display method
Survey
Sweep speed
1.25, 2.5, 5, 10s/screen
Angle correction
Possible
FFT-
8 steps
15.7.7 CW unit EZU-CW4 (for pencil CW probe)
Display mode
Analysis method
PRF
Reference frequency
Wall filter
Base line shift
Display method
Depth Range
Sweep speed
Angle correction
FFT-
CW
FFT method
4k,4.5k,5k,6k,8k,10k,12k,
16k,20k,25k,35k,50k (Hz)
12 steps
2.5MHz
50, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600,
800, 1000, 1200, 1600 (Hz)
12 steps
Possible
Survey
0 ~ 36 cm
1.25, 2.5, 5, 10s/screen
Possible
8 steps
15-14
Q1E-EA0612
15.7.8 Remote Control Unit

(1)
(2)
EZU-RH4
Components
- Remote control
- Battery charger
Specifications
- Size
185 (H) 76 (W)

22.5 (T) mm
- Weight
250 g
- Continuous use time
Approx. 5.6 hours (on a

full charge)
- Charging time
Approx. 3 hours
- Battery
Lithium-ion battery
- Transmission method
Infrared
communication
- Coverage range
Within 3 m
- Remote control function
B/CFM/PW mode changes,

B/CFM/PW gain
adjustment, REF
changes, focus
position changes, PRF
changes, depth changes,
freeze ON/OFF, caliper,
still image recording,
movie recording, print
out, orientation,
trackball priority,
Picture in Picture
display changes
- User defined
Applicable (2 keys)
(Notice): EZU-PP3 required for Picture in Picture display change.

15.7.9 Remote Control Interface Unit
(1)
EZU-RiF3E
General
This is the optical receiver installed in the ultrasound
diagnostic scanner (main unit) for making to work remote control
unit EZU-RH4.
15-15
Q1E-EA0612
(2)
Components
- RCS pcb
(pcb for infrared optical receiver)

- RC pcb
(interface pcb between keyboard of ultrasound diagnostic

scanner and RCS pcb)
15.7.10 Disposable ECG electrode adapter
EZU-DA1
15.7.11 Probe Extension unit EZU-AB7

(1) General
The probe extension unit EZU-AB7 is an interface unit
provided with the EUB-5500 digital ultrasound
examination device, to add on additional probe ports.
15.7.12 USB HUB unit EZU-UH2
(1) General
The USB HUB unit EZU-UH2 is an interface unit provided
with the EUB-5500 digital ultrasound examination device,
to add on additional USB ports.
(2) Specification
Port number
15.7.13 USB Memory Interface unit EZU-UM1

(1) General
The USB Memory Interface unit EZU-UM1 is an interface
unit provided with the EUB-5500 digital ultrasound
examination device, to add on additional USB ports.
(2) Specification
Port number
<WARNING>
Other than the recommended device are not allowed.
15-16
Q1E-EA0612
15.8 Other
15.8.1 Auxiliary AC Outlet
120 VA (For monitor
EZU-MT24-S1 )
400 VA
15.8.2 Power Requirements
(1) Voltage:
230 VAC 10%
(2) Frequency:
50/60 Hz
(3) Consumption:
1.2kVA or less (include

400 VA for AC outlet)
15.8.3 Operating Environment

(1) Temperature:
10 to 35C
(2) Relative humidity:
30 to 85% RH (No dew

condensation)
(3) Atmospheric Pressur:
700 to 1060hPa
15.8.4 External Dimensions

(W) 500 (D) 800 (H)

1400 mm
(W) 500 (D) 800 (H)

1390 mm
15.8.5 Weight
Approx. 130kg (in

standard
configuration)
Approx. 120kg (in

standard
configuration)
15-17
Q1E-EA0612
Unit : mm
Fig. 15.8-1 Body dimension of EZU-MT24-S1 equipment
15-18
Q1E-EA0612
Unit : mm
Fig. 15.8-2 Body dimension of EZU-MT26-S1 equipment
15-19
Q1E-EA0612
Appendix A Message list

(1) Messages in normal operation
Cause:
A case where system ID

(Hard serial number) can
not be recognized
correctly.
Remedy: Possible failure in
hardware. Call our
service engineer.
Cause:
A case getting the status
of the boards failed.
Remedy: Follow the message. Call
our service engineer, if
this dialog is displayed
again after turn on the
main switch.
Caution: The setting you changed
while previous
equipment's use might
not be saved.
Confirm the setting
enough, for instance the
destination of
recording image.
Cause:
A case getting SYSTEM ID

from the hardware
failed.
main switch.
while previous
not be saved.
Confirm the setting
destination of
recording image.
A-1
Caution
Getting System ID has been failed.

OK
Confirmation
Hardware Error !
Push "Shutdown" button and call service person.
Turn on the main switch after you wait for 10 seconds
when the power supply of the system is cut off.
Do not push "Service Mode" button excluding service person.
Shutdown
Service Mode
Confirmation
Authentic Error! Failed to get SYSTEM ID.

If you push "Continue" button, the boot process will continue.
However, the followings might occur.
- Can not use options.
- User settings of options will not be reflected.
Shutdown
Continue
Q1E-EA0612
A case authenticating
the options failed.
main switch.
while previous
not be saved.
Confirm the setting
destination of
recording image.
Confirmation
Cause:
Confirmation
Cause:
Remedy:
Cause:
Remedy:
A case where a selected

probe is not connected to
the scanner.
Reconnect the selected
probe firmly and click OK
button.
When a probe of wide
field of view is used,
there is a case that
current display field
exceeds beyond the image
display are due to switch
over to right-left
reverse of display
If there is a difficulty
in image observation,
readjust the display
position. Meantime, the
dialogue is
automatically erased.
A-2
Authentic Error! Failed to get authenticate options.

If you push "Continue" button, the boot process will continue.
However, the followings might occur.
- Can not use options.
- User settings of options will not be reflected.
Shutdown
Continue
No probe
OK
Confirmation
Field of view moved.

See the instruction manual of current probe.
Q1E-EA0612
Cause:
Remedy:
Cause:
Remedy:
Cause:
Remedy:
Cause:
Remedy:
A case where a set

rejection speed exceeds
the maximum detection
speed.
In case there is a
difficulty in image
observation, readjust
the rejection speed.
Meantime, the dialogue
is automatically
erased.
A case where the
application name you
want to give with
Application Menu exists
already.
It is impossible to give
the name in duplication.
Click OK button and give
a different name.
A case where it is urged
to adjust baseline for
measurement in play back
mode.
Adjust the baseline.
A case where media is not
inserted into the drive
or DVD-RAM is
write-protected.
Insert the media into the
drive and put the
write-protect off.
A-3
Confirmation
To display color image, lower color rejection level.
Edit Name
XXXXXXXXXXXX already exists.

Specify a different name.
OK
Confirmation
Adjust baseline
Caution
Disk drive is not ready.
OK
Q1E-EA0612
(2)
Messages when ECG function is used.

Cause:
Remedy:
When double synchronization

is being performed in ECG
synchronous mode, there is
a case that this message is
displayed, if the delay time
interval is shorter than a
scan time for one frame.
Confirmation
ECG sync miss condition.

The Difference between L and R-Delay time too short.
Readjust the delay time of

SYNC 1 and SYNC 2.
(3) The message used by the Back up function

Cause:
Remedy:
Cause:
Remedy:
Cause:
When media are not inserted

in the drive
Please insert in a drive the
media which can back up.
A case where there is no
space in media.
Please insert in a drive the
media which can back up.
A case where back up data is
to be installed.
Confirmation
Failed!!
( The device is not ready.
Please try to copy again.
OK
Confirmation
Failed!!
( The disk is full.
Please try to copy again.

OK
Confirmation
The current set up data will be lost.

Do you want to load ?
Remedy:
Cause:
Remedy:
In case the current set up

data can be lost, select Yes.
If No is selected, the
installing work is
suspended.
In case back up data for
installation and the
version of scanner is
different. And the
installation work is
suspended.
Click OK button and prepare
back up data which match with
the same version of scanner.
A-4
Yes
No
Confirmation
Can not install !!

Back up data does not match with system software version.
OK
Q1E-EA0612
Cause:
In case back up data for

installation are not found
in selected drive.
Remedy:
OK button and prepare media

in which back up data are
stored.
Cause:
In case using a backup data

from a different equipment or
different languages, the
installation work is
suspended.
Remedy:
Confirmation
No back up data in selected drive.

OK
Confirmation
Backup data can't be installed.

Model or language is different.
OK
Use a backup data from a same

equipment and a same
language.
(4) The message used by the Image filing function

Cause:
A case where a value except

from 1 to 233 is input.
Remedy:
Click OK button and input an

integral value from 1 to 233.
Cause:
A case where a value except

from 0 to 255 is not input.
Remedy:
Click OK button and input an

integral value from 0 to 255.
Cause:
Even though Log Information

check box is set ON in Image
Filing set up menu, Log File
is not created by Set up of
Log File.
Remedy:
Caution
Please specify a value between 1 and 223 for this field.
OK
Caution
Please specify a value between 0 and 255 for this field.
OK
Caution
Storage drive for Log file is not designated.

Please press "Set up" button for Log file.
OK
Click OK button and create

Log File by Set of Log File.
A-5
Q1E-EA0612
Cause:
Remedy:
Cause:
A case where there is no Log

File in Merge Folder.
A case where there is no

space in media for merging
in the merging process.
Insert new media and click
OK. When Cancel is
clicked, the merging
process is suspended.
Cause:
A case where Log Information

in HDD is full and the
merging process of Log
Information is
automatically started, but
the process is suspended on
a way.
Remedy:
Click OK button.
Cause:
A case where there is no Log

File in Merge File in merge
processing of Log
Information.
Remedy:
Click OK button and

terminate the merging
process of Log Information.
Cause:
A case of failure in
connecting to Network.
Confirm the status of
connection to Network.
A-6
No Log file found.

Do you want to create new Log file?
Request to create Log File.

If Yes not clicked, Log File
is created. If No is
clicked, merging process is
suspended.
Remedy:
Remedy:
Confirmation
Yes
No
Confirmation
Full memory!!
Please insert new media.
OK
Cancel
Caution
Caution!!
Log Information will be lost because buffer will be full.
Please merge Log information to the desired media.
OK
Confirmation
No Log file in selected drive.

OK
Confirmation
Failed to connect to Network.

OK
Q1E-EA0612
Cause:
A case where you want to

delete Image File and Log
File.
Remedy:
If YES is click, the deletion

is executed. If NO is
clicked, the deletion is
suspended.
Cause:
A case where the size of

transferred file exceeds an
empty space in media when
images are transferred to
media (like DVD-RAM/DVD+
RW/CD-RW, FD, etc.)
Remedy:
After click OK button

exchange media or delete the
file in media.
Cause:
A case where media is not in

the drive or it is in Read
out only mode when images are
transferred to media (like
DVD-RAM/DVD+RW/
CD-RW, FD, etc.)
Remedy:
Confirmation
Do you want to delete?

Yes
No
Confirmation
Failed!!!
(The disk is full.)
Please try to transfer again.

OK
Confirmation
Failed!!!
(The device is not ready.)

OK
Click OK button and confirm

whether media is in the drive
or it is in Read out only mode
or not.
If you insert the media after
click NO button, please
select the drive again.
A-7
Q1E-EA0612
Cause1:
Cause2:
Remedy:
Cause1:
When a problem is in network

connection at a network
folder at the time of
transferring.
Failed!!!
(Time-out error.)

OK
At transferring to network
folder immediately after
start.
Please click the [OK] button
and check the connection
state of a network. If the
message is again displayed
although there is no
failure, call our service
engineer.
When it sets to batch
transferring, and images
are transferred.
Remedy1: There is a possibility of

changing the format after
temporarily saving the
images.
In this case, it is normally
transferred from the second
times.
Cause2:
Confirmation
Confirmation
Failed!!!
OK
A case where there is a

failure except above said
two failures in image
transferring time.
Remedy2: Click OK button and confirm

found out failure. If the
message is again displayed
although there is no
failure, call our service
engineer.
A-8
Q1E-EA0612
Cause:
A case where matching ID and

Name can not be found
although ID and Name are
searched in Image File
operating menu.
Remedy:
Click OK button and input

again ID and Name in order
to start the research.
Cause:
When number of images stored

in the Hard Disk reaches
20GB.
Confirmation
No Item to match key word.

OK
Confirmation
This storage succeeded!!

But, Hard Disk has been full and next image can't be stored.
Please transfer or delete images of Hard Disk.
OK
Remedy:
Since Save cannot do an image

file at the time of the next
Save, it is warning.
Delete files in the Hard Disk
or transfer them to any
medium.
Cause:
Remedy:
Cause:
Remedy:
When images more than 20GB

are stored in the Hard Disk
The images can not be stored
in the Hard Disk. Delete
files in the Hard Disk or
transfer them to any medium.
A case where there is an

Image File including images
of invalid size is in
selected drive in replaying
time of Image File.
Confirmation
Failed!!!
Hard Disk is full and this images can't be stored.
OK
Confirmation
There are some images which size is invalid

for the system, in the selected drive.
They could not be displayed.
OK

the Image File.
A-9
Q1E-EA0612
Cause:
Remedy:
A case where a drive

selection is not ready in
reading time of Image File.
Caution
The device is not ready.

Do you want to retry?
Insert media into the drive

to be selected and click Yes.
Yes
No
Please select the drive

again when you insert media
after the No button is
selected and the filing
dialog is displayed.
Cause1:
A case where empty space in

Merge Folder is smaller than
the size of Image File to be
transferred to Merge
Folder.
Remedy1: Click OK button and delete

or transfer files in Merge
Folder.
Cause2: When the number of files of
images and the number of
registration of DB are
different.
Remedy2: Please click the OK button.
Please choose the "DB
Repair" button of a utility
dialog, and re-create DB.
Cause:
When ending a Filing dialog
and the image remains in
Merge Folder.
Remedy:
Confirmation
Merge image folder is full and can't store any more files.
Please transfer or delete files in merge folder.
OK
Confirmation
Do you want to delete all image in merge folder?

Yes
No
If Yes is clicked, Image File

in Merge Folder is deleted.
If No is clicked, it is left
as it is in Merge Folder.
A-10
Q1E-EA0612
Cause:
Remedy:
A case where it is impossible

to transfer as the size of
transfer file is too big.
Caution
Transfer file size is too big, and it can't be transferred.

Transfer is canceled.
OK

the transfer file size.
For your reference:
NTSC, B/W:
Able to
transfer up to
1659 frames
NTSC, Color:Able to
transfer up to
568 frames
PAL, B/W:
Able to
transfer up to
1089 frames
PAL, Color: Able to

transfer up to
363 frames
Cause:
A case where Log Information

stored temporally in HDD is
to be merged.
Remedy:
Click Yes button. If No is

clicked, Log Information in
HDD is not merged.
Cause:
After freeze off, a case

where you press Freeze key
at once to execute multi
image transfer.
Remedy:
Confirmation
Do you want to merge Log Information?
Yes
No
Confirmation
Failed!!!
(Frame rate error)

OK
Please click OK button. When

condition is not freezing,
you press Freeze key after
a few minutes. And you
execute multi image
transfer.
A-11
Q1E-EA0612
Cause:
When image transferring is

started without inputting
Patient ID and name.
Remedy:
Please click the [Yes]

button, when you continue
transferring then.
Transferring is stopped
when a [No] button is
clicked.
Cause:
When there is no
availability in
DVD-RAM/DVD+RW/CD-RW, USB
Memory or a floppy disk.
Remedy:
Click [OK] button. Although

the same message displays
several times, please click
the [OK] button again.
Please move some files in
DVD-RAM/
DVD+RW/CD-RW, USB Memory or
a floppy disk to the hard
disk of a personal computer.
Cause:
When PATIENT key is pressed

into retrieve of image.
Remedy:
Cause:
Remedy:
Click [OK] button. When you

correct Patient
information, be careful not
to change ID and Name.
While transferring the
image, when the drive of a
transferring address is
chosen on a Filing dialog.
Caution
There are no Patient ID and Patient Name.

Do you want to transfer?
Yes
No
EUB-US
Not enough space on disk.
OK
Caution
ID is changed only for currently displayed single image.

If ID or Name is changed, it is not in agreement with
other images and a measurement result.
In case of changing patient for next examination, please
return to exam. screen and input the ID from patient menu.
OK
Confirmation
Now, since it is in the middle of transferring,

this drive is not opened.
A hard disk is opened temporarily.
OK
Please click the [OK]

button.
The drive of a transferring
place cannot be opened
during transferring.
Please open a drive, after
transferring is completed.
A-12
Q1E-EA0612
Cause:
When an error occurs during

printing.
Remedy:
A printing image is
temporarily saved in a hard
disk. Please solve the
problem of an error of
printing, and press the END
Exam key, or click the [New
Patient] button by Patient
Menu.
Cause:
When the empty domain in the

hard disk saved temporarily
is set to 500MB.
Remedy:
Please once interrupt

printing, solve the problem
of an error of printing, and
print the image saved
temporarily in a hard disk.
Cause:
When the empty domain saved

temporarily in a hard disk
is lost.
Remedy:
Please once interrupt

printing, solve the problem
of an error of printing, and
print the image saved
temporarily in a hard disk.
Cause:
When the remaining capacity

of a hard disk decreases.
Remedy:
Cause:
Remedy:
Click OK button and delete

the file in a hard disk or
transfer to media etc.
When the read only file is
read.
Click OK button.
Confirmation
The image is saved temporarily to a hard disk.

Since there is a limit in the capacity of the hard disk for saving temporarily,
please push an End Exam key after solving the problem of printing.
OK
Confirmation
Since the availability of a hard disk that saves the image temporarily has
decreased, it may not be able to print.
Please print the image that pushed the End Exam key and was saved
temporarily after solving the problem at the time of printing.
OK
Confirmation
Since there is no availability of the hard disk for saving the image
temporarily, it cannot save any more at a hard disk.
Please print the image that pushed the End Exam key and was saved
temporarily after solving the problem at the time of printing.
OK
Confirmation
The availability of hard disk has decreased.

OK
Confirmation
It is not reflected in the image file even if it changes Patient

menu for a Read Only file.
OK
A-13
Q1E-EA0612
Cause:
When the image is saved at

DVD+RW/
CD-RW over 1000, or
measurement result is saved
over 2000.
Remedy:
Click OK button and exchange

the media of DVD+RW/CD-RW.
Cause:
A case of transferring of
data to FD, DVD+RW/
CD-RW, or USB Memory.
Remedy:
When it is allowed stopping

operation until complete
transferring of data, then
click [OK]button, and start
transferring of data.
Otherwise click
[Cancel]button, then stop
transferring of data.
Cause:
When DB of a read drive has

broken
Please click the OK button.
Please choose the "DB
Repair" button of a utility
dialog, and re-create DB.
Although DB was re-created,
when it fails
Please click the OK button.
Please check the state of DB
re-creation drive, and
re-create again.
When there is no DB into the
selected drive
When an image is in the
selected drive, please
choose the "DB Repair"
button in Utility dialog.
When there is no image in the
selected drive, please
rechoose a folder with an
image.
Remedy:
Cause:
Remedy:
Cause:
Remedy:
A-14
Confirmation
Failed!!!
(Limit of number is exceeded.)

OK
Confirmation
Image data is transfered.

Key operation cannot be used during transfer.
OK
Cancel
Confirmation
DB access error occurred.

(#3343)
Registration to DB may not have been completed or DB may have
broken.
Although it does not have the influence on the image file, it may not be
able to read and do.
Please choose the "DB Repair" button in Utility dialog and re-create DB.
OK
Confirmation
It failed in the re-createDB.

Please try again after waiting for a while.
OK
Confirmation
There was no DB.

Please choose the "DB Repair" button in Utility dialog
and create DB.
OK
Q1E-EA0612
Cause:
Remedy:
Cause:
Remedy:
Cause:
Remedy:
Cause:
Remedy:
Cause:
Remedy:
A case media is in read out

only when images are
transferred to media.
whether media is read out
only.
When the error occurs when
the images are transferred.
Click OK button. The image
is temporarily saved on the
hard disk under
examination. Please copy in
Filing dialog, after
solving the problem of
transferring.
When you copy masking.
The following messages are
displayed. The copy begins
when the Yes button is
clicked and when the No
button is clicked, the copy
is interrupted.
In the place where masking
is copied when you contain
image off the subject for
masking copy in the selected
them.
Click [OK] button when
copying it as it is. When the
[Cancel] button is clicked,
the copy is interrupted.
In the place where masking
is copied when selected
images are all image off the
subject for masking copy.
Click [OK] button, the copy
is interrupted.
A-15
Confirmation
Failed!!!
(Media is read-only.)

OK
Confirmation
The image is saved to a hard disk.

Please copy in Filing dialog, after solving the problem of transferring.
OK
Confirmation
This processing makes the image again. Therefore, it takes time more
than usual copies.
Do you want to copy?
Yes
No
Confirmation
Some of images can't be masked. Only the image that can be masked is copied.
OK
Cancel
Confirmation
Selected images can't copy masking.

The copy is interrupted.
OK
Q1E-EA0612
Cause:
Remedy:
Cause:
Remedy:
Cause:
Remedy:
Cause:
Remedy:
Cause:
Remedy:
A case where you want to

delete image after
retrieve.
After confirming the
deleted image, if [Yes] is
click, the deletion is
executed. If [No] is
clicked, the deletion is
suspended.
When the selected image is
1GB or more than 101 files.
Please decrease the number
of selection files and
retrieving again.
When you transfer non-DICOM
image to the DICOM server.
Click OK button. Select only
the DICOM image, and
transfer it again. Or,
convert into the DICOM image
and transfer it.
When failing in the access
of the file related to the
image filing.
Click OK button. Confirm the
state of media.
When you delete the
read-only file.
Click OK button. Confirm the
state of media.
A-16
Confirmation
Do you want to delete the image of No.1?
Yes
No
Confirmation
Because selected size of files or number of files was a lot of,

retrieving was not able to be done.
Please decrease the number of selection files and retrieving again.
OK
Caution
Please select only the DICOM image

when you transfer it to the DICOM server.
OK
Confirmation
Failed to access file.
OK
Confirmation
There were images which cannot be deleted.
OK
Q1E-EA0612
(5) The error message used by EUP-ES52E

Cause:
Remedy:
The ambient temperature

exceeds the operating
temperature.
Follow the message.
Confirmation
Out of the operating temperature.

Please check the ambient temperature
and reset the probe.
OK
Cause:
Remedy:
Cause:
Remedy:

of the angle error.
Follow the message. Call
this dialog is display
again
Confirmation

of the probe error.
Follow the message. Call
this dialog is display
again.
Confirmation
A-17
Angle error has occurred.

Please re-select the probe.
OK
Probe error has occurred.

Please re-select the probe.
OK
Q1E-EA0612
Appendix B SCSI Printer

If the SCSI printer and SCSI interface function (available as option
EZU-Pi1) that are recommended by Hitachi are connected to the
ultrasound scanner, ultrasound image can be printed out by using
the SCSI printer. Image can be simply printed out by operating
Print key similarly to the operation for the conventional video
printer.
1.
Connectable SCSI printer

To utilize this function, the following SCSI printers shown in Table
1 are recommended.
Table 1 Recommended SCSI Printers
Manufacturer
Mitsubishi
2.
Model
Print time
CP770DW
Paper
About 30sec.
CK700
(Printing Mode : Standard) PK700S
Precautions in connection
(1) SCSI Interface function (option model EZU-Pi1) is required.
(2) To connect the printer , SCSI ID of the printer must be set.
With the CP770DW connected, set SCSI ID to "5".

In the case any other SCSI device has already been connected,
make sure that the SCSI ID is not duplicated. In case it
is duplicated, change the ID of the SCSI device to different
ID not in use.
(3) Only the paper specified in Table 1 can be used.

NOTICE: Turn the power OFF before connecting the SCSI printer with
the ultrasound scanner.
3.
Setting SCSI printer

By connecting the SCSI Interface function (option EZU-Pi1),the SCSI
printer can be designated to the output destination of Printer Key,
thereby the SCSI printer to be used for output can be selected and
image quality can be adjusted.
B-1
Q1E-EA0612
3.1
Setting Print Key

Set the output destination of Print Key to the SCSI printer. By
this setting, image can be printed out through the SCSI printer.
(1) Press Main Menu key.
(2) Select [Setup] [Print Key] on the displayed Main Menu to display
Print Key menu.
(3) Select Printer (SCSI) on Print Key menu.
These are displayed

by installing EZU-Pi1.
Fig. 1 Setting Print Key
B-2
Q1E-EA0612
3.2
Selection of SCSI printer and adjustment of image quality

It is necessary to select the SCSI printer and designate the printer
for image output.
(2) Select [Setup] [Peripherals] [Printer(SCSI)] on the
displayed Main Menu.
Fig. 2 Selection of Printer (SCSI)
(3) Printer (SCSI) dialog is displayed.

installing the EZU-Pi1.)
(This is displayed by
(4) Press List box of Select Printer.

(5) Connectable SCSI printers are displayed.
SCSI printer from the list.
B-3
Select the connected
Q1E-EA0612
(6) After selection, press "OK" button.
Fig. 3 Selection of Connected SCSI Printer
B-4
Q1E-EA0612
3.3
Adjustment of image quality

By selecting TAB on Printer (SCSI) dialog, image quality can be
adjusted for each printer.
3.3.1 Image quality adjustment for CP770DW

(1) Select TAB [MITSUBISHI CP770DW(SCSI)] displayed on
Printer (SCSI) dialog. Image adjustment parameters for
CP770DW are displayed.
(2) Selecting each of these parameters, its value can be
changed by operating numeric keys or the spin control
button displayed at the right of the displayed parameter.
Selection of TAB
Fig. 4 Image Quality Adjustment for CP770DW

1)
Red, Green, Blue:

Each level of RGB can be adjusted in a range from +128
to -128.
2)
Contrast:
Contrast level can be adjusted in a range from +128
to -128.
3)
Brightness:
Brightness level can be adjusted in a range from +128
to -128.
B-5
Q1E-EA0612
4)
Printing Mode:
Image quality of printed image can be selected from
the following three modes.
Standard
Default setting. Image can be printed

at high speed.
Fine
Better quality image can be printed as

compared with Standard.
Super Fine :
Better quality image can be printed as

compared with Fine.
Selecting higher image quality mode requires longer

printing time. Select a printing mode according to
the required application.
(3) Pressing Reset button resets the settings to those set
at the factory before shipment.
(4) Pressing Cancel button cancels the change before pressing
"OK" button.
(5) After all the changes are completed, press "OK" button
to save the changed values.
B-6
Q1E-EA0612
Appendix C USB Printer

If the USB printer and USB HUB unit (available as option EZU-UH2)
that are recommended by Hitachi are connected to the ultrasound
scanner, ultrasound image can be printed out by using the USB printer.
Image can be simply printed out by operating Print key similarly
to the operation for the conventional video printer.
1.
Connectable USB printer

To utilize this function, the following USB printers shown in Table
1 are recommended.
Table 1 Recommended USB Printers
Manufacturer
Mitsubishi
Sony
2.
Model
Print time
Paper
CP900DW
About 30sec.
(Printing Mode : Fine)
CK900S
CP30DW
About 30sec.
(Printing Mode :
Standard)
CK30S
UP-D23MD
About 30sec.
UPC-21S
Precautions in connection
(1)USB HUB unit (option model EZU-UH2) is required.
(2)Only the paper specified in Table 1 can be used.
NOTICE: Turn the power OFF before connecting the USB printer with
the ultrasound scanner.
3.
Setting USB printer

By connecting the USB printer, the USB printer can be designated
to the output destination of Printer Key, thereby the USB printer
to be used for output can be selected and image quality can be adjusted.
C-1
Q1E-EA0612
3.1
Setting Print Key

Set the output destination of Print Key to the USB printer. By
this setting, image can be printed out through the USB printer.
(2) Select [Setup] [Print Key] on the displayed Main Menu to display
Print Key menu.
(3) Select Printer (USB) on Print Key menu.
These are displayed by

connecting USB printer.
C-2
Q1E-EA0612
3.2
Selection of USB printer and adjustment of image quality

It is necessary to select the USB printer and designate the printer
for image output.
(2) Select [Setup] [Peripherals] [Printer(USB)] on the displayed
Main Menu.
Fig. 2 Selection of Printer (USB)
(3) Printer (USB) dialog is displayed.

connecting USB printer.)
(This is displayed by
(4) Press List box of Select Printer.

(5) Connectable USB printers are displayed.
USB printer from the list.
C-3
Select the connected
Q1E-EA0612
(6) After selection, press "OK" button.
Fig. 3 Selection of Connected USB Printer
C-4
Q1E-EA0612
3.3
Adjustment of image quality

By selecting TAB on Printer (USB) dialog, image quality can be
adjusted for each printer.
<CAUTION>
When the USB memory other than recommended are connected the
system, it might take time until the dialog is displayed.
(1) Select TAB [MITSUBISHI CP900DW(USB)] displayed on Printer
(USB) dialog. Image adjustment parameters for CP900DW
are displayed.
Selection of TAB
Fig. 4 Image Quality Adjustment for CP900DW

1)
Red, Green, Blue:

to -128.
2)
Contrast:
to -128.
C-5
Q1E-EA0612
3)
Brightness:
to -128.
4)
Gamma:
Medium colors tone can be adjusted in a range from
+5 to -5.
5)
Printing Mode:
the following two modes.
Fast
Image can be printed at high speed.
Fine
Default setting. Better quality image

can be printed as compared with Fast.

6)
Copy:
Number of copies to print can be adjusted in a range
from 1 to 10.

"OK" button.
C-6
Q1E-EA0612

(1) Select TAB [MITSUBISHI CP30DW(USB)] displayed on Printer
(USB) dialog. Image adjustment parameters for CP30DW are
displayed.
Selection of TAB
Fig.7 Image Quality Adjustment for CP30DW

1)
Red, Green, Blue:

to -128.
2)
Contrast:
to -128.
3)
Brightness:
to -128.
4)
Gamma:
Medium colors tone can be adjusted in a range from
+5 to -5.
C-7
Q1E-EA0612
5)
Printing Mode:
the following two modes.
Standard
Power save :
Default
setting.
High-speed
high-quality printing.
and
Low power consumption printing.

"OK" button.
C-8
Q1E-EA0612
3.3.3 Image quality adjustment for UP-D23MD

(1) Select TAB [Sony UP-D23MD] displayed on Printer (USB)
dialog. Image adjustment parameters for UP-D23MD are
displayed.
Selection of TAB
Fig. 5 Image Quality Adjustment for UP-D23MD

1)
Red, Green, Blue:

to -32.
2)
Dark and Light:

Gray scale for dark area and light area can be adjusted
in a range from +32 to -32 respectively.
3)
Gamma:
Color in intermediate color range can be set in a range
from +32 to -32. With a larger value set, density of
intermediate color becomes darker.
4)
Sharp:
Image edge can be enhanced in a range from 0 to 14.
With a larger value set, image edge is enhanced more
sharply.
C-9
Q1E-EA0612

"OK" button.
4.
Error Message
When you use a USB Color printer, the message like following is
displayed sometimes. Please confirm the following table and
correspond at such time.
4.1
Error Message Table

Message
Warning
Printer Power off or Cable is not connected.
After removing Error and clicking OK button, Printer will restart
Remedy
<CP900DW>Confirm and correct the
Power
supply
and
USB
cable
connection. And click "Enter" key.
OK
Error
Printer Power is off or Cable is not connected.
OK
Error
Door is opened.
After removing Error, Printer will restart.
<CP900DW>The door of USB Color

printer is opened. Close the door and
click "Enter" key.
Cancel
Error
Ink sheet cartridge is not correctly installed.
<CP900DW>Ink sheet cartridge in a USB

Color printer is not correctly
installed. Correct the setting of the
ink sheet cartridge and click "Enter"
key.
C-10
Q1E-EA0612
Message
Error
Paper Empty.
Remedy
<CP900DW>The paper in the USB Color
printer is Empty. Refill the paper
and click "Enter" key.
Error
Ink sheet exhausted.
<CP900DW> Ink sheet cartridge in the

USB Color printer is Empty. Refill
the Ink sheet cartridge and click
"Enter" key.
Error
Paper Jam.
<CP900DW> The paper in the USB Color

printer is jammed. Remove the jammed
paper and click "Enter" key.
Error
Printer is not connencted.
<CP30DW> Confirm and correct the

Power supply and USB cable
connection. And click "Enter" key.
OK
Error
The ribbon cartridge is not loaded.
Cancel
Error
Paper has run out.
Cancel
<CP30DW> The ribbon cartridge in the

USB Color printer is not loaded. Load
the ribbon cartridge, the dialog
disappears and printing start
automatically. If select the
"Cancel", the image data is removed
and not printed.
printer is Empty. Refill the Paper,
the dialog disappears and printing
start automatically. If select the
and not printed.
C-11
Q1E-EA0612
Message
Error
The Paper cassette is not loaded.
Cancel
Error
Ink ribbon has run out.
Cancel
Error
Remove the paper cassette, check the paper
Cancel
UP-D23MD Warning
Door is open.Please close the door.
To continue printing, click retry.
Windows will automatically retry after 5
seconds.
Retry
Cancel
UP-D23MD Warning
No ink ribbon cassette. Please insert the ink
Ribbon cassette.
seconds.
Retry
Cancel
Remedy
<CP30DW> The paper cassette in the
USB Color printer is not loaded. Load
the Paper cassette, the dialog
disappears and printing start
and not printed.
<CP30DW> The ink ribbon in the USB
Color printer is Empty. Refill the
Ink ribbon, the dialog disappears and
printing start automatically. If
select the "Cancel", the image data
is removed and not printed.
printer is jammed. Remove the jammed
paper and printing start
and not printed.
<UP-D23MD>The door of USB Color
printer is opened. Close the door and
select "Retry" button by "tab" key
and click "Enter" key. If select the
"cancel", the image data is removed
and not printed.
<UP-D23MD>Ink sheet cartridge in a
USB Color printer is not correctly
installed. Correct the setting of the
ink sheet cartridge and select
"Retry" button by " tab" key and click
"Enter" key. If select the "cancel",
the image data is removed and not
printed.
C-12
Q1E-EA0612
Message
UP-D23MD Warning
No Paper. Make sure the paper tray is
Loaded with paper.
seconds.
Retry
Cancel
UP-D23MD Error
Incorrect paper size setting. Please check
the printer driver properties and set the
correct paper size, then print again.
Remedy
<UP-D23MD>The papers in the USB Color
printer is Empty. Refill the paper
and select "Retry" button by "tab"
key and click "Enter" key. If select
the "cancel", the image data is
removed and not printed.
<UP-D23MD>The paper in the USB Color
printer is incorrect.
Please check the paper is UPC-21S and
click "OK" key.
C-13
Q1E-EA0612
Appendix D How to use a log file

The internal hard disk can temporarily store up to 10,000 file
transfer information logs (log information).
However, the user cannot refer directly to log information stored
on the hard disk (NOTICE 1).
For this reason, log information should be stored as a log file
on an external medium, such as a DVD-RAM disk.
The Log Search screen receives log information from a log file and
displays search results.
Log information and image data must be stored on separate DVD-RAM.
NOTICE 1: To prevent loss of log files due to the breakage or
failure of the internal hard disk, log files are not
stored on the internal hard disk.
1.
Log file setup procedure

A log file cannot be used until the user sets it up.
Use this procedure to create a log file.
2.
Procedure for using a log file

To display a log file on the screen, the log information temporarily
stored on the hard disk must be merged into a log file.
Use this procedure to merge log information into a log file.
3.
Automatic log file merging procedure

When a specific number of logs are stored on the hard disk, they
must be merged into a log file.
A message appears prompting the user to merge the log information,
and the user performs the merging. Use this procedure to merge
log information into a log file.
NOTICE 2: To enable the disk search function using a log file,
a volume label must be assigned to each FD, DVD-RAM/
DVD+RW/CD-RW storing the image data.
The Log Search screen displays the volume label of the
medium (FD or DVD-RAM/DVD+RW/CD-RW) that stores the
intended image data.
The following pages describe the above-mentioned
operation procedures in detail.
D-1
Q1E-EA0612
1.
Log file setup procedure

(1)
From Main Menu, choose Set Up and then Image filing to display
the Set Up Filing menu.
(2)
In the Set Up Filing menu, select the Log Information check

box and click the "Set Up Log File" button.
(The screen shown in Fig. 2 appears.)
To the screen shown in Fig.2

Fig.1 Log Information in the Set Up Filing dialog
(3)
In "Storage Drive and Make Log file," select the drive where
you want to create the log file.(NOTICE 1)
(4)
Click on the "Make" button.

appears.)
(The screen shown in Fig. 3
NOTICE 1: The hard disk cannot be selected. The hard disk is used
only to store log information temporarily.
To the screen shown

in Fig. 3
Fig. 2 Set up Log file screen
D-2
Q1E-EA0612
(5)
Create a log file according to the messages shown below. When

creating the log file, do not use the same medium (FD, DVD-RAM/
DVD+RW/CD-RW, etc.) used to store the image data.
(6)
When you see the message "Succeeded!!!", the log file has been
created.
Cancels log file creation. (NOTICE 1)
When the drive is

not ready (NOTICE 2)
Automatic log file creation
This message stays on screen for several seconds.
End (The display returns the screen shown in Fig. 2.)
Fig. 3 Log file creation procedure
D-3
Q1E-EA0612
NOTICE 1:
Even though log file creation procedure has been

cancelled, the message "Log file is not created"
appears when the user exits the Set Up Filing menu
if the Set up Log file check box is checked.
NOTICE 2:
When no storage medium is inserted in the drive.
When the storage medium is read-only.
2.
Procedure for using a log file

(1)
Click on the "Read" key.
(2)
Click on the "Log Info." button on the image file operation

menu.
(3)
Select "Yes" in the message box shown in Fig. 4.(Notice 1)

(The screen shown in Fig. 5 appears.)
(4)
The Log Search screen appears once the procedure described

in Fig. 5 has been completed.
Notice 1: Selecting "Yes" merges the log information temporarily

stored on the hard disk into the log file created by the
user (refer to 1. Log file setup procedure), enabling the
user to search log information.
When "No" is selected, log information can be searched
without merging.
To the screen shown in Fig. 5
Fig. 4 Log file merge confirmation message
D-4
Q1E-EA0612
(5)
Merge the log information stored on the hard disk according

to the messages shown below.
(6)
When you see the message "Succeeded!!!", the log file has been
merged.
When the drive is

not ready (Notice 1)
The Log Search screen appears when "Log Info." is selected

on the image file operation menu.
After automatic merging (refer to Fig. 6), the display

returns to the screen before automatic merging.
When there is no log file
Normal
End
Merging
Normal
When the storage media has no
more available memory
This message stays on screen for several seconds.
End
Fig. 5 Log file merging procedure

Notice 1:
When no storage medium is inserted in the drive.
When the storage medium is read-only.
D-5
Q1E-EA0612
3.
Automatic log file merging procedure

(1)
When the number of logs temporarily stored on the hard disk

reaches 9,000, the display goes to the screen shown in Fig.
5.
(2)
The automatic merging procedure is completed after the merging

procedure shown in Fig. 5.
Number of logs on hard disk: 10,000

Hard disk
Log 1
(NOTICE) If the number of logs exceeds 10,000,

they will be deleted from log 1.
Log 9,000
When the "Write" key is clicked on or "OK" is selected in the Transfer dialog box after the number of logs
stored on the hard disk has reached 9,000.
To the screen shown in Fig. 5
Fig. 6 Automatic log file merging procedure
D-6
Q1E-EA0612
Appendix E The rate of compression of a file

The standard of compression at the time of specifying the compression
method of a file is shown below.
The value shown here is a standard to the last. The rate of compression
at the time of actually compressing a file changes with files.
Format
TIFF
JPEG
The
Image
compression Color Image B/W Image
method
Pack Bitz
It
It
compresses compresses
to about
to about
60%.
60%.
Baseline
It
It
compresses compresses
to about
to about
10%.
15%.
AVI
Microsoft
(Compression) Video 1
It
compresses
to about
25%.
It
compresses
to about
20%.
NOTICE
-
Loss-less
compression
Baseline is the
standard JPEG
compression method.
Lossy compression
Microsoft Video 1 is
one of the AVI
compression
methods.
Lossy compression
E-1
Q1E-EA0612
Appendix F Starting the Ultrasound Equipment from the System CD

If the Ultrasound scanner cannot start because of a hard disk failure
(for example, caused by a crash or a general degradation), you can
use the System CD, which comes with the Ultrasound equipment, to
start it. This appendix describes how to start the Ultrasound
equipment from the System CD.
<CAUTION>
When the scanner is started with System CD, do not use under
mentioned function.
- Image filing function
- Measurement Report Function
- Ejection of CD
When the scanner is started with System CD, the following
functions cannot be used.
- USB Printer
- Remote control for VCR etc by USB Interface Unit
- Other Options
NOTICE:1)If you have replaced the faulty hard disk with a new one
received from a factory, all the user preferences are
factory-set values.
2)We recommend that you back up your user preferences
periodically. To back up your user preferences, from the
"Main Menu", choose "Setup" and then "Back Up Data". After
replacing the hard disk, you can use this backup to restore
your previous user preferences.
Procedure for starting the Ultrasound equipment from the System CD
1.
Make sure that you have the following storage medium that came with
the Ultrasound equipment.
System CD (CD)
This CD includes a hard-disk recovery tool. You can start the
Ultrasound equipment from this CD if the equipment cannot be
started from its hard disk.
F-1
Q1E-EA0612
<CAUTION>
Note that only one System CD comes with an Ultrasound equipment
and the System CD can be used only for the equipment that
it came with. If you use the System CD of another equipment,
the copy protection will prevent you from using the System
CD normally.
2.
Insert the System CD into the CD drive of the Ultrasound equipment.
3.
Turn on the equipment.
4.
The initial window appears and the Ultrasound equipment starts.
F-2
Q1E-EA0612
<CAUTION>
The starting time of the Ultrasound Scanner which used System
CD is 15 minutes.
When the ultrasound equipment is started from the System
CD, use of the optional software is protected.
You cannot use optional software.
When the ultrasound equipment is started from the System
CD, the functionality for filing images into a DVD-RAM/
DVD+RW/CD-RW cannot be used.
If you attempt to perform settings by choosing Main Menu,
Set Up, and then Image Filing, an error indication appears.
When it starts with System CD, the " Found New Hardware
Wizard " may be displayed. At that time, please push " Cancel"
button.
When it starts with System CD, the "System Setting Change"

alert may be displayed. At that time, please push " No "
button.
F-3
Q1E-EA0612
Appendix G Recommended/Tested DVD-RAM/DVD+RW/CD-RW

Media that can be recorded by DVD MULTI Drive are DVD-RAM/DVD+RW
and CD-RW. But to record important data more safely, please use
DVD-RAM media of "1.Recommended DVD-RAM" which is higher
reliability than other media.
1.
Recommended DVD-RAM
Be sure to use the DVD-RAM(3 speed) of under-mentioned maker and
the form.
(1) Recommended DVD-RAM brand:
Panasonic
(2) Recommended DVD-RAM:
Capacity 4.7GB ....... LMHB47LE (With Cartridge)(x3 Speed)
2.
Tested DVD+RW
Be sure to use the DVD+RW(4 speed) of under-mentioned maker and
the standard.
(1) DVD+RW brand:
RICOH, Verbatim
(2) DVD+RW:
Capacity 4.7GB ........... Conforming to ISO 9660
3.
Tested CD-RW
Be sure to use the CD-RW(High Speed) of under-mentioned maker and
the standard.
(1) CD-RW brand:
SONY, Verbatim
(2) CD-RW:
Capacity 650MB ........... Conforming to ISO 9660
Capacity 700MB(*) ........ Conforming to ISO 9660
(*) It cannot be used in the drive which does not correspond
to capacity the media of 700MB.
G-1
Q1E-EA0612
Appendix H Handling of DVD-RAM/DVD+RW/CD-RW Media

1.
Management with Compact Disc
1.1
Usable Media
Disc Media
DVD-RAM
*1
*2
Format
Function
Write
Read
*3
*3
DVD+RW
CD-RW
CD-R
DVD+R
DVD-RW *4
CD-ROM
DVD-ROM
Recommended
media
*4
*4
:OK :NG
NOTICE *1: When the file that exceeds 15,000 is saved in one folder,
the reading and writing speed about files in the folder
becomes slow.
NOTICE *2: In the case of DVD-RAM in a cartridge, important data
can be protected by making it the ban on writing.
Slide the Write Protect tab upward to prevent recorded
data from being erased.
Slide the Write Protect tab downward when re-recording.
Write Protect tab
Upward:
Read-only
ballpoint pen.etc
to prevent erasing
Downward:
Writable
to re-record
NOTICE *3:
There is a maximum of 1000 images per one folder
recordable on DVD+RW/CD-RW.
But the maximum changes according to the size and format
of images.
DVD+RW/CD-RW are not suitable for record of single-image
with small file sizes, such as a still image.
Please use DVD+RW/CD-RW for record of multi-image.
DVD+RW/CD-RW are rewritable.
H-1
Q1E-EA0612
NOTICE *4: CD-R and DVD+R cannot be written. Only after these discs
are transformed to ROM type(CD-ROM type-transform,
DVD-ROM type-transform), they can be "Read".
It is possible to make the equipment in instability when
non-ROM type disc is inserted.
When backup the data of DVD+RW/CD-RW into DVD+R(CD-R)
in computer with Writing Soft, please transform the types
into ROM beforehand if the backup-discs are to be inserted
into drive. Please refer to the Instruction Manual of
Packer Writing Soft for the method of ROM type-transform.
DVD-RW cannot be used. Please do not insert them into
the drive. It is possible to make the equipment in
instability when inserting the unusable media.
1.2
It is necessary to eject disc from menu. It is possible to make

the equipment in instability when ejecting with the eject button
of drive. It is also possible that data cannot be appended to
DVD-RAM/DVD+RW/CD-RW.
On the equipment, there is the possibility that media is not

recognized properly as follows.
Please take out media and affirm that it is inserted correctly,
and put media in again.
Though free space is fully left on DVD-RAM/DVD+RW/CD-RW Media,
(1) It is not capable of writing or deleting data.
(2) Availability is 0image or free space is 0GB in status
on filing dialog.
Insert Disk
DVD-RAM Disk (With Cartridge)
1 The printing side of the shutter
of DVD-RAM Disk is turned up
and put it on a tray.
Push DVD-RAM Disk on the front

(Drive side) about 2cm.
The label side of DVD-RAM Disk

is pressed down lightly, and set
to a tray with no floating.
DVD-RAM Disk
Label side
3
2
Tray
Fig.1 Insertion of DVD-RAM Disk
H-2
Q1E-EA0612
Cartridge-less DVD-RAM/DVD+RW/CD-RW Disk

Please put a tip into a stopper and set a back end to the Disk
Holder bottom on either side and inside a Disk Guide.
When having not set correctly, it does not operate normally.

For example, a Disk is carried on Disk Holder or Disk Guide.
Moreover it becomes the cause of damaging a Disk.
The tip of Disk is put into

a stopper, and push on the
front (Drive side) about 2cm.
The back end of Disk is put into

Disk Holder A and Disk Holder B.
A Disk is set according to the inner

side of Disk Guide
Label side
Disk Holder A
Disk Holder A
Disk
Guide
Disk
Guide
Cartridge-less
DVD-RAM/
DVD+RW/CD-RW
Stopper
Disk Guide
2
3
Tray
Disk Holder B
Disk Guide
Disk Holder B
Fig. 2 Insertion of Cartridge-less

DVD-RAM/DVD+RW/CD-RW Disk
1.3. Format and Erase
UDF2.0 is used in formatting of DVD-RAM.
UDF1.5 is used in formatting of DVD+RW/CD-RW.
Use format of US equipment while erasing the disc.
1.4. Write
Please do not write disc with other equipment.
1.5. Read
According to the difference of drivers character, it is possible
that DVD-RAM/DVD+RW/CD-RW formatted with other equipment cannot
be read.
1.6. Backup
It is strongly recommended to backup the disc. Please save the
contents with other media in other computers, or copy all the data
to merge folder of the equipment and save them to other media.
(Please refer to 9.2.4 Filing dialog.)
H-3
Q1E-EA0612
1.7. Eject Disc
Please push a disk on the front (Drive side) about 2cm, and
take out, as not to hit a disk in Fig.2.
Please do not turn off power while formatting.

It is possible to destroy the disc to be unusable while turning
off the power within formatting.
<CAUTION>
It is possible that when pushing the eject button in the state
where DVD+RW and CD-RW is inserted in DVD MULTI drive,
disc can not be pushed out even select "DVD Eject" from Main
Menu after that. At that time, the following dialog is submerged
by US images.
Fig. 3 dialog for DVD ejection

Please select the following figure from the displayed icons
while pushing Alt+Tab key. Make the format dialog to be showed.
Fig. 4 Select this icon while pushing Alt+Tab
<CAUTION>
Please do not format disc with other equipment.
Please do not erase disc with other equipment.
Please do not write disc with other equipment.
While reading the disc with other equipment( Personal Computer

etc.), maybe the UDFReader is necessary.
Reading is only supported with Windows system.
UDFReader can be downloaded by the following URL:

http://www.bhacorp.com/download/
H-4
Q1E-EA0612
2.
DVD-RAM is formatted.
(1)
DVD-RAM is inserted in a drive.

For inserting, please push the eject button of a drive, and
set a tray.
(2)
Please select as follows "Main Menu""Disk""DVD-Format".

The dialog of following figure is displayed.
NOTICE: If unrecommended USB Memory is connected,
then it may take time until this dialog is displayed.
Fig. 5 DVD-RAM Format Dialog

(3)
Please select to [Universal Disk Format(UDF2.0)]
(4)
Please input a volume label.

When not inputting,
automatically.
"UDF+A.D+Month+Day"
is
set
(5)
Please select as an option [Execute physical format].
(6)
Please push a [Start(S)]button.
(7)
The dialog of the following figure is displayed.
up
Please push a [Yes(Y)]button
Fig. 6 Format check dialog
H-5
Q1E-EA0612
(8)
Format starts. A format takes from about 35 minutes to about

55 minutes.
Fig. 7 Under format execution
H-6
Q1E-EA0612
3.
Format DVD+RW/CD-RW Disc

(1)
Insert DVD+RW or CD-RW into the drive. Please set the disc
into the tray after pushing the eject button of drive.
(2)
Please select "Main Menu""Disk"DVD Format. The following

dialog will be showed. Please push "Next>" button.
And "Help" button can not be used.
Fig. 8 Welcome to the B'sCLiP World !

(3)
The following dialog will be showed. Please make sure that

(H:) in Host ID is selected then push "Next>" button.
Fig. 9 B'sCLiP Select Drive

(4)
The following dialog will be showed. The type of inserted disc

will be showed at the Disc Type. Please make sure of the Disc
Type and Disc Letter then push the "Next>" button.
Pushing the "Properties" button can set the details of disc
information. Please do not change the settings because they
are the most appropriate. It is possible to format the disc
correctly but write incorrectly if change the settings.
H-7
Q1E-EA0612
Fig. 10 B'sCLiP Disc Information

(5)
The following dialog will be showed. "B'sCLiP" is input as

default volume label. Change it if necessary.
Please push "Finish" button and formatting starts.
Two kinds of formatting methods will be showed as following
Complete Format
Normal Format
Formatting methods can not be selected while formatting
DVD+RW/CD-RW for the first time.
Please select Complete Format while formatting a DVD+RW/CD-RW
for another time. (It is possible that the data can not be
read or written after long time while selecting Normal Format.)
Fig. 11 B'sCLiP Please input Label(For the first time)

NOTICE:
The volume label cannot exceed 11 characters. Space
can not be used.
The following characters can not be used.
, / : ; * ? < > | + = . , [ ]
H-8
Q1E-EA0612
(6)
Formatting Starts
(6.1)DVD+RW
Background Format
Background format is used while formatting DVD+RW.
Part of the DVD+RW is formatted and it can be used immediately.
The other parts of it will be formatted within the idle time
of CPU. This method is called Background Format.
DVD+RW can be used within 3 minutes by this method.
It is writable and readable while background formatting.
Background format will be finished in about 15 minutes.
The following dialog will be showed while ejecting within
background formatting.
Please cancel this operation with pushing "Cancel" button.
Please select one method of ejecting from the dialog while
ejecting anyway.(Turn off the power of equipment, etc.)
Fig. 12 Select one of the RW disc ejection operations

1) Physically formatting starts. Physically formatting will
take approx 1 to 2 minutes.
Fig. 13 Physically formatting dialog(DVD+RW)
H-9
Q1E-EA0612
2) Logically formatting will start automatically after

physically formatting. It will take approx 1 minute. Dialog
will disappear automatically.
Fig. 14 Logically formatting dialog(DVD+RW)

3) After the dialog disappears, the DVD+RW can be used though
it is still background formatting. Please do not eject disk
while background formatting. And do not turn off the power
of equipment while background formatting.
<CAUTION>
It is possible that the format dialog is submerged by other

windows. Please do not operate the equipment within
formatting. Please select the following figure from the
displayed icons while pushing Alt+Tab key. Make the format
dialog to be showed.
It is possible that the refreshing of display will be stopped

if move the dialog while formatting. It will return normal
after formatting is over.
H-10
Q1E-EA0612
(6.2)CD-RW
1) Physically formatting starts. Physically formatting will
take approx 5 to 15 minutes.
Fig. 16 Physically formatting dialog(CD-RW)

2) Logically formatting will start automatically after
physically formatting. It will take approx 10 to 30 minutes.
Fig. 17 Logically formatting dialog(CD-RW)

3) CD-RW is usable
automatically
after
formatting
dialog
disappear
<CAUTION>
It is possible that the format dialog is submerged by other

windows. Please do not operate the equipment within
formatting. Please select the following figure from the
displayed icons while pushing Alt+Tab key. Make the format
dialog to be showed.
It is possible that the refreshing of display will be stopped

if move the dialog while formatting. It will return normal
after formatting is over.
H-11
Q1E-EA0612
4.
Eject Compact Disc

Eject the disc from drive after formatting is over.
<CAUTION>
It takes time ejecting disc. It is possible to be 10 seconds.
NOTICE:
Please do not turn off power while formatting.It is possible
to destroy the disc to be unusable while turning off the
power within formatting.
Please do not eject disc with eject button of drive.
H-12
Q1E-EA0612
Appendix I Using the PC Printer

1.
Preparatory Work
Connect the PC printer with the system and install the driver of
printer to be connected into the system.
Ask our service personnel for installing the driver.
2.
Setting the PC Printer

(1)
Select Main Menu Setup Image Print to display the Set

Up Image Print dialog (refer to Fig. 1).
(2)
Select PC Printer from (a).
(3)
Follow Table 1 to select values for <1> through <5>.
(4)
Please click a (b)[properties] button, when a detailed setup

is required. The setting dialog according to the printer driver
is displayed.
(5)
After selection, check values selected and click the

button.
OK
(a)
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
(b)
Fig. 1 Set Up Image Print Dialog
I-1
Q1E-EA0612
Table 1 Printer Settings

No.
Title
Description
<1>
Select Printer
Select the name of target printer.
<2>
Film Size
Select paper size.
<4>
Select the layout of images.

You can select from following
formats;
1x1 Landscape
Image Display Format
1x2 Portrait
2x2 Landscape
2x3 Portrait
3x3 Landscape
Number of Copies
Select number of copies.
<5>
Paper Source
<3>
Select paper source.
NOTICE: If nothing can be selected, the printer driver may not

be normally installed.
Ask out service personnel for installation.
3.
Print
3.1
Print by the Print key
It is possible to print images to PC printer by the PRINT key.

(1)
Allocating the PRINT key

To print images by using the PRINT key, select Image Printer
from the dialog shown in Fig. 2 to be displayed by selecting
Main Menu Setup Print/REC.
Select Image Printer.
I-2
Q1E-EA0612
(2)
Print
(a) When Freeze Off, display any image to be printed and press
the FREEZE key. Or, after pressing the FREEZE key, reproduce
any image to be printed in the cine mode for selection.
(b) Press the PRINT key. This saves the image temporarily in
the hard disk.
At that time, the number of present image which is saved
is displayed. When saved images are two and Image numbers
to be printed out in one paper is six, a dialog
is displayed.
(c) Repeat Step (a) and (b) for images to be printed out onto
a sheet of paper.
(d) Print will start automatically when number of saved images
reaches a specified value.
At a time of printing out a print mark
is displayed in
the screen.
NOTICE:
When 3D software is displayed, a dialog
which is
shown in saving images for PC printer output and a print
which is shown in printing out are not displayed.
mark
When 3D software is displayed, images being displayed
for PC printer output are all printed out.
When dialog is displayed, a dialog
which is shown
in saving images for PC printer output and a print mark
which is shown in printing out are not displayed.
In this case, please check the LED status of key. When
dialog is disappeared, the mark comes to be displayed.
(3)
Forced output
If turning off the system power when any of saved images remain,
a message shown in Fig.3 appears when the [OK] button is clicked
by Set up Filing dialog and Set up Image print dialog.
Click the [Yes] button. If transfer or print is to be canceled,
select the [No] button for the message.
If any of the following operations takes place, saved images
are outputted to the printer.
[New Patient] button is clicked by Patient Menu.
Pressing the End Exam key. But, when VCR playback screen
or 3D software is displayed, it is impossible to output
forcedly images to PC printer by the End Exam key.
I-3
Q1E-EA0612
Starting the ultrasound system (Any of images saved when

NOTICE:
If selecting the [No] button, saved images are deleted
and they cannot be outputted to the printer any more.
Fig. 3 Forced Output Message

If you changed contents of the settings, saved images
are printed in the setting conditions after the changes.
(4)
Batch printing for every patient

Images can be printed for every patient.
For Details, please refer to 9.2.8 Batch transferring / printing
for every patient.
3.2
Print from the Filing dialog

(1)
Press the Read key to display the Filing dialog (refer to Fig.
4).
(2)
Select any images to be printed.
(3)
Click the [Image Print] button (Fig. 4 (a)).
(4)
When you change the contents of a setting, refer to "2 Setting

the PC Printer".
(5)
Check the contents of a setting and click the [OK] button.
(6)
The images printed in order of the selected images is arranged,

print starts.
I-4
Q1E-EA0612
(a)
Fig. 4 Filing dialog

NOTICE 1:Images in AVI format, MPEG2 format, DICOM format and
3D format cannot be printed. When any images in AVI format,
MPEG2 format, DICOM format or 3D format have been selected,
a message appears as shown in Fig. 5.
Click the [OK] button to continue output to the printer,
or the [Cancel] button to stop output to the printer.
Fig. 5 Print Confirmation Message

NOTICE 2:If the Image Print button is used to output images to
the printer when there are images saved with the PRINT
key, a message appears as shown in Fig. 3. Select the
[Yes] button to output images saved with the PRINT key
as well or the [No] button to delete them.
If selecting the [No] button, however, saved images are
deleted and they cannot be outputted to the printer any
more.
I-5
Q1E-EA0612
3.3
Print Preview
(1)
Print Preview Setup

Using the printing preview function, selects check box of the
"when printing, open a print preview" in the Set Up Image Print
Dialog.
Fig. 6 Print Preview Setup
I-6
Q1E-EA0612
(2)
Print Preview Window Function

In the print preview window , it is possible to delete print
spool images, printing order modification of image, and select
output format.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(5)
(4)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
Fig. 7 Print Preview Window

Number
Content
(1)
Select film size.
(2)
Select output format.
(3)
Select film orientation.
(4)
The spool image is indicated the thumbnail.

The spool images the scroll it is possible with the
scroll bar.
When UNDO key is pressed on thumbnail, an expansion
spool image appears.Fig. 8
I-7
Q1E-EA0612
Number
Content
(5)
print preview image.

The film images the scroll it is possible with the
scroll bar.
In addition the printing page in Indicatory
page/Total number of pages.
(6)
Order of the selective spool image is moved up.
(7)
Order of the selective spool image is moved down.
(8)
The selective spool image is deleted. This time,

Delete dialogue of spool images is indicated.Fig.
9
(9)
The selective spool image is all deleted. This time,

Delete dialogue of spool images is indicated.Fig.
9
(10)
Output to the printer
(11)
Close the print preview window.
Fig. 8 Pop up of print spool image
Fig. 9 Delete dialogue of spool images
I-8
Q1E-EA0612
4.
Cautions
(1)
When no paper remains or no ink remains, refer to the instruction

manual of printer.
(2)
According to the printer connected a dialog box indicating

"Printing" may appear on the ultrasound screen. If it disturbs
image viewing, press the Tab key while pressing the Alt key.
The dialog box indicating "Printing" is canceled.
(3)
Setting place of the printer

When connecting the printer with Ultrasound scanner, the
printer must be placed outside of the Patient Environment to
avoid an electrical shock. Regarding the Patient Environment,
IEC 60601-1-1 Safety requirements for a medical electrical
system describes for the area which is shown in Fig. 10.
(4)
When you print to PC printer on a network, please install the

driver of a printer in ultrasound equipment and set it up to
print direct. Printing via a network server which installed
the driver in the network server cannot be performed.
2.5m
1.5m
Fig. 10 Patient Environment
I-9
Q1E-EA0612
Make sure to use the printer which complies with IEC Publication
60950 Standard (Safety of information processing equipment
including the equipment for office use) or IEC Publication
60601-1 Standard (Safety of medical electrical equipment).
To avoid a danger of electrical shock, never place the printer

to be connected with EUB-5500 within the area of the Patient
Environment.
I-10
Q1E-EA0612
Appendix J Handling of a DVD MULTI drive

1.
2.
3.
Precautions of Handling of a DVD MULTI drive
When moving, please take out a disk and turn OFF a power supply.
A disk may become dirty between prolonged uses. Recommend

cleaning and using disk.
In winter, the cold media which were outside are not used
immediately. Please use it at room temperature.
Precautions on loading operation
When loading of a tray or unloading of a tray, please do not

carry out ON/OFF of a power supply.
Please do not put a drink near a door. There is a possibility

of causing a fall, at the time of unloading of a tray.
About ejection
4.
Please do not used except the case of emergency. If it is used

at the time of usual, it may become the cause of failure of a
main part and data breakage.
Precautions on media handling
Please read the cautions on the use indicated by the purchase

disk and please follow the cautions.
When filling in a character, please fill in only a label side

and enter using what has a soft nib.
Please does not touch a record side by hand and please treat
to be stained neither with a crack nor dirt.
Please wipe the adhering dust and adhering dirt lightly with
CD cleaner or ethyl alcohol of soft cloth. Solvents, such as
benzenes, thinner, a static electricity prevention agent, and
LP gas chestnut call, are not used.
Please leave a disk neither in the place where direct rays hit,
nor the place of heat and high humidity.
J-1
Q1E-EA0612
Appendix K Handling of a USB Memory

"USB Memory"*1 can be used as just like a extenal media(DVD, etc.).
It explains the handling at the following.
NOTICE *1: "USB Memory" is a compact flash memory(storage device)
that is used easily by connecting with USB port.
It might be called, "USB flash memory" or "USB flash
drive", etc.
1.
Recommended USB Memory

Use the USB Memory of under-mentioned maker and the model.
(1)
Recommended USB Memory brand

(a) Sony
(b) Kanguru Solutions
(2)
2.
Recommended USB Memory

(a) Capacity:1GB
USM1GJ
(b) Capacity:128MB
U2-KMD-128
About the handling of USB Memory
2.1. Connection of USB Memory

Please connect USB Memory to the USB port of the ultrasound scanner.
A few seconds after connecting, it will be usable.(When connecting
it for the first time, it may take tens of seconds to a few minutes.)
Status of the connection can be confirmed by "Main Menu" "Disk"
"Status".(Fig.1)
When the volume label is not set to the USB Memory, the display
name will be "Removable Disk".
Otherwise the display name will be same as the volume label.
The volume label can be set by the volume label of "USB Memory
Format".(Refer to 2.3 Format of USB Memory.)
K-1
Q1E-EA0612
Fig.1 Disk Status

<CAUTION>
2.2
The number of USB memory that can be connected with device

is two or less. Please set a unique volume label to an
individual USB Memory when you connect two USB Memories
at the same time. The display name will be the same when
the same volume label is set or the volume label is not
set, and it will be indistinguishable.
Please remove the USB Memory when the ultrasound scanner

system starts.
Removing of USB Memory

Please confirm the USB Memory is not accessed, and remove the USB
Memory from the USB port.
Please refer to the manual of the USB memory to get information
of the access judgment.
<CAUTION>
There is a possibility that data is lost when the USB

memory is removed while accessing it by any chance.
Please use DVD-RAM to save it safely.
K-2
Q1E-EA0612
2.3
Format of USB Memory

(1)
Connect USB Memory to the USB port of the ultrasound scanner

to format.
(2)
MAIN
key. Next, from Main Menu, choose "Disk" and
Press the MENU
then "USB Mem For...".
The USB Memory Selection window appears.(Fig.2)
Fig.2 USB Memory Selection window.

(3)
Select the USB Memory to format and push "OK" button.

The USB Memory Formatter window appears.(Fig.3)
(4)
In the Format window, make sure that the following settings

have been specified.
Capacity
: The capacity of the USB Memory you

inserted.
File system
: FAT*
Allocation unit size
: Default allocation size
Volume label
: Any character string

(such as "USBMem1")
Quick Format
: Not Selected
NOTICE*: Since it does not correspond in old OS, be careful

not to select FAT32.
K-3
Q1E-EA0612
Fig.3 USB Memory Formatter window

(5)
Click the Start button to start formatting the disk.
(6)
After the formatting completes, click the Close button to close

the Format window.
<CAUTION>
Keep in mind that all data in the USB Memory is deleted when
the USB Memory is formatted.
3.
Others
It is not suitable to use USB memory to save images and data safely,
because it is in the state that can be removed at any time.
Please use it to save temporary.
K-4
Q1E-EA0612
Index
........................ 13-3
Baseline.................. 5-80
360 Radial display...... 5-139
Basic function of TDI.... 5-128
360 Radial display mode. 5-139
Batch printing............ 9-48
Batch transferring........ 9-48
Acoustic output indices... 4-23
B-color. 5-40, 5-54, 5-64, 5-71
Acoustic output level..... 4-22
B-color: Selecting colors. 5-20
Acoustic Power Level Control

........................ 15-2
Beam line center control in dual

ODM mode ............... 5-123
Adjusting angle of probe mark

........................ 6-16
BIO Unit EZU-EK25........ 15-12
Adjusting brightness of the

monitor .................. 4-5
Biplane display........... 5-15
Biplane................... 5-88
Blend function........... 5-134
Adjusting Doppler angle... 5-48
B-mode Image Display...... 15-2
Adjusting Doppler sound volume

........................ 5-50
B-Mode Menu................ 8-8
Adjusting gain (brightness)5-35,

5-48, 5-71, 5-78
Adjustment functions...... 5-63
Advanced dTHI (dynamic Tissue
Harmonic Image) ......... 5-13
Body Mark................. 8-31

Body Mark function menu.. 5-19,
5-39, 5-54, 5-64, 5-71, 5-88,
5-89, 5-90, 6-17
Body marks................ 15-5
Bright.Type............... 7-17
AGC (Automatic gain control)

........................ 5-22
ANNOTATION function menu... 6-4
Calling ANNOTATION menu.... 6-3
Annotation Menu........... 8-24
Center position of S-shape curve

.................. 5-56, 5-72
Application............... 15-5
APPLICATION Function....... 8-1
Center value of S-shape curve

.................. 5-25, 5-41
APPLICATION parameter setting

menu ..................... 8-7
CFM filter................ 5-91
Application parameter setup

................ 5-126, 5-135
CFM MENU of MAIN MENU..... 5-94

CFM Mode.................. 5-74
Auxiliary AC Outlet...... 15-17
CFM Preference............ 5-88
CFM-Mode Menu............. 8-16
B MENU of MAIN MENU....... 5-26
Changing Time............. 4-21
B mode..................... 5-8
Character Display......... 15-4
Backup of system setting data
Character font............. 6-5
Index-1
Q1E-EA0612
Character input menu....... 6-1
Character size............. 6-5
Default application setting 8-4
Character, Annotation and Body

Mark ..................... 6-1
Delete..................... 8-4
Check before use.......... 13-1
Details of Preset Operation Setup

Menu .................... 6-23
Deleting characters........ 6-3
Checkup after storage for a long

time .................... 13-3
Digital Capture card unit EZU-Pi11

....................... 15-14
Checkup while using the scanner

unit .................... 13-2
Digital Scan Converter.... 15-2
Cine Memory.............. 15-11
Disk Menu................. 7-27
Cine memory mode.......... 9-54
Display................... 8-22
Cine memory ODM mode..... 5-125
Display angle (width)5-53, 5-64
Cleaning of equipment..... 13-4
Display Menu............... 7-2
Color Flow Mapping........ 15-8
Display of B mode.......... 5-8
color function............ 5-19
Display of B/PW-mode...... 5-46
Color map................. 5-83
Display of Doppler mode from

single B mode ........... 5-47
Combine Display........... 5-18

Component Description...... 3-1
Display of steerable CW-mode image

........................ 5-62
Components and Functions... 3-1
Display setting of ANNOTATION menu

......................... 6-6
Connecting cords......... 5-102

Connecting the probe 4-1, 5-145
Displaying B/M-mode image. 5-35
Connection of PC printer and the

HUB for Network function 11-7
Displaying body mark...... 6-15

Displaying physiological signal
waveform ............... 5-103
Connection of Peripheral devices

........................ 11-4
Displaying single element CW-mode

image ................... 5-69
Connection of USB Memory... K-1

Continuous record mode and
continuous record of heart beat
automatic detection mode 9-56
Displaying upright position mark

........................ 6-16
Disposable ECG electrode adapter
EZU-DA1 ................ 15-16
Control screen selection.. 5-24

Controls Affecting the Acoustic
Output .................. 4-22
D-Mode Menu............... 8-12

Dop. Menu of Main Menu... 5-57,
5-66, 5-73
Copy & Paste............... 8-3

Copy and Move............. 9-29
Doppler................... 15-6
Correcting characters...... 6-5
Dual CFM.................. 5-82
Current Condition.......... 8-3
Dynamic range 5-21, 5-40, 5-55,

5-65, 15-1
CW unit EZU-CW4 (for pencil CW

probe) ................. 15-14
E
ECG Function............. 5-102
Index-2
Q1E-EA0612
ECG MENU of MAIN MENU.... 5-110
Frame Rate................ 5-39
ECG synchronization (ECG SYNC)

....................... 5-106
Freeze of M-mode image.... 5-37
Edit Data.................. 8-3
Function menu operation.... 5-2
Freq. Range............... 7-17
Edit Data <APPLICATION parameter

setting menu> ............ 8-7
Function to remove body motion

........................ 5-91
Edit Name.................. 8-4
Functional Checkup........ 13-9
Edit of image file: Merged Folder

........................ 9-46
Editing APPLICATION Function8-2
Gain adjustment 5-8, 5-63, 15-1
Ending ANNOTATION menu..... 6-6
-coefficient ............. 5-25
Ending edit................ 8-6
-CURVE selection ......... 5-24
Ending entry............... 6-3
-CURVE selection ......... 5-65
Ending Use................ 4-31
General...... 1-1, 5-116, 5-128
enhancement............... 5-22
Gray Map............ 5-22, 5-40
Enhancement... 5-40, 5-55, 5-65

Entering Body Mark........ 6-15
Entering Characters........ 6-1
Handling of a DVD MULTI drive

......................... J-1
Entering Characters with

Annotation ............... 6-3
Handling of a USB Memory... K-1
Entering Hospital Name.... 4-21

Entering the comment..... 10-26
Handling of DVD-RAM/DVD+RW/CD-RW
Media .................... H-1
Environmental conditions... 1-6
Handling probes........... 1-10
Equipment Composition...... 2-1
HdTHI Function............ 5-17
Export Application........ 8-41
HI REZ.. 5-21, 5-40, 5-55, 5-65
Export/Import.............. 8-4
HI Support Reset.......... 5-16
Export/Import Menu........ 8-40
HI Support start-up 5-16, 5-53,

5-64, 5-71, 5-90
Extenal Dimensions....... 15-17
HI Zoom function......... 5-150
Home position.............. 6-3
F6 CFI/CFA selection...... 5-88
Horizontal reversal of image

........................ 5-18
Features............ 1-1, 5-116
How to use a log file...... D-1
Field of View............. 15-2

Filing daialog............ 9-19
Fixed-B................... 5-87
ID Input.................. 4-10
Flow Invert............... 5-89
Image Data Transfer Menu... 7-4
Flow Invert (For CFM)..... 5-85
Image display angle....... 5-17
Focusing.................. 15-2
Image display angle (Width)5-38
Index-3
Q1E-EA0612
Image Examination Modes... 15-1
Measurement menu.......... 8-25
Image filing function...... 9-3
Measurement on review image

....................... 10-15
Image Filling Software... 15-10
Measurement procedure.... 10-15
Image Mem. Menu............ 7-3
Memory capacity setting... 9-55
Image memory............... 9-1
Message list............... A-1
Image memory unit.......... 9-1
M-mode.................... 5-35
Image Orientation/Rotation 15-2
M-mode Image Display...... 15-3
IMAGE PROCESS menu. 5-21, 5-40,

5-55, 5-65, 5-72, 5-91
M-Mode Menu............... 8-11
Image Processing.......... 15-3
Mode adjustment function. 10-26
Image quality adjustment function

(IMAGE PROCESS menu) ... 5-124
MODE DEPENDED menu. 5-15, 5-38,

5-52, 5-64, 5-71, 5-82
Image recording..... 10-1, 10-5
Monitor handling.......... 1-13
Image replay.............. 9-57
Movement.................. 12-1
Import Application........ 8-42
Movement of equipment..... 12-1
Installation............... 1-8
Moving base line.......... 5-49
Intended Use............... 1-5
Moving display position.. 5-11,

5-36
Moving of Body-mark. 5-89, 5-90
Keyboard operation......... 5-1

Keyboard Panel............. 3-2
Moving position of probe mark

........................ 6-16
Moving tagging width in parallel

........................ 5-93
Label location............ 1-15
Lateral inversion of image 5-88
Needle Guide Line........ 5-111
List of ANNOTATION......... 6-7
Network Interface EZU-Pi6 15-13
M blank width....... 5-38, 5-89
Oblique................... 5-81
M MENU of MAIN MENU....... 5-42
Oblique function.......... 5-50
Main Menu.................. 7-1
Oblique invert............ 5-86
Main Menu of each Ultrasound Mode

......................... 7-1
ODM....................... 5-20
MAIN MENU operation........ 5-6
ODM beam line operation.. 5-120
Maintenance and Checkup... 13-1
ODM enhancement switching5-124,

5-125
Meas.Menu.................. 7-3
ODM-switching .... 5-124, 5-125
Measurement Functions..... 15-3
Omni-Directional M mode.. 5-116
Measurement functions assigned in

Setup menu .............. 5-20
Omni-Directional M mode display

software EZU-OD2 ....... 15-12
Index-4
Q1E-EA0612
Opening Export/Import Menu 8-40
Precautions in movement... 12-1
Operating probe mark supporting

radial scan ............. 6-16
Precautions in operation and use

........................ 1-10
Operating requirements of ODM

function ............... 5-117
Precautions regarding ultrasound

output .................. 1-14
Operating requirements of TDI

function ............... 5-128
Preparation before movement12-1
Operation Modes............ 5-1
Preset Operation function. 6-19
Preparation before Use..... 4-1
Operation of peripheral devices

........................ 11-3
Probe connection.......... 15-1

Probe Extension unit EZU-AB7
....................... 15-16
Operation Procedures....... 4-1

Operationg Environment... 15-17
PW Mode................... 5-46
Option................... 15-12
Optional Components........ 2-1
Other.................... 15-17
Real-time ODM mode....... 5-118
Others Menu............... 8-34
Receive dynamic filter.... 5-23
Outline of EUB-5500........ 1-1
Recommended USB Memory..... K-1
Overview................... 5-1
Recommended/Tested
DVD-RAM/DVD+RW/CD-RW ..... G-1
Record of image........... 9-54
Patient.................... 4-9
Recorder Menu.............. 7-5
Peak Hold................. 5-87
Reference frequency (REF FREQ)

........................ 5-79
Periodical inspection of system

performance ............. 13-3
Registration of review image mode

....................... 10-19
Periodical test of system safety

........................ 13-3
Registration of user defined

annotation .............. 6-14
Peripheral devices possible to use

on outside commercial power
supply outlet ........... 11-3
Rejection5-25, 5-41, 5-56, 5-65,

5-72, 5-93
Peripheral equipment...... 11-1
Releasing Freeze........... 4-5
Persist................... 5-23
Remote control of VCR10-1, 10-5
Physiology Menu............ 7-7
Repair, readjustment and disposal

........................ 14-1
Positioning the viewing monitor

......................... 4-2
Retrieve of Images........ 9-34
Power ON................... 4-4
REVIEW.................... 5-20
Power Requirements.. 1-7, 15-17
rotation of image......... 5-18
Precaution in Combination with

Peripheral Devices ...... 11-1
Precautions in connection of
peripheral devices ...... 11-2
Sampling gate moves depending on

the color ROI ........... 5-78
Precautions in handling... 1-10
Saturation5-25, 5-41, 5-56, 5-65,
Index-5
Q1E-EA0612
5-72
Set up Filing.............. 9-7
Scan line density.. 5-38, 5-53,

5-64, 5-86
Set up Preset Operation... 6-20

Setting Auto Freeze Function4-8
Screen division5-39, 5-54, 5-64,

5-89, 5-90
Setting COLOR BOX range... 5-76

Setup Menu................. 7-7
SCSI Card Interface unit EZU-Pi1

....................... 15-13
Simult.................... 5-90
SCSI Printer............... B-1
Single /Dual ODM modes... 5-122
Selecting a probe and application

......................... 4-6
Single Element CW-Mode.... 5-69

Single screen display of M-mode
Image ................... 5-36
Selecting an image subject to

control ................. 5-41
SIZE....................... 6-1
Selecting B mode refresh mode

........................ 5-89
SORT....................... 6-5
SPD....................... 5-20
Selecting B-color function5-39,

5-54, 5-64, 5-71
Special operating method in the

360 Radial display mode 5-140
Selecting B-mode image Refresh

mode .................... 5-52
Specifications............ 15-1
Standard Components........ 2-1
Selecting image subject to control

........................ 5-72
Start of ultrasound scanner system

by system CD ............. F-1
Selecting screen subject to

control ................. 5-92
Starting Main Menu......... 7-1
Selecting Velocity Tagging 5-93
Starting the Equipment..... 4-4
Selection of AGC (Auto Gain

correction) ............. 5-65
Steerable CW doppler unit 15-14
Selection of FFT analysis mode

........................ 5-65
Storage Devices........... 15-5
Steerable CW Mode......... 5-62
Selection of FFT- ........ 5-65
Store to Hard Disk function 9-3
Selection of polarity display of

Doppler-mode image ...... 5-64
Switches over -coefficient5-41,

5-56, 5-72
Selection of reference frequency

(REF FREQ) .............. 5-63
Switches over -CURVE5-41, 5-56,

5-72
Selection of screen to be
controlled .............. 5-65
Switching electronic focus 5-37
Selection of VCR/EXT mode and

remote control of VCR .. 10-2,
10-7
Switching over AGC (Automatic gain

control) .......... 5-40, 5-55
Switching line density.... 5-17
Switching over APPLICATION. 8-1
Selection of wall filter.. 5-65

Selection of -coefficient 5-65
Switching over CFM interpolation

level ................... 5-92
Selects B mode image substitution

mode .................... 5-64
Switching over CFM refresh

interval ................ 5-87
Service Life............... 1-6
Switching over color map.. 5-89
Index-6
Q1E-EA0612
Switching over Doppler mode

polarity display ........ 5-71
........................ 4-33
The caution of connecting with
Multiplane Transesophageal
Probe EUP-ES52M and EUP-ES52E
........................ 4-32

......................... 5-9
steps ................... 5-10
The rate of compression of a file

......................... E-1
Switching over FFT analysis mode

.................. 5-55, 5-72
The usage of a Preset Operation

function ................ 6-19
Switching over FFT- 5-56, 5-72
TRACKBALL PRIORITY......... 5-2
Switching over line density5-89
Transfer of Image......... 9-17
Switching over lower limit 5-93
Transportation of equipment12-3
Switching over persistence 5-92
Twin screen display of B mode

images .................. 5-13
Switching over polarity display of

Doppler mode image ...... 5-53
Type of Probes............ 15-1
Switching over reference

frequencies (REF FREQ) .. 5-49
Switching over sample gate width

........................ 5-51
ULTRASOUND POWER Control.. 4-29
Switching over sweep speed 5-38
Ultrasound Transmitter/Receiver
........................ 15-1
Switching over the wall filter

........................ 5-72
Up/Down Reversal of ECG waveform

....................... 5-106
Switching over transmit frequency

........................ 5-10
Up/down reversal of image. 5-19

Usage methods of Probe Extension
unit EZU-AB7 ........... 5-145
Switching over upper limit 5-93

Switching over velocity range
(PRF) ................... 5-50
USB HUB unit EZU-UH2..... 15-16
Switching over velocity variance

........................ 5-92
USB Memory Interface unit EZU-UM1

....................... 15-16
Switching over wall filter 5-55
USB Printer................ C-1
Switching Packet size..... 5-91
Using ALARA in B/M-mode... 5-44
Switching the probe...... 5-147
Using ALARA in B/PW-mode.. 5-60

Using ALARA in B-mode..... 5-33
Using ALARA in CFM mode... 5-98
TDI Mode................. 5-128

TDI-B mode............... 5-130
Using ALARA in CFM mode with/M

and/PW modes ........... 5-100
TDI-M mode............... 5-131
Using ALARA in CW-mode.... 5-67
TDI-PW mode.............. 5-133
Using the PC Printer....... I-1
The caution of connecting with

Intracavital probe
EUP-R54AW-19/33, Linear type
probe (Wide view type) EUP-L53L
and endoscopic probe EG-3670URK
V
Value at center point of S-Curve
........................ 5-65
Index-7
Q1E-EA0612

............ 5-49, 5-71, 5-78
Weight............ 15-15, 15-17
VCR / DVD video recorder.. 10-1
VCR Control............... 15-5
Zoom Function............ 5-148
Velocity Range (PRF)...... 5-79
Zoom function(usual)..... 5-148
W
Waste Products........... 13-10
E
Index-8
Q1E-EA0612

EUB 5500 Instruction Q1E EA0612 14

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

EUB 5500 Instruction Q1E EA0612 14

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Ultrasound Diagnostic Scanner

Special Notes to Operators and Maintenance Managers

Copyright Hitachi Medical Corporation. 2003 - 2008, 2010.

All rights reserved.

Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

MainConcept Motion-JPEG Codec 1999/2000-2003 MainConcept AG. All rights

In this document, the Windows XP operating system is called Windows XP.

Full Quality Assurance System

TV Rheinland LGA Products GmbH

: HITACHI MEDICAL CORPORATION

European Representative : Hitachi Medical Systems GmbH

Acoustic output indices

Using ALARA in CFM mode

To safely and correctly use this equipment and to maintain its

Safety Consideration on Operation

Authorized personnel for operation of this equipment

Definition of words and symbols

Types and definition of precautionary notices

This note indicates any condition or action

This note indicates any condition or action

This note indicates any condition or action

This note indicates important precautions

Type and definition of symbol

TYPE B APPLIED PART

TYPE BF APPLIED PART

Defibrillator-roof TYPE BF APPLIED PART

Some graphical symbols that are used in labeling of Hitachi

User's responsibility on equipment management

Hitachi shall not be liable for any failure or damage on the

Hitachi shall not be liable for any failure or damage on the

Hitachi shall not be liable for any failure or damage on the

Hitachi shall not be liable for any failure or damage on the

Hitachi shall not be liable for any consequential damage or

Hitachi shall not be liable for any failure or damage on the

Hitachi shall not be liable for any failure or damage on the

Necessity of periodical maintenance service

From a viewpoint of the purpose and importance of medical

Carry on the daily checkup and periodical maintenance service

Maintenance service for the equipment of which warranty period

When daily checkup and periodical maintenance service were

Precautions in Operation of Ultrasound Scanner System

1. Should any abnormality occur on the equipment, immediately

Precaution on installation environmental conditions

1. This equipment is not CATEGORY AP/APG EQUIPMENT.

1. This equipment is not drip-proof or water-proof type. Never

Precautions for Electrical Safety

1. This ultrasound scanner has been designed as a class 1

Precautions in use of probe

1. Do not use the probe of which the head surface is scratched

1. Handle the probes with great care. Be careful neither to

Precautions against ultrasound output power

Also, other causes of electromagnetic interference are the

(4) Handling of peripheral devices

Accuracy of display (Essential performance

Artefact of display (Essential performance

MI/TI and distance display (Essential performance

Ultrasound output power (Essential performance

Probe surface temperature (Essential performance

Technical Information in EMC Standards

Table 2 Cables Connectable with EUB-5500

Maximum cable length (m)

Maximum cable length (m)

(2) Table of electromagnetic emission compatibility standards

Do not use EUB-5500 being extremely close to any other device.